JP7479939B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines that allow players to play games.

Some gaming machines use a launching device to launch gaming balls, which are gaming media, into a gaming area, and when the gaming balls enter a winning area, such as a winning slot, provided in the gaming area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. In addition, some gaming machines are provided with a variable display device that can variably display (also called "variable") identification information, and are configured to change the gaming state (the state of the gaming machine; specifically, the state in which the gaming machine is controlled) and provide a predetermined gaming value to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device becomes a specific display result (so-called pachinko machines).

The gaming value refers to the state of the variable winning ball device installed in the gaming area of the gaming machine becoming advantageous to the player in terms of making it easier for the ball to win, generating rights that lead to advantageous conditions for the player, or making it easier for the conditions for the payout of winning balls to be met.

In a pachinko game machine, a "jackpot" occurs when a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of a special pattern (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the entry of a game ball into the start winning hole. The derived display means that a pattern (final stop pattern) is finally stopped and displayed. When a jackpot occurs, for example, the big prize winning hole opens a predetermined number of times, and the game moves to a big prize game state in which the ball is more likely to win. During each opening period, if a predetermined number (e.g., 10) of big prize winning holes are won, the big prize winning hole closes. The number of times the big prize winning hole opens is fixed to a predetermined number (e.g., 15 rounds). An opening time (e.g., 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and the big prize winning hole closes when the opening time has elapsed even if the number of winning holes does not reach the predetermined number. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big prize winning hole may be called a round. Also, the game during a round may be called a round game.

In addition, in a state where a pattern other than the pattern that will be the final stop pattern (for example, the center pattern among the left, middle, and right patterns) on a variable display device continues for a predetermined time and stops, oscillates, expands and contracts, or changes shape while matching a specific display result, or where multiple patterns fluctuate synchronously with the same pattern, or the positions of the displayed patterns are swapped, and the possibility of a jackpot occurring continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states), a reach effect is called a reach effect. Also, a reach state and its appearance are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, a variable display that includes a reach effect is referred to as a reach variable display. If the display result of the pattern variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it is a "miss" and the variable display state ends. The player plays while enjoying how to generate a jackpot.

In this type of gaming machine, for example, there is one that makes it possible to execute an effect similar to that of moving a movable body as a structure by displaying a pseudo-movable body display in a moving manner (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-92949 A

Unlike the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 above, the pseudo-movable body is simply displayed moving in the same way as a movable body, and there was a problem in that it was not possible to enhance the entertainment value of the presentation.

The present invention has been made in consideration of such problems, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of the simulated moving body display.

(A) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state when a specific display result is derived and displayed by executing variable display of a plurality of types of performance identification information,
A movable body that can be moved;
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance ,
The performance execution means includes:
A special effect can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
A specific effect can be executed before the special effect is executed,
The display means is
The pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in the specific performance and the special performance,
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved in the specific performance, the pseudo-movable object display can be moved from the first display position to the second display position, and then hidden without being moved from the second display position to the first display position, and a suggestion image suggesting the execution of the special performance can be displayed in a display area including the second display position;
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved during the special performance, the pseudo-movable object display may be moved from the first display position to the second display position, and then moved from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden ;
The pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving at a speed faster than the moving speed of the movable body.
It is characterized by the following.
Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed by executing a variably displayed first identification information and a variably displayed second identification information,
A state control means capable of controlling to a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state (e.g., a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-19),
An update means capable of updating the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100);
The state control means can control the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, thereby establishing a special condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 8-17, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173).
The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100);
The special condition is established based on a predetermined display result (e.g., a losing pattern) different from the specific display result being derived and displayed a special number of times in succession as the display result of the variable display (e.g., the part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; the part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100).
moreover,
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
When the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a predetermined period, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, rescue of the player can be preferably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is variably displayed, the numerical information continues to be updated, so that the player can be rescued easily and the motivation of the player can be increased.
Furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body presentation and the pseudo movable body display presentation.

In addition, the embodiments for implementing the invention described below include the invention relating to the gaming machine of (A) below. Conventionally, gaming machines that execute group effects that display images of multiple characters progressing in a group, as shown in JP 2019-050851 A, have been known. Gaming machines capable of executing group effects in which images of multiple characters or objects appear have been disclosed. According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to make the game more interesting by executing group effects, but there is still room for improvement in such group effects.

The present invention was conceived in light of this situation, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can more effectively execute group performances.

The gaming machine described in the means (A) is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
When the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a predetermined period, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body presentation and the pseudo movable body display presentation.

The invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of this invention, or it may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of this invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view of a pachinko game machine at characteristic portion 120IW. An explanatory diagram showing an example configuration of a special variable winning ball device in characteristic section 120IW. 13 is a diagram showing the configuration of various control boards and the like in characteristic portion 120IW. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing examples of a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a time-saving miss determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table and a small hit type determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a time-saving type determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of small hit game. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature portion 120IW. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main processing in the characteristic section 120IW. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special pattern process in the feature portion 120IW. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern change processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. This is a flowchart showing the processing before the small win is released. This is a flowchart showing the processing during small win release. This is a flowchart showing the processing after a small hit is closed. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing. FIG. 11 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in characteristic portion 120IW. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific example of a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific example of a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. An explanatory diagram of a rescue setting suggestion effect determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. This is an explanatory diagram of the table for determining the setting suggestion performance when a jackpot occurs. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of presentation patterns when transitioning to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of presentation patterns when transitioning to rescue time reduction. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process in Modification 1. A flowchart showing the processing after a small hit is closed in variant example 2. A flowchart showing the processing after a small hit is closed in variant example 3. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing in variant example 4. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols in modified example 5. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process in modified example 5. 23 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols in modified example 6. A timing chart showing the timing of the pre-reading preview performance restriction period in variant example 7. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of control of various time-saving states in Modification Example 8. An explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table and a small hit type determination table. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of small hit game. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in the feature section 090IW. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in the feature section 090IW. This is a flowchart showing the processing after a small hit is closed. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. This is an explanatory diagram to explain a specific example of the presentation mode when a small hit occurs. This is an explanatory diagram to explain a specific example of the presentation mode when a small hit occurs. An explanatory diagram for explaining modified examples of the opening pattern of small hit games. This is an explanatory diagram to explain a specific example of the presentation mode when a small hit occurs. This is an explanatory diagram to explain a specific example of the presentation mode when a small hit occurs. An explanatory diagram for explaining modified examples of the opening pattern of small hit games. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 113IW. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 113IW. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a process related to output of each test signal in a test terminal process; 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a process related to output of each test signal in a test terminal process; 13 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting demo performance control process. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a caption display execution lottery table and a caption display mode determination lottery table. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing types of time-saving options. An explanatory diagram showing the changing patterns of special patterns and decorative patterns. An explanatory diagram showing the changing patterns of special patterns and decorative patterns. An explanatory diagram showing the changing patterns of special patterns and decorative patterns. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the first special symbol. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the first special symbol. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the first special symbol. 13 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the first special pattern change processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a first special pattern stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a first special pattern stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the second special symbol. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the second special symbol. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the second special symbol. 13 is a flowchart showing a second variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second special pattern change process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second special pattern stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second special pattern stopping process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the game state transitions. 10 is a time chart for explaining an example of control of a gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode of a time-saving entry presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation form of the time-saving entry presentation in variant example 1-3. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the game state transitions in the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the first special pattern in variant example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the first special pattern in variant example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the first special pattern in variant example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the first special pattern in variant example 2. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of executing each effect in variant example 2. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode of a provocative reach in variant example 2. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode for notifying the establishment of rescue time reduction in variant example 2. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of control of a gaming state in Modification Example 2. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view showing a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic part 241SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic section 241SG. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 13A and 13B are explanatory diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern. A diagram showing the execution periods of various effects in normal reaches and super reaches. This is a diagram to explain the content and configuration of various effects in Super Reach. This shows the expected probability of a jackpot depending on the execution status of development effects A and B. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the development process of a pachinko gaming machine. 1A is a diagram showing a manner in which the mounted movable body moves, and FIG. 1B is a diagram explaining a situation in which the mounted movable body is lifted. 1A is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body. 13A is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the second pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body. 1A is a diagram showing the movable range of the mounted movable body, (B) is a movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (C) is a diagram showing the movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. 13A is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the preview performance type determination process. 1A is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance A, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance B. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of advanced performance A, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advanced performance A. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of development suggestion effect, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of development suggestion effect. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of advanced performance B, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advanced performance B. 1A is a flowchart showing the process for determining the type of final effect, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of final effect. (A) to (H) are figures showing examples of the performance operations of Super Reach β, mainly in normal reaches. (A) to (J) are figures showing examples of performance actions mainly in weak super reaches. (A) to (F) are figures showing examples of the performance operations in a weak super reach. (A) to (D) are figures showing examples of performance actions mainly during strong super reaches. (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of strong super reach performance. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of presentation operations after a confirmed jackpot is announced. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light-emitting display unit and the mounted movable body LED. FIG. 13A to 13F are diagrams showing examples of the performance of preview performance B in super reach γ. 13A to 13F are diagrams showing examples of the performance of preview performance B in super reach γ. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display. FIG. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG. 13A to 13H are diagrams showing a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing a third modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the play area), a first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided that perform a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special patterns (also called special patterns) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled vertically or updated) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into a starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (to the left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol pending display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a player rotating a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through a passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If a game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that allow many prize balls to be obtained, and jackpot types that allow few or no prize balls to be obtained.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed by sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and/or by turning on/off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, etc.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a look-ahead preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a look-ahead preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
2, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. are mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, a power supply board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on or not (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S9). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply being stopped. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, the status of various timers, etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were changing, the change of the special symbols will be resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described below.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it diagnoses an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (described in detail later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 4. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 6 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 6 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing a look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the start winning. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, if a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is executed when the presentation control process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, they also include one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 120IW)
Next, the characteristic part 120IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characteristic part 120IW, the game state is controlled to either the normal state (non-time-saving state) or the time-saving state. In this example, in the time-saving state, the average special chart fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the average normal chart fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "normal chart winning" in the normal chart game is higher compared to the normal state. For example, while the normal chart winning probability is 10% in the normal state, the normal chart winning probability is increased to 90% in the time-saving state, making it easier for the game ball to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port). It is not limited to such a mode, and for example, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be lengthened compared to the normal state, so that the game ball is easier to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port).

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result is a jackpot and the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, there are also cases where the variable display result is a miss and the game is controlled to the time-saving state based on the derived display of a time-saving miss pattern.

In addition, in this example, even if the next jackpot or time-saving miss occurs after the specified number of times (900 times in this example) of changing displays have ended after the gaming machine is powered on, after a jackpot occurs, or after the time-saving miss occurs, the machine may be controlled to the time-saving state (rescue time-saving).

In the time-saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the time for which the normal symbol changes, (3) control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and (4) control to shorten the time for which the special symbol changes can be performed. All of the controls (1) to (4) may be performed, or some of the controls (1) to (4) may not be performed. For example, the controls (1) to (4) performed may be different or the same in the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a missed time-saving state, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state.

In addition, it is preferable to define the number of fluctuations n until control is applied to the rescue time reduction and the number of time reductions N in the rescue time reduction as follows.
2.5P≦n≦3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of the jackpot probability ML, n = number of operations, N = number of time-saving operations)
Specifically, for example, when the probability of a jackpot is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time-saving periods N is 120 to 1140.

In this example, the second special symbol is more likely to change display during the time-saving state, but as described below, the probability of a small win is increased when the second special symbol is changed display, so the time-saving state is more likely to be controlled to a small win game state.

(Board configuration)
8-1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 120IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 120IW, in the game area, a first path among the flow paths through which the game balls flow down is mainly provided in an area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and a second path among the flow paths through which the game balls flow down, which is different from the first path, is mainly provided in an area to the right of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 to make the game ball flow down the first path is called a left hit. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 to make the game ball flow down the second path is called a right hit. The first path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball into the left side of the game area, so it may be called the left hit path. Also, the second path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball into the right side of the game area, so it may be called the right hit path.

The first path and the second path may be separate paths, or may be paths that are partially shared. The left and right play areas may be separated, for example, by the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the play nails within the play area.

When a game ball is launched from the ball launching device in response to the operation of the ball operating handle 30 and hit into the game area, if it is guided to the left game area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the right game area. Also, when a game ball is guided to the right game area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area.

A winning ball device 6A that constitutes the first starting winning hole is provided as a structure through which game balls that are hit into the left game area of the game area can enter.

The structures through which game balls that are hit into the right game area can enter include a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B that constitutes the second start winning port, a special variable winning ball device 120IW17 that constitutes the special winning port, and a special variable winning ball device 7 that constitutes the large winning port.

In the left play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the winning ball device 6A of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the winning ball device 6A, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and the special variable winning ball device 7 of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and the special variable winning ball device 7, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right.

It is also possible for a game ball hit into the right game area to have the potential to enter the winning ball device 6A, but from the standpoint of playability, it is desirable to make this possibility extremely low compared to the possibility of a game ball hit into the left game area entering them. Conversely, it is also possible for a game ball hit into the left game area to have the potential to enter the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, but from the standpoint of playability, it is desirable to make this possibility extremely low compared to the possibility of a game ball hit into the right game area entering them.

The special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is a device for determining whether a game ball has entered the V-shaped area, which is a condition for generating a big win, when a small win occurs.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 120IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, a right-hit LED 120IW10 is provided below the normal reserve display 25C as shown in FIG. 8-1. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a right-hit notification LED 120IW20 is provided to the right of the image display device 5.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 8-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 in the present characteristic part 120IW. As shown in FIG. 8-2, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 120IW17a formed as the bottom of the flow path through which the game ball flows down, and in a small win game state, the bottom member 120IW17a is moved forward from a closed state in which it is moved forward to a rearward state, thereby opening the special winning port that becomes the winning area. The game ball that has entered the special winning port is detected by the special winning port switch 120IW24.

In this example, when a game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole) and is detected by the count switch 23, 15 prize balls are awarded, whereas when a game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning hole) and is detected by the special winning hole switch 120IW24, 3 prize balls are awarded.

The bottom member 120IW17a is also controlled to change from a closed state to an open state by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) driving the solenoid 120IW83.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, in this characteristic part 120IW, a game ball that enters the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning port) is further guided to the guide path 120IW01 provided to the right of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17. The guide path 120IW01 further branches into two paths 120IW02, 03, and a game ball guided to the guide path 120IW01 is guided to the left path 120IW02 or the right path 120IW03. The left path 120IW02 is a V winning port, and a game ball that enters the V winning port is detected by the V winning port switch 120IW20a.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, a V prize opening opening plate 120IW20 is provided near the entrance of the left side path 120IW02 (V prize opening), and when the V prize opening opening plate 120IW20 is open, the game ball guided to the guide path 120IW01 enters the left side path 120IW02 (V prize opening) and becomes the V prize opening. Also, when the V prize opening opening plate 120IW20 is closed, the game ball guided to the guide path 120IW01 enters the right side path 120IW03 and is discharged to the back side of the game area.

The V winning opening opening plate 120IW20 is controlled from a closed state to an open state by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) driving the solenoid 120IW84.

In addition, when this feature unit 120IW is controlled to a small win game state, it is controlled to a big win game state after the small win game ends, provided that a game ball enters the V winning hole 120IW02 during the small win game state and is detected by the V winning hole switch 120IW20A.

In addition, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is formed with a number of regulating pieces that slow down the speed at which the game ball flows down the bottom member 120IW17a. In this example, the provision of the regulating pieces in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 changes the flow direction of the game ball as it flows down from the upper right to the lower left, causing it to snake with a forward-backward component of motion, and the time it takes for the game ball to flow down is delayed compared to when there are no regulating pieces.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning port) has a special winning port switch 120IW24 provided on the upstream side, and the device branches into a V winning port and a discharge port on the downstream side, with a V winning port switch 120IW20A provided on the V winning port side, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning port) may be configured so that the device branches into a V winning port side and a general winning port side on the upstream side, with a V winning port switch 120IW20A provided on the V winning port side, and a special winning port switch 120IW24 provided on the general winning port side.

(Board configuration)
Fig. 8-3 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards in the characteristic part 120IW. As shown in Fig. 8-3, in this characteristic part 120IW, the switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from the gate switch 21, the start port switch (the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B), the count switch 23, the special winning port switch 120IW24, and the V winning port switch 120IW20a, and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81, solenoid 82, solenoid 120IW83, and solenoid 120IW84) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device, the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (special variable prize ball device 7), the solenoid 120IW83 for the special variable prize ball device 120IW17, and the solenoid 120IW84 for the V prize opening opening plate 120IW20.

(Probability of winning big, probability of winning small, probability of losing)
FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of a big win and a small win for each setting value. Among these, FIG. 8-4(A) shows the probability of a big win and a small win when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, FIG. 8-4(B) shows the probability of a big win and a small win when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

In this example, the setting can be set to one of a number of different setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a setting confirmation process or setting change process is executed, making it possible to check the current setting value or change the setting value. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-4, this example shows a case where the setting can be changed to six levels, from "1" to "6." Note that the setting is not limited to being changeable to six levels, and it may be changed to, for example, two to five levels, or seven or more levels.

As shown in Figure 8-4 (A), when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536", which is the most unfavorable setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and the setting value "6" has the highest jackpot probability of "328/65536", which is the most favorable setting for the player.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 8-4 (A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of a small win is constant at "164/65536" (approximately 1/400), regardless of the setting value "1" to "6."

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-4 (A), when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the probability of a small win is constant at "328/65536" (approximately 1/200) regardless of the setting value "1" to "6."

On the other hand, in terms of misses without time-saving, as shown in Figure 8-4 (A), when time-saving is included and the first special symbol variable display is executed, the setting value "1" has the highest probability of a jackpot at "64,839/65,536", the miss probability decreases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", setting value "5", and the miss probability is the lowest at "6", at "6".

As shown in FIG. 8-4(B), when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536", which is the most unfavorable setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and the setting value "6" has the highest jackpot probability of "328/65536", which is the most favorable setting for the player.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 8-4 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of a small win is constant at "9362/65536" (approximately 1/7) regardless of the setting value "1" to "6."

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-4 (B), when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the probability of a small win is constant at 164/65536 (approximately 1/400) regardless of the setting value of 1 to 6, in the case of a miss with time reduction.

On the other hand, in terms of misses without time-saving, as shown in Figure 8-4 (B), when time-saving is included and the first special symbol variable display is executed, the setting value "1" has the highest probability of a jackpot at "55,805/65,536", while the miss probability decreases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and the miss probability is the lowest at "55,682/65,536" for setting value "6".

As shown in Figure 8-4, in this example, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the probability of a small win is approximately 1/400, whereas when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the probability of a small win is higher at approximately 1/7.

(Big hit type determination table, small hit type determination table)
8-5(A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among them, FIG. 8-5(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 8-5(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-5(A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot as either "6R time-saving jackpot A" or "6R time-saving jackpot B" based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-5(B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot to be a "10R time-limited jackpot" based on the random number for type determination when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot symbol.

A "6R time-saving jackpot A" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 6-round jackpot game state, and transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. A "6R time-saving jackpot B" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 6-round jackpot game state, and transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. Note that "6R time-saving jackpot A" and "6R time-saving jackpot B" have different stopping patterns for the jackpot pattern of the first special pattern that is derived and displayed. A "10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 10-round jackpot game state, and transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends.

As shown in FIG. 8-5(A), in this example, when the first special symbol is displayed and a jackpot is reached, there is a 70% probability that it will be a "6R time-saving jackpot A," and a 30% probability that it will be a "6R time-saving jackpot B." Also, as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), in this example, when the second special symbol is displayed and a jackpot is reached, there is a 100% probability that it will be a "10R time-saving jackpot."

Figures 8-5(C) and (D) are explanatory diagrams showing the small win type determination table stored in ROM 101. Of these, Figure 8-5(C) shows a specific example of a small win type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, Figure 8-5(D) shows a specific example of a small win type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 8-5 (C), the small win type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of small win as "small win A" based on the random number for type determination when a determination is made to make the variable display result a small win symbol.

As shown in Figure 8-5 (D), the small win type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of small win as "small win A" or "small win B" based on the random number for type determination when a determination is made to make the variable display result a small win symbol.

A "small hit A" is a small hit that, on the condition that a V is won during a small hit game (first round), controls the game to a big hit game state from the second round to the sixth round, and transitions to a time-saving state after the big hit game state ends. A "small hit B" is a small hit that, on the condition that a V is won during a small hit game (first round), controls the game to a big hit game state from the second round to the tenth round, and transitions to a time-saving state after the big hit game state ends.

As shown in Figure 8-5 (C), in this example, when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed and a small win occurs, it is determined to be a "small win A" with a 100% probability. Also, as shown in Figure 8-5 (D), in this example, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed and a small win occurs, it is determined to be a "small win A" with a 30% probability, and a "small win B" with a 70% probability.

(Time-saving type determination table)
8-6(A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing time-saving type determination tables stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 8-6(A) shows a specific example of a time-saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 8-6(B) shows a specific example of a time-saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-5(A), the time-saving type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result is a time-saving miss symbol to determine the type of time-saving miss as either "Time-saving miss A," "Time-saving miss B," or "Time-saving miss C" based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in FIG. 8-5(B), the time-saving type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result is a time-saving miss symbol to determine the type of time-saving miss as either "Time-saving miss A," "Time-saving miss B," or "Time-saving miss C" based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in FIG. 8-6(A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the time-saving miss occurs, there is an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss A," an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss B," and an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss C." Also, as shown in FIG. 8-6(B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the time-saving miss occurs, there is an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss A," an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss B," and an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss C."

(Pattern Determination Table)
8-7 and 8-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the symbol determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among them, FIG. 8-7(A) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the 6R time-saving big win A. Also, FIG. 8-7(B) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the 6R time-saving big win B. Also, FIG. 8-7(C) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the 10R time-saving big win. Also, FIG. 8-7(D) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the small win A. Also, FIG. 8-7(E) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the small win B. Also, FIG. 8-8(F) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the time-saving miss A. Also, FIG. 8-8(G) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the time-saving miss B. Also, FIG. 8-8(H) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the time-saving miss C. Also, FIG. 8-8(I) shows a specific example of a pattern determination table for a miss (no time reduction).

As shown in Figure 8-8, the pattern determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the special pattern to be stopped based on the random numbers used for pattern determination, depending on the type of big win, small win, time-saving type, etc.

As shown in Figure 8-7(A), if a "6R time-saving jackpot A" occurs, the pattern "3" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in Figure 8-7(B), if a "6R time-saving jackpot B" occurs, the pattern "5" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in Figure 8-7(C), if a "10R time-saving jackpot" occurs, the pattern "7" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in Figure 8-7(D), if a "small jackpot A" occurs, the pattern "1" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in Figure 8-7(E), if a "small jackpot B" occurs, the pattern "9" is determined with a 100% probability.

As shown in Figure 8-8 (F), if "Time-saving Miss A" occurs, there is a 50% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "6", and a 50% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "8". As shown in Figure 8-8 (G), if "Time-saving Miss B" occurs, there is a 100% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "4". As shown in Figure 8-8 (H), if "Time-saving Miss C" occurs, there is a 100% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "9". As shown in Figure 8-8 (I), if it is a miss (no time-saving), there is a 100% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "-".

Specific examples of the stopping patterns of the special patterns are not limited to those shown in this example. For example, in this example, the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B are each configured with one 7-segment LED, and the stopping patterns of the special patterns are represented by one-digit numbers, but they may be configured with two 7-segment LEDs, and the stopping patterns of the special patterns may be represented by two-digit numbers. In this case, for example, even if the result is "6R time-saving big win A", "6R time-saving big win B", "10R time-saving big win", "small win A", "small win B", "time-saving miss B", "time-saving miss C", or "miss (no time-saving)", the stopping patterns of multiple types of special patterns may be determined.

In this example, as shown in Figures 8-7 and 8-8, the case where the stopping symbols of the special symbols are determined using the symbol determination random number is shown, but this is not limited to the above, and for example, the type determination random number may also be used to determine the stopping symbols of the special symbols. When the type determination random number is used in combination, for example, when the jackpot type is determined to be "6R time-saving jackpot A", the value of the type determination random number is 0 to 125 (see Figure 8-5 (A)), so the symbol determination value in Figure 8-7 (A) is assigned 0 to 125 to configure a symbol determination table for 6R time-saving jackpot A. Also, for example, if the time-saving type is determined to be "Time-saving Miss A," the value of the type determination random number is between 0 and 59 (see FIG. 8-6), so in FIG. 8-8 (F), the pattern determination value is assigned from 0 to 29 to the pattern "6" and from 30 to 59 to the pattern "8," thereby constructing a pattern determination table for time-saving Miss A.

(Small win game opening pattern)
Next, the opening pattern of the small win game will be explained. Figure 8-9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small win game. As shown in Figure 8-9, after the small win game is started at timing S1, when 8 seconds have passed (timing S2), the V winning hole opening and closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to be in an open state, and thereafter, the V winning hole opening and closing plate 120IW20 is kept in an open state until 8 seconds have passed (see Figure 8-9 (C)).

When a small win (small win A, small win B) occurs, 8 seconds is set as the time before the special winning hole is opened (fanfare time) from the start of the small win game until the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to the open state, and the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning hole) is controlled to the open state at the same time that the V winning hole opening and closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to the open state. Also, as shown in Figure 8-9 (A), during the period when the V winning hole opening and closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to the open state, the special winning hole is opened four times for 0.016 seconds. Therefore, in the case of a small win (small win A, small win B), the special winning hole is opened four times for 0.016 seconds during the period during which a V win is possible.

In this example, the opening time of each special winning port in the case of a small win (small win A, small win B) is extremely short at 0.016 seconds, but as already explained, multiple regulating pieces are formed in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and about 2 to 3 game balls flow down in a serpentine manner on the bottom member 120IW17a of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17. Therefore, even if the opening time is short, if the bottom member 120IW17a is controlled to the open state, the game balls on the bottom member 120IW17a can fall into the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 and win a prize.

If a game ball enters the special winning hole and a V win occurs, after the final opening of the special winning hole, a predetermined period of closing time (interval time) and the end time of the small win (ending time) have elapsed, and then the game moves to a big win game state, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state from the second round to the sixth or tenth round, as shown in Figure 8-9 (B).

In this example, when the final opening of the special winning port in a small winning game is completed, the small winning game ends based on the lapse of the closing time (interval time) and the small winning end time (ending time), but this is not limited to the above. For example, detection switches capable of detecting game balls are provided in two locations, upstream and downstream, in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning port), and after the final closing time (interval time) has elapsed, the device waits until the detection numbers of the upstream detection switch and the downstream detection switch match (all game balls that have entered the special winning port are discharged), and then transitions to the small winning end time (ending time), and ends the small winning game when the small winning end time (ending time) has elapsed.

In addition, in this example, a configuration is shown in which a V win is possible during small win play in both small win A and small win B, but it may also be configured to provide a type of small win in which a V win is difficult or impossible during small win play.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
Fig. 8-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature part 120IW. Among these, Fig. 8-10 (A) and (B) show a specific example of a variation pattern table for the first special symbol. Fig. 8-10 (C) and (D) show a specific example of a variation pattern table for the second special symbol. Fig. 8-10 (E) and (F) show a specific example of a variation pattern table for a time-saving miss (for a non-time-saving state). Fig. 8-10 (G) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for a time-saving rescue.

First, the variation pattern of the first special symbol will be explained using Fig. 8-10 (A) and (B). As shown in Fig. 8-10 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT1-1 (normal variation), PT1-2 (shortened variation), PT1-3 (normal reach), and PT1-4 (super reach). Also, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if there is a big win during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT1-5 (normal reach) and PT1-6 (super reach). Also, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if there is a small win during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT1-7 (normal reach) and PT1-8 (super reach).

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in this example, when the first special symbol is displayed, if there is a miss during the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PT2-1 (high-speed miss fluctuation). Also, when the first special symbol is displayed, if there is a jackpot during the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PT2-2 (high-speed jackpot fluctuation). Also, when the first special symbol is displayed, if there is a small jackpot during the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PT2-3 (high-speed small jackpot fluctuation).

Next, the variation pattern of the second special symbol will be explained using Fig. 8-10 (C) and (D). As shown in Fig. 8-10 (C), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT4-1 (normal variation), PT4-2 (shortened variation), PT4-3 (normal reach), and PT4-4 (super reach). Also, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a big win during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT4-5 (normal reach) and PT4-6 (super reach). Also, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a small win during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT4-7 (normal reach) and PT4-8 (super reach).

As shown in FIG. 8-10(D), in this example, when the second special symbol is displayed, if the winning combination is missed during the time-saving state (including both the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state), the pattern is determined to be one of the following: PT5-1 (shortened variation), PT5-2 (ultra-shortened variation), PT5-3 (normal reach), or PT5-4 (super reach). When the second special symbol is displayed, if the winning combination is a big win during the time-saving state (including both the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state), the pattern is determined to be one of the following: PT5-5 (normal reach) or PT5-6 (super reach). When the second special symbol is displayed, if the winning combination is a small win during the time-saving state (including both the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state), the pattern is determined to be one of the following: PT5-7 (normal reach) or PT5-8 (super reach).

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the time-saving failure (for non-time-saving state) will be explained using Fig. 8-10 (E) and (F). As shown in Fig. 8-10 (E), in this example, when the time-saving failure occurs in the non-time-saving state as A to C (patterns "2", "4", "6"), the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either fluctuation pattern PT6-1 (normal fluctuation) or fluctuation pattern PT6-2 (time-saving teaser effect).

As shown in Figure 8-10 (F), in this example, when the time-saving feature A (symbol "8") occurs in a non-time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PT7-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PT7-2 (time-saving teaser effect), or fluctuation pattern PT7-3 (time-saving revival effect).

In this example, if the time-saving state is in a state where the time-saving effect is lost (A to C), the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the same as when the time-saving effect is lost (no time-saving effect).

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the rescue time reduction will be explained using FIG. 8-10 (G). As shown in FIG. 8-10 (G), in this example, when the rescue time reduction occurs, if there is a small win or a miss, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PT8-1 (rescue time reduction entry effect).

In this example, in the normal symbol process processing (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether the result of the normal symbol variable display is a hit (normal symbol hit), and controls the execution of the normal symbol variable display based on the result of the determination. In this example, in the normal state, it is determined that there is a 10% probability of a normal symbol hit, and in the time-saving state, it is determined that there is a 90% probability of a normal symbol hit. In addition, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) to an open state based on the determination that there is a normal symbol hit in the normal symbol process processing (step S26).

(Performance control command)
8-11 and 8-12 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the performance control command sent to the performance control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 8-11 and FIG. 8-12, the command 80XX (H) is a performance control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. The performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 80XX (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 9001 (H) is a performance control command (display result 1 designation command) (miss designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a non-time-saving miss. Command 9002 (H) is a performance control command (display result 2 designation command) (miss designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a time-saving miss A (pattern "8"). Command 9003 (H) is a performance control command (display result 3 designation command) (miss designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a time-saving miss A (pattern "6"). Command 9004 (H) is a performance control command (display result 4 designation command) (miss designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a time-saving miss B (pattern "4"). Command 9005 (H) is a performance control command (display result 5 specification command) (miss specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be a time-saving miss C (pattern "2").

Command 9006 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 6 designation command (6R time-saving jackpot A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 6R time-saving jackpot A. Command 9007 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 7 designation command (6R time-saving jackpot B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 6R time-saving jackpot B. Command 9008 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 8 designation command (10R time-saving jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 10R time-saving jackpot.

Command 9009 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 9 designation command (small win A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be small win A. Command 900A (H) is a presentation control command (display result 10 designation command (small win B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be small win B.

Command A000 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds.

Command A100 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds. Command A101 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds. Command A102 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds.

Command B000 (H) is a presentation control command (jackpot start designation command: fanfare designation command) that specifies the start of a jackpot game. Command B001 (H) is a presentation control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) that specifies the end of a jackpot game.

Command B1XX (H) is a presentation control command (command for displaying while the large prize opening is open) that specifies the display during a round during a jackpot game. The number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX." Command B2XX (H) is a presentation control command (command for displaying after the large prize opening is open) that specifies the display after a round during a jackpot game (displaying the interval between rounds).

Command B300 (H) is a presentation control command (small win start designation command) that specifies the start of small win play. Command B301 (H) is a presentation control command (small win end designation command) that specifies the end of small win play.

Command B400 (H) is a presentation control command (large prize opening entry designation command) that specifies that the game ball has entered the large prize opening. Command B401 (H) is a presentation control command (special prize opening entry designation command) that specifies that the game ball has entered the special prize opening. Command B402 (H) is a presentation control command (V prize opening entry designation command) that specifies that the game ball has entered the V prize opening inside the special prize opening.

Command C000 (H) is a presentation control command (first pending memory number addition command) that specifies that the first pending memory number has increased by 1. Command C001 (H) is a presentation control command (second pending memory number addition command) that specifies that the second pending memory number has increased by 1. Command C100 (H) is a presentation control command (first pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the first pending memory number has decreased by 1. Command C101 (H) is a presentation control command (second pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the second pending memory number has decreased by 1.

Command E000 (H) is a presentation control command (normal state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state A designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state when a jackpot game ends. Command E002 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state B designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state when the time-saving state is lost. Command E003 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state C designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state during a rescue time-saving state.

Command E100 (H) is a presentation control command (right hit notification start command) that specifies the start of the right hit notification. Command E101 (H) is a presentation control command (right hit notification end command) that specifies the end of the right hit notification.

Command E2XX(H) is a performance control command (setting value command) that specifies the currently set setting value. The setting value set to "XX" is set. For example, if the setting value is set to "1", command E201(H) is sent, and if the setting value is set to "6", command E206(H) is sent.

When the presentation control CPU 120 (specifically, the presentation control CPU 120) mounted on the presentation control board 12 receives the above-mentioned presentation control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, it changes the display state of the image display device 5 according to the contents shown in Figures 8-11 and 8-12, changes the display state of the lamp, and outputs sound number data to the sound control board 13. Note that presentation control commands other than those shown in Figures 8-11 and 8-12 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12. For example, more detailed presentation control commands related to jackpot games and presentation control commands indicating the game status (for example, a presentation control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
8-13 is a flowchart showing a game control main process in the characteristic unit 120IW. In this example, the processes in steps S1 to S2, S3 to S9, and S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, once the initial settings are made in step S2, the CPU 103 performs a setting change/confirmation process (step 120IWS11). The setting change/confirmation process makes it possible to confirm the current setting value and change the setting value. Next, the CPU 103 performs control to send a setting value command corresponding to the currently set setting value to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS12).

Also, when a presentation control command instructing initialization is sent in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time reduction counter to "900" (step 120IWS13). Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is turned on, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900". That is, in this example, after the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is turned on, if neither a jackpot nor a time reduction miss occurs even after 900 variable display cycles, the rescue time reduction is entered and the machine is controlled to the time reduction state. Note that, in this example, the initial value to be set in the rescue time reduction counter can be specified based on the presentation control command instructing initialization sent in step S9.

In this example, the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "900" when the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, but this is not the only option, and the rescue time reduction counter may not be initially set when the RAM clear process is executed. If configured in this way, gameplay can be started from the continuation of the value of the rescue time reduction counter from the previous day, reducing the amount of investment required to reach the rescue time reduction, and the game can be configured in a way that does not disadvantage the player.

In addition, when configured as described above, the system may be configured so that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the clear switch is detected as being on (Y in step S3) and the RAM clear process is performed, and the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is performed when a RAM abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clear process is performed.

(Special pattern processing)
FIG. 8-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process in the feature unit 120IW. In this example, the start winning judgment process (step 120IWS101) is generally similar to the start winning judgment process (step S101) shown in FIG. 5. In addition, the special symbol normal process (step 120IWS110) to the special symbol stop process (step 120IWS113) are generally similar to the special symbol normal process (step S110) to the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. 5. However, in this example, when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed, the process proceeds to a small winning opening pre-process (step 120IWS114). In addition, when a big winning symbol is derived and displayed (when a so-called direct hit occurs), the process proceeds to a big winning opening pre-process (step 120IWS117).

Small win pre-opening processing (step 120IWS114): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The game control microcomputer 100 executes processing to control the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to an open state, and updates the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to the small win opening processing (step 120IWS115).

Small winning opening process (step 120IWS115): Executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is 5. If the opening time has elapsed while the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is open, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to the closed state, and if the closing time has elapsed while the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is closed and there are still opening times remaining, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to the open state. Also, when it is time to open the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20, the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to the open state, and when it is time to close the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20, the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to the closed state. Also, it is confirmed whether the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is on, and if the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is on, the V winning flag is set. When all openings of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 have been completed and the closing time (interval time) has elapsed, the internal state (special pattern process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to the small win closing post-processing (step 120IWS116).

Processing after closing of small win (step 120IWS116): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. If the V winning flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the processing before opening of the big win (step 120IWS117). If the V winning flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to the normal processing of special symbols (step 120IWS110).

The process before the jackpot opening (step 120IWS117) to the process after the jackpot ending (step 120IWS120) is generally similar to the process before the jackpot opening (step S114) to the process after the jackpot ending (step S117) shown in FIG. 5.

In this example, the game immediately transitions to the big win game after a big win is determined and the big win/small win symbols are derived and displayed, or after a V win occurs during a small win game and the small win game ends, but this is not limited to the above. For example, instead of immediately transitioning to the big win game, the game may be configured to transition to the big win game on the condition that the game ball passes through an operating gate (which may also serve as the passing gate 41) provided in the game area.

(Special pattern normal processing)
8-15 and 8-16 are flow charts showing the normal special symbol processing (step 120IWS110) in the special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total reserved memory number (step 120IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is checked. If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory number is 0 (step 120IWS52). Specifically, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 120IWS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (i.e., if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (step 120IWS54).

In this characteristic section 120IW, the processing of steps 120IWS52 to S54 is executed, so that the display of the second special symbol changes is executed with priority over the display of the first special symbol changes. In other words, the second start condition for starting the display of the second special symbol changes is controlled to be satisfied with priority over the first start condition for starting the display of the first special symbol changes.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured to, for example, execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 120IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 120IWS56). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the combined pending memory count by 1. That is, the count value of the combined pending memory count counter is decremented by 1 (step 120IWS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the combined pending memory count counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to send a setting value command capable of identifying the currently set setting value to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS58). Note that in this example, a setting value command is sent at the start of each change in the display, but this is not the only possible mode. For example, the setting value command may be sent at the end of the change.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 120IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 120IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination extracted in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process to compare a predetermined jackpot determination value with the random number for hit determination, and decides to determine a jackpot if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 decides to determine a jackpot for the special pattern. If it is decided to determine a jackpot (Y in step 120IWS63), the process proceeds to step 120IWS64. On the other hand, if it is decided not to be a jackpot (N in step 120IWS63), the process proceeds to step 120IWS66. Note that deciding whether or not to be a jackpot means deciding whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also deciding whether or not to set the stopped pattern on the special pattern display as a jackpot pattern.

In step 120IWS64, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. The CPU 103 also selects the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS65). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5 (A) is selected, and if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5 (B) is selected. Then, using the selected jackpot type determination table, the CPU 103 determines the type (6R time-saving jackpot A, 6R time-saving jackpot B, 10R time-saving jackpot) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area as the jackpot type (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for type determination extracted in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of jackpot. The CPU 103 also sets data indicating the determined type of jackpot in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS92.

Meanwhile, in step 120IWS66, the CPU 103 selects the small win judgment table indicated by the special symbol pointer. In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the small win judgment table for the first special symbol is selected, and if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the small win judgment table for the second special symbol is selected. Then, the CPU 103 uses the selected small win judgment table to perform a lottery process based on the random number for winning judgment, and determines whether or not a small win has occurred (step 120IWS67). In this example, as shown in Figures 8-4 (A) and (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of determining a small win is approximately 1/400, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of determining a small win is approximately 1/7.

If it is decided that a small win will occur (Y in step 120IWS68), the CPU 103 sets a small win flag indicating that it is a small win (step 120IWS69). Then, the CPU 103 selects the small win type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS70). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the small win type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5 (C) is selected, and if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the small win type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5 (D) is selected. After the small win type determination table is selected, the process proceeds to step 120IWS71.

If it has not been decided that a small win will occur (N in step 120IWS68), the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS71.

In step 120IWS71, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit counter, which counts the number of times controlled to a small hit during the time-saving state, is 0 (step 120IWS71). If the value of the small hit counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

If the value of the small hit counter is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS72). If the small hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the small hit counter by 1 (step 120IWS73).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS74). If the value of the small hit counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

If the value of the small hit counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the fluctuation ends (step 120IWS75). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

In step 120IWS76, the CPU 103 checks whether any time-saving flags are set (step 120IWS76). If none of the time-saving flags are set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS83. If any of the time-saving flags are set, the CPU 103 decrements the total time-saving counter by 1 (step 120IWS77).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the count value of the combined time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS74), and if so, proceeds to step 120IWS82. If the count value of the combined time-saving counter after the subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (step 120IWS79). Note that whether it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol can be determined, for example, by checking whether data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. If it is not time to start the variable display of the second special symbol, proceeds to step 120IWS83.

When starting the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second time-saving counter (step 120IWS80) and checks whether the count value of the second time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS81). If the count value of the second time-saving counter after the subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS83, whereas if the count value of the second time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS82.

In step 120IWS82, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the fluctuation ends (step 120IWS82).

In this example, steps 120IWS76 to S82 are executed to perform the subtraction process of the time-saving counter before the count process of the number of fluctuations until the time-saving relief after step 120IWS83, but the processing is not limited to this. For example, the subtraction process of the time-saving counter may be executed after the count process of the number of fluctuations until the time-saving relief after step 120IWS83. In this case, for example, in the case of a fluctuation display that results in a time-saving relief, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time-saving counter to "900" (see step 120IWS149), the value of the time-saving counter will be subtracted by one extra, so the value of the time-saving counter may be added by one again after the subtraction process in the case of a fluctuation display that results in a time-saving relief. Also, the time-saving counter may be set to "901", which is one more than the time-saving counter, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 120IWS83). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS87. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 120IWS84). Note that in this example, the process of step 120IWS83 is executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the game state is the normal state or the time reduction state. Also, in this example, the process of step 120IWS83 is executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the first special symbol variable display is executed or the second special symbol variable display is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS85). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS87. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a rescue time reduction determination flag indicating that the rescue time reduction has occurred and that the time reduction state will be controlled at the end of the fluctuation (step 120IWS86). Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS87.

In this example, the processing of steps 120IWS83 to S86 is executed not only in the case of a miss variation but also in the case of a small win variation, so the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 and the variation display that causes a rescue time reduction may be a small win variation. On the other hand, in this example, in the case of a jackpot variation, the processing of steps 120IWS83 to S86 is not executed, so if the variation display that would cause a rescue time reduction is a jackpot variation, rescue time reduction control is not performed and normal jackpot control is performed.

In step 120IWS87, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS87). If the small hit flag is set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS91. In this case, the CPU 103 uses the small hit type determination table selected in step 120IWS70 to determine the type of small hit (small hit A or small hit B) that corresponds to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the type determination random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of small hit. The CPU 103 also sets data indicating the determined type of small hit in the small hit type buffer in RAM 102. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS92.

If the small win flag is not set, the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on the random number for time-saving loss judgment using a time-saving loss judgment table for determining whether or not to make the time-saving loss, and determines whether or not to make the time-saving loss (step 120IWS88). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time-saving loss judgment table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving loss has a probability of about 1/200 (see FIG. 8-4(A)). Also, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time-saving loss judgment table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving loss has a probability of about 1/400 (see FIG. 8-4(B)). If it is not determined that the time-saving loss is to be made (if it is determined that the time-saving loss is not to be made), the process proceeds to step 120IWS93.

If it is decided that the time-saving miss is to be determined (Y in step 120IWS89), the CPU 103 selects the time-saving type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS90). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time-saving type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-6 (A) is selected, and if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time-saving type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-6 (B) is selected. Then, the CPU 103 determines the type of time-saving miss to be the type (time-saving miss A, time-saving miss B, or time-saving miss C) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of time-saving. Then proceed to step 120IWS92.

When the processing of step 120IWS91 is completed, the CPU 103 selects a symbol determination table (see Figures 8-7 (A) to 8-8 (H)) according to the result of the type determination performed in step 120IWS91 (step 120IWS92). In the case of a miss without time reduction, the symbol determination table shown in Figure 8-7 (I) is selected and the process proceeds to step 120IWS93.

In step 120IWS93, the CPU 103 determines the pattern corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number for pattern determination stored in the random number buffer area (step 120IWS93).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step 120IWS94).

(Variation pattern setting process)
8-17 is a flow chart showing the variable pattern setting process (step 120IWS111) in the special symbol process. In the variable pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) checks whether the story has been set (step 120IWS1701). The story refers to the variable pattern and variable time according to the number of times the symbol changes, and whether the story has been set is checked by whether the flag or data set according to the story when a big win occurs is set.

If the story has already been set, the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time reduction determination flag (see step 120IWS86) is set (step 120IWS1702). If the rescue time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a rescue time reduction variation pattern table (see FIG. 8-10 (G)) and proceeds to step 120IWS1710.

If the story has not been set or the rescue time-saving determination flag has not been set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the time-saving effect has failed (step 120IWS1704). If the time-saving effect has not failed, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see Figures 8-10 (A) to (D)) according to the special symbol, game status, and display result (step 120IWS1709), and proceeds to step 120IWS1710. Therefore, in this example, even if the variation display is a rescue time-saving effect, if the story has not been set, the variation pattern is uniformly determined to be the normal variation pattern, not the rescue time-saving variation pattern.

If the time-saving effect is not achieved, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving effect flag (see steps 120IWS150, 120IWS160, and 120IWS537) is set (step 120IWS1705). If the time-saving effect flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see Figures 8-10 (A) to (D)) according to the special symbol, game status, and display result (step 120IWS1709), and proceeds to step 120IWS1710. Therefore, in this example, even if the time-saving effect is not achieved, if the time-saving effect is not achieved, a variation pattern similar to that of a miss (no time-saving effect) is determined.

If the time-saving flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the pattern has been determined to be "8" in the pattern determination (see step 120IWS93) (step 120IWS1706). If the pattern is not "8", the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table for when the time-saving function is not activated (pattern other than "8") (see FIG. 8-10 (E)) (step 120IWS1707) and proceeds to step 120IWS1710. If the pattern is "8", the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table for when the time-saving function is not activated (pattern "8") (see FIG. 8-10 (F)) (step 120IWS1708) and proceeds to step 120IWS1710.

In step 120IWS1710, the CPU 103 determines which of the variation patterns shown in Figures 8-10 to use based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 120IWS1703, S1707, S1708, and S1709 and the random number for determining the variation pattern stored in the reserved memory buffer indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS1710). In this example, the variation pattern is determined to determine the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Note that after the variation time is determined, the variation pattern to which the determined variation time is set may be selected from among multiple variation patterns.

Once the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to send a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1711).

When the change time (change pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 120IWS1710, the CPU 103 sets the change time data indicating the determined change time in the change time timer and starts measuring the change time (step 120IWS1712), and starts the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 120IWS1713). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol change processing (step 120IWS1714).

(Special pattern variation processing)
8-18 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (step 120IWS112) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first controls to transmit, if not yet transmitted, any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 10 designation command) to the performance control CPU 120 based on the decision result of whether or not to make it a big win, the decision result of whether or not to make it a small win, the decision result of whether or not to make it a time-saving miss, the decision result of the big win type, the decision result of the small win type, and the decision result of the time-saving miss type (step 120IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 120IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 120IWS1123), it checks whether the relief time reduction determination flag (see step 120IWS86) is set (step 120IWS1124). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

If the rescue time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right hit LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS1125). The CPU 103 also performs control to send a right hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1126).

In this example, when the processing of step 120IWS1126 is executed and a rescue time reduction occurs, the right-hit LED 120IW10 starts to light up at the start of the pattern determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (step 120IWS1127). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command or a second pattern determination A designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1128). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

On the other hand, if the rescue time-saving flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving will not occur (step 120IWS1129). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving will not occur can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 120IWS93.

If it is decided that the time-saving feature should be over, the CPU 103 controls the right-hit LED 120IW10 to start lighting up (step 120IWS1130). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right-hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1131).

In this example, when the processing of step 120IWS1131 is executed and a time-saving missing pattern is derived and displayed, the right-hit LED 120IW10 starts to light up at the start of the pattern determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A, the time-saving flag B, or the time-saving flag C is set (step 120IWS1132). If none of the time-saving flag A, the time-saving flag B, or the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 120IWS1133). The CPU 103 also controls to transmit a first pattern determination A designation command or a second pattern determination A designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1134). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to transmit a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to transmit a second pattern determination A designation command. Then proceed to step 120IWS1139.

If the time-saving flag A, time-saving flag B, or time-saving flag C is set (i.e., if the time-saving state is in effect), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "10 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 120IWS1135). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination B designation command or a second pattern determination B designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1136). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination B designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

If it is not determined that the time reduction is to be missed (N in step 120IWS1129), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "0.5 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 120IWS1137). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination C designation command or a second pattern determination C designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1138). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", it controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", it controls to send a second pattern determination A designation command. Then, it proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern stop processing (step S113) (step 120IWS1139).

(Special symbol stop processing)
8-19 to 8-21 are flow charts showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 120IWS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS132).

If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is not 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has not yet ended), the special pattern stop process ends. If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has ended), the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 120IWS133). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flag (time-saving flag A, time-saving flag B, time-saving flag C) and the time-saving count counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state (step 120IWS134).

The time-saving counters include a special 2 time-saving counter that corresponds to the number of times the second special symbol changes, and a combined time-saving counter that corresponds to the number of times both the first special symbol and the second special symbol change. When simply referred to as a "time-saving counter," it refers to both the special 2 time-saving counter and the combined time-saving counter.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "900" (step 120IWS135). Therefore, in this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "900" in response to a jackpot, and if neither a next jackpot nor a time-saving miss occurs even after 900 variable display cycles have been performed after the jackpot game ends, the rescue time-saving state will be entered and the game will be controlled to the time-saving state.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 120IWS135, when a jackpot is hit, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900" at the start of the fanfare period of the jackpot to initialize it, but this is not the only possible mode. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set to "900" during a round of jackpot play, or may be configured to be initially set to "900" at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot play.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the right hit LED 120IW10 to start lighting up (step 120IWS136). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a jackpot start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the large prize opening to measure the time before the large prize opening is opened (fanfare time) until the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 120IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S144) (step 120IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 120IWS133), the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving end flag is set (step 120IWS141). If the time-saving end flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS148. If the time-saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving end flag (step 120IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the time-saving flags that are set (any of time-saving flags A to C) and ends the time-saving state (step 120IWS143).

Next, if the values are set, the CPU 103 resets the small win counter, the total time-saving counter, and the special 2 time-saving counter (step 120IWS144), and controls the right-hit LED 120IW10 to stop lighting (step 120IWS145). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right-hit notification end command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS146). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS147). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS148.

In this example, the process of steps 120IWS141 to S147 is executed to transition to the normal state at the end of the pattern determination period during the final time-saving fluctuation and to end the right-hit notification, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the system may be configured to transition to the normal state and end the right-hit notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the pattern determination period during the final time-saving fluctuation.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time-saving determination flag is set (step 120IWS148). If the rescue time-saving determination flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "900", the combined time-saving count counter to "900", the rescue time-saving count counter to "900", and the small win count counter to "1" (step 120IWS149). The CPU 103 also sets the time-saving flag C and controls the time-saving state (step 120IWS150). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a time-saving state C designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS151). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS164.

In this example, even if there is a small win fluctuation, if the rescue time-saving determination flag is set in 120IWS148 at the timing when the pattern determination period ends, step 120IWS150 is executed, and the small win game state thereafter is controlled to time-saving state C.

If the rescue time-saving flag is not set, it is checked whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving will not occur (step 120IWS152). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving will not occur can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 120IWS93.

If it is decided that the time-saving effect has been lost, the CPU 103 checks whether any of the time-saving flags (time-saving flags A to C) are set (step 120IWS153). If none of the time-saving flags are set (i.e., if the normal state exists), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "100" and the total time-saving count counter to "900" if the time-saving effect has been lost (Y in step 120IWS154). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS160.

If the time-saving miss is not A, but B (Y in step 120IWS156), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "50" and the total time-saving count counter to "900" (step 120IWS157). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS160.

If the time-saving miss is not B (N in step 120IWS156), that is, if the time-saving miss is C, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "30" and the total time-saving count counter to "900" (step 120IWS158). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS160.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag B and controls the time-saving state (step 120IWS160).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "900" (step 120IWS161). Therefore, in this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "900" in response to a time-saving miss, and if neither the next jackpot nor the time-saving miss occurs even after 900 variable display cycles have been performed after the time-saving miss, the rescue time-saving state will be entered and the game will be controlled to the time-saving state.

The CPU 103 also subtracts 1 from the small win counter (step 120IWS162) and transmits a time-saving state B designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS163). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS164.

Also, if any of the time-saving flags are set (Y in step 120IWS153), the process proceeds to step 120IWS164. Therefore, in this example, even if the time-saving has been removed, if the time-saving state is in effect, no new time-saving state is set based on the time-saving removal, and the current time-saving state continues (therefore, the values of the special 2 time-saving count counter and the combined time-saving count counter remain at their current values).

In step 120IWS164, the CPU 103 checks whether the small win flag is set (step 120IWS164). If the small win flag is set, the CPU 103 controls the right hit LED 120IW10 to start lighting up (step 120IWS165). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a small win start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS167). Next, the CPU 103 sets the special winning port opening time timer (step 120IWS168). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step S118) (step 120IWS169).

If the small win flag is not set, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time reduction determination flag if it is set (step 120IWS170).

In step 120IWS171, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step S110) (step 120IWS171).

(Pre-opening processing for small hits)
8-22 is a flow chart showing the small win opening pre-processing (step 120IWS114) in the special symbol process. In the small win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 first checks whether the special winning opening pre-opening timer has timed out (step 120IWS401). If the special winning opening pre-opening timer has not timed out (i.e., if the fanfare time has not elapsed), the process ends.

If the timer for the time before the special winning opening has timed out (i.e., if the fanfare time has elapsed), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to the open state (step 120IWS402). The CPU 10103 also sets the opening time timer to a value equivalent to the first opening time of the special winning opening (0.016 seconds in this example) (step 120IWS403).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the small win opening process (step 120IWS115) (step 120IWS404).

(Small hit open processing)
8-23 is a flow chart showing the small win opening process (step 120IWS115) in the special symbol process. In the small win opening process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the special winning hole switch 120IW24 is turned on (step 120IWS421). If the special winning hole switch 120IW24 is turned on (i.e., if the winning of a game ball into the special winning hole is detected), the CPU 103 controls to send a special winning hole winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS422).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning port switch 120IW20a is in the ON state (step 120IWS423). If the V winning port switch 120IW20a is in the ON state (i.e., if the entry of a game ball into the V winning port is detected), the CPU 103 performs control to send a V winning port winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS424). The CPU 103 also sets a V winning flag indicating that a V winning has occurred (step 120IWS425).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether it is time to open the V winning opening plate 120IW20 (step 120IWS426). Whether it is time to open the V winning opening plate 120IW20 can be determined, for example, by setting a timer when the small win game starts and checking whether the time since the start of the small win game has reached a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example). If it is time to open the V winning opening plate 120IW20, the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW84 and controls the V winning opening plate 120IW20 to the open state (step 120IWS427).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether it is time to close the V winning opening plate 120IW20 (step 120IWS428). Whether it is time to close the V winning opening plate 120IW20 can be determined, for example, by setting a timer when the V winning opening plate 120IW20 starts to open, and checking whether the time since the V winning opening plate 120IW20 started to open has reached a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example). If it is time to close the V winning opening plate 120IW20, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 120IW84 and controls the V winning opening plate 120IW20 to a closed state (step 120IWS429).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the open time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening is 0 (step 120IWS430). If the value of the open time timer is not 0 (i.e., if the special winning opening is open), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the open time timer (step 120IWS431) and checks whether the value of the open time timer after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS432). If the value of the open time timer is 0, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 120IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to a closed state (step 120IWS433). The CPU 103 also sets a value equivalent to a predetermined closing time (interval time) to the closing time timer for measuring the closing time after the special winning opening is opened (step 120IWS434). Then, the process ends.

If the open time timer is 0 in step 120IWS430 (i.e., if the special prize opening is closed), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the close time timer (step 120IWS435) and checks whether the value of the close time timer after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS436). If the value of the close time timer is 0, the CPU 103 checks whether all of the special prize openings have already been opened (step 120IWS437). In this example, if the special prize openings have already been opened four times, the answer is Y in step 120IWS437 and the process proceeds to step 120IWS440.

If all of the special winning ports have not been opened (i.e., if the second to fourth openings remain), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW83 to control the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to the open state (step 120IWS438). The CPU 103 also sets the closing time timer to a value equivalent to the opening time (0.016 seconds in this example) (step 120IWS439). Then, the process ends.

If all special winning ports have been opened (Y in step 120IWS437), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the small win post-closing processing (step 120IWS116) (step 120IWS440).

(Processing after closing small hit)
8-24 is a flow chart showing the small win closing post-processing (step 120IWS116) in the special symbol process processing. In the small win closing post-processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the small win end display timer is set (step 120IWS451), and if the small win end display timer is set, proceeds to step 120IWS453. If the small win end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small win end display timer to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small win end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small win end display time) (step 120IWS452), and ends the process.

In step 120IWS453, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small win end display timer. The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the small win end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the small win end display time has elapsed (step 120IWS454). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the small win end display time has elapsed, the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning flag is set (step 120IWS455). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flag and the time-saving count counter (step 120IWS456). The CPU 103 also resets the V winning flag (step 120IWS457). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a big win start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS458). The CPU 103 also sets the time timer before the big win opening (step 120IWS459).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-hit processing (step 120IWS117) (step 120IWS460).

If it is confirmed in the processing of step 120IWS456 that the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 resets the small win flag (step 120IWS461). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a small win end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS462). If the flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time reduction determination flag (step 120IWS463) and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS464).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 8-25 is a flow chart showing the jackpot end process (step 120IWS121) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot end display timer is set (step 120IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 120IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag or the small jackpot flag (step 120IWS532) and performs control to transmit the jackpot end designation command (step 120IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 120IWS534), and ends the process.

In step 120IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 120IWS536). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 120IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag A (step 120IWS537) and checks whether the rescue time-saving flag is set (step 120IWS538). If the rescue time-saving flag is set, the rescue time-saving display is a small jackpot change, and a V win occurs during the small jackpot play, ending the jackpot play to which the rescue time-saving display has been switched. In this case, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time-saving flag (step 120IWS539), sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "1", sets the combined time-saving count counter to "99", and sets the small jackpot count counter to "1" (step 120IWS540). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

On the other hand, if the rescue time-saving flag is not set, it is checked whether the jackpot occurred in the time-saving state (step S120IWS541). Whether the jackpot occurred in the time-saving state can be determined, for example, by checking whether the time-saving flag is set at the start of the jackpot game before the processing of steps S120IWS134 and S120IWS456 is executed and the time-saving flag is reset, and if the time-saving flag is set, a jackpot time-saving flag is set, indicating that the time-saving state was in effect when the jackpot occurred, and in step S120IWS541, it is checked whether the jackpot time-saving flag is set.

If the jackpot occurred during the time-saving state, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "7", the total time-saving count counter to "99", and the small win count counter to "1" (step 120IWS540). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

If the jackpot did not occur in the time-saving state (if the jackpot occurred in the normal state), it is checked whether the jackpot game state that ended was based on the variation of the first special symbol (step 120IWS543). Whether the jackpot was based on the variation of the first special symbol can be determined, for example, by checking whether data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer. If the jackpot game state that ended was based on the variation of the first special symbol, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "1", sets the combined time-saving count counter to "99", and sets the small win count counter to "1" (step 120IWS544). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

If the completed jackpot game state is not based on the variation of the first special symbol (if it is based on the variation of the second special symbol), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "99", the total time-saving count counter to "99", and the small win count counter to "1" (step 120IWS545). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

In this example, when the above process is performed and the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the time-saving state is controlled to one time (see step 120IWS544), and if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is controlled to seven times (see step 120IWS542). Therefore, when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the time-saving state (in this example, the number of time-saving times is greater) is controlled to be more favorable if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state than if a jackpot occurs during the normal state.

In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the time-saving state is controlled to 99 times (see step 120IWS545), and if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is controlled to 7 times (see step 120IWS542). Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the time-saving state (in this example, the number of time-saving times is greater) is controlled to be more favorable if a jackpot occurs during the normal state than if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state.

Furthermore, in this example, if the change display where the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to one time reduction (see step 120IWS540). Therefore, if the change display where the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to one with a lower advantage (in this example, the time reduction state is one time, which is small).

For example, if the change display that caused the rescue time-saving function to occur was a small win change, and a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to a big win game is terminated, if the V win occurs due to a small win change based on the change display of the second special pattern, the function may be configured to control the game to a time-saving state with 99 time-saving times (hence, a time-saving state with a high degree of advantage).

(state transition)
Next, the state transition in the feature part 120IW will be described. FIG. 8-26 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in the feature part 120IW. As shown in FIG. 8-26, in the normal state, when a jackpot is hit, the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) is controlled (see step 120IWS537). In addition, even in the normal state, when a miss occurs, when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the time-saving state B (time-saving state via time-saving miss) is controlled (see step 120IWS160). Furthermore, even in the case of a miss, when a rescue time-saving state occurs (after RAM clear processing, or after a jackpot or a time-saving miss, when the number of fluctuations reaches 900 times without the next jackpot or time-saving miss occurring), the time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) is controlled (see step 120IWS150).

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the time-saving state A, if a jackpot occurs, the state is controlled again to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) (see step 120IWS537). Also, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the time-saving state A, if a small jackpot occurs, the state is controlled to the small jackpot state (see step 120IWS69), and if a V is won in the small jackpot state, the state is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) via the jackpot (see step 120IWS537). Also, in the time-saving state A, even if a miss occurs, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via time-saving miss) (see step 120IWS160). Also, in the time-saving state A, even if a small jackpot does not occur, if the variable display of the second special pattern is completed 1, 7, or 99 times without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state (see step 120IWS82, S143). Also, if a small hit occurs once in time-saving state A, the state will be controlled to normal (see steps 120 IWS73-75).

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the time-saving state B, if a big win occurs, the state is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via big win) (see step 120IWS537). In the time-saving state B, if a small win occurs, the state is controlled to the small win state (see step 120IWS69). In the time-saving state B, even if a small win does not occur, if the variable display of the second special pattern ends 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, or 200 times without a big win, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS82, S143). In the time-saving state B, even if a miss occurs, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via time-saving miss) (see step 120IWS160). In the time-saving state B, if a small win occurs once, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73-75).

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the case of a big win in time-saving state C, the state is controlled to time-saving state A (time-saving state via big win) (see step 120IWS537). In the case of a small win in time-saving state C, the state is controlled to a small win state (see step 120IWS69). In the case of time-saving state C, if the fluctuation display ends 900 times without a big win, the state is controlled again to time-saving state C (see step 120IWS150). In the case of time-saving state C, if the number of fluctuations reaches 900 times, the state is controlled again to time-saving state C (see steps 120IWS149, 150). In the case of time-saving state C, if a small win occurs once, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73-75).

In addition, if a small hit occurs during time-saving state A but does not result in a V win, time-saving state A will continue as is after the small hit play ends. Also, if a small hit occurs during time-saving state B but does not result in a V win, time-saving state B will continue as is after the small hit play ends. Also, if a small hit occurs during time-saving state C but does not result in a V win, time-saving state C will continue as is after the small hit play ends.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the operation of the performance control means will be described. Figures 8-27 to 8-28 are flow charts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The performance control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, and in the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command received buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 120IWS611). Whether a command is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception counter with the read pointer. If the two match, no received command is stored. If a received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads out the received command from the command reception buffer (step 120IWS612). After reading out, the read pointer value is incremented by +2 (step 120IWS613). The increment of +2 is because 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received performance control command is a variation pattern command (step 120IWS614), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 120IWS615). Then, it sets a variation pattern command reception flag (step 120IWS616).

If the received performance control command is a display result designation command (step 120IWS617), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 120IWS618).

If the received performance control command is any of the pattern determination designation commands (first pattern determination A designation command, first pattern determination B designation command, first pattern determination C designation command, second pattern determination A designation command, second pattern determination B designation command, second pattern determination C designation command) (step 120IWS619), the performance control CPU 120 sets the determination command reception flag according to the received pattern determination designation command (step 120IWS620). For example, when the first pattern determination A designation command is received, the first determination A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first pattern determination B designation command is received, the first determination B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first pattern determination C designation command is received, the first determination C command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second pattern determination A designation command is received, the second determination A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second pattern determination B designation command is received, the second determination B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, if a second pattern confirmation C designation command is received, the second confirmation C command reception flag is set.

If the received presentation control command is a jackpot start command (step 120IWS621), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start command reception flag (step 120IWS622). If the received presentation control command is a jackpot end command (step 120IWS623), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end command reception flag (step 120IWS624).

If the received performance control command is a large prize slot winning designation command (step 120IWS625), the performance control CPU 120 sets the large prize slot winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS626). If the received performance control command is a special prize slot winning designation command (step 120IWS627), the performance control CPU 120 sets the special prize slot winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS628). If the received performance control command is a V prize slot winning designation command (step 120IWS629), the performance control CPU 120 sets the V prize slot winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS630).

If the received performance control command is a normal state designation command (step 120IWS631), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode) (step 120IWS632).

If the received presentation control command is a command to specify time-saving state A (step 120IWS633), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state A (time-saving state via a jackpot) (for example, a yellow background image corresponding to sunset mode) (step 120IWS634).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify time-saving state B (step 120IWS635), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state B (a time-saving state after the time-saving state has ended) (for example, a green background image corresponding to forest mode) (step 120IWS636).

If the received performance control command is a time-saving state C designation command (step 120IWS637), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not a special performance mode flag is set, indicating that the performance mode is set to the special performance mode (step 120IWS638). If the special performance mode flag is not set, the image display device 5 is controlled to switch to a background image corresponding to the time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (for example, an orange background image corresponding to the tangerine orchard mode) (step 120IWS638). On the other hand, if the special performance mode flag is set, the image display device 5 is controlled to switch to a background image corresponding to the special performance mode (for example, a red background image corresponding to the flame mode) (step 120IWS640).

If the received performance control command is a setting value command (step 120IWS641), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to store the setting value in the setting value storage area (step 120IWS642).

If the received performance control command is a right-hit notification start command (step 120IWS643), the performance control CPU 120 controls the right-hit notification LED 120IW20 to start lighting up (step 120IWS644). Note that in this example, the right-hit notification start command is sent at the start of the pattern determination period when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed or when a time-saving rescue is activated (see steps 120IWS1126, S1131), so the right-hit notification LED 120IW20 starts lighting up at the start of the pattern determination period.

If the received performance control command is a command to end the right-hit notification (step 120IWS645), the performance control CPU 120 controls the right-hit notification LED 120IW20 to stop lighting (step 120IWS646) and starts the execution of the left-hit notification performance (step 120IWS647).

If the received performance control command is any other command, the performance control CPU 120 executes processing to store the received performance control command and set a flag corresponding to the received performance control command (step 120IWS648). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS611.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-29 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out a variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 120IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 120IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 120IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 120IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo consecutive win is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines a chance pattern (for example, a combination of patterns that are not a reach but are one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445") as a provisional stop pattern during the pseudo consecutive win in step 120IWS802. The performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 120IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In step 120IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates "big win" or if the received display result designation command indicates "small win", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns (big win pattern, small win pattern) in which three symbols are aligned as the stopping symbols. Note that, although this example shows a case in which a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are aligned as the same pattern for both the big win pattern and the small win pattern is determined, this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, if the received display result designation command indicates "small win", the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to determine a combination of decorative patterns of "135" as the stopping symbol as the small win pattern.

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach performance is involved, a combination of decorative symbols where the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. Note that the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond symbol) depending on the type of time-saving.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for decorative patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a jackpot (a combination of patterns in which the left, center, and right are all the same) are called jackpot patterns. Stopping patterns that evoke a loss are called loss patterns.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read out in step 120IWS801 is fluctuation pattern PT8-1 (see FIG. 8-10 (G)) that specifies a rescue time short entry performance (step 120IWS803). If it is fluctuation pattern PT8-1, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the setting value is one of the settings "4" to "6" based on the setting value specified by the setting value command (the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 120IWS642)) (step 120IWS804). If the setting value is not one of the settings "4" to "6", it proceeds to step 120IWS808.

If the setting value is any of settings "4" to "6", the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform a rescue setting performance and the type of performance depending on whether the setting value is "4" to "6" (step 120IWS805). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has been decided to perform a rescue setting performance (step 120IWS806). If it has been decided not to perform a rescue setting performance, the process proceeds to step 120IWS808. If it has been decided to perform a rescue setting performance, the performance control CPU 120 sets the special performance mode flag (step 120IWS807) and proceeds to step 120IWS808.

In step 120IWS808, if the CPU 120 for effect control has decided to execute a rescue time short period entry effect or a rescue time setting suggestion effect, it selects a process table that includes the rescue time setting suggestion effect (step 120IWS808). Then, it proceeds to step 120IWS814.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 is not fluctuation pattern PT8-1, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 is fluctuation pattern PT6-2 (see FIG. 8-10(E)) that specifies a time-saving stimulation performance or fluctuation pattern PT7-2 (see FIG. 8-10(F)) that specifies a time-saving stimulation performance (step 120IWS809). If it is fluctuation pattern PT6-2 or fluctuation pattern PT7-2, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the time-saving stimulation performance (step 120IWS810). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS814.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is not PT6-2 or PT7-2, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read out in step 120IWS801 is fluctuation pattern PT7-3 (see FIG. 8-10 (F)) that specifies a time-saving revival performance (step 120IWS811). If it is fluctuation pattern PT7-3, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the time-saving revival performance (step 120IWS812). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS814. If it is not fluctuation pattern PT7-3, the performance control CPU 120 selects a normal process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (step 120IWS813). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS814.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the process table selected in step 120IWS808, step 120IWS810, step 120IWS812, or step 120IWS813 (step 120IWS814).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 80. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS815). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this characteristic section 120IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern command.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 120IWS816).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 120IWS817).

(Rescue setting suggestion performance determination table)
FIG. 8-30 is an explanatory diagram of a rescue setting suggestion performance determination table used in step 120IWS805 of FIG. 8-29 when the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern PT8-1 (see FIG. 8-10 (G)).

As shown in Figure 8-30, in the rescue setting suggestion effect determination table, when the setting value is set to "4", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no rescue setting suggestion effect is 50%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect A is 40%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect B is 5%, and the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect C is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "5", the judgment value is allocated so that the selection rate for no rescue setting suggestion effect is 30%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect A is 10%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect B is 50%, and the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect C is 10%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "6", the judgment value is allocated so that the selection rate for no rescue setting suggestion effect is 10%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect A is 15%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect B is 15%, and the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect C is 60%.

Therefore, in this example, if rescue setting suggestion effect A is executed, it suggests that the setting value is likely to be set to "4", if rescue setting suggestion effect B is executed, it suggests that the setting value is likely to be set to "5", and if rescue setting suggestion effect C is executed, it suggests that the setting value is likely to be set to "6".

The rescue setting suggestion effect is a setting value suggestion effect that is executed when the rescue time shortening entry effect is executed on the image display device 5.

In this example, the rescue setting suggestion effect is configured to be executable when the setting value is set to "4" to "6," so the rescue setting suggestion effect is a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting is set to a relatively high value.

(Variable display performance processing)
8-31 and 8-32 are flow charts showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 120IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 120IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 120IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is set to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 120IWS844). In addition, the control state for the performance device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data that are set next (step 120IWS845).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received (step 120IWS846). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation A command reception flag or the second confirmation A command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the mode transition performance (a performance that notifies the player of a transition to a time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-hit notification (step 120IWS847). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS848). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS849). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 120IWS850). Then, it proceeds to step 120IWS867.

If neither the first pattern confirmation A designation command nor the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received (step 120IWS851). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation B command reception flag or the second confirmation B command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the continuation performance (a performance that notifies the user that the time-saving state will continue) (step 120IWS852). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS853). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS854). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 120IWS855). Then, it proceeds to step 120IWS867.

If neither the first pattern confirmation B designation command nor the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation C designation command or the second pattern confirmation C designation command has been received (step 120IWS861). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation C command reception flag or the second confirmation C command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation C designation command or the second pattern confirmation C designation command has been received, it proceeds to step 120IWS863.

If neither the first pattern determination C designation command nor the second pattern determination C designation command is received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 120IWS862). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first pattern determination C designation command or the second pattern determination C designation command is received (Y in step 120IWS861), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y in step 120IWS862), the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the normal pattern determination display (step 120IWS863). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS864). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS865). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to the determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 120IWS866). Then proceed to step 120IWS867.

In this example, in addition to when a pattern determination command is received, if the variable time timer times out (see step 120IWS862), the process proceeds to step 120IWS862 and onwards, and the pattern determination period begins. However, normally, unless a pattern determination command is missed, step 120IWS862 will be judged as Y and the process will not proceed to step 120IWS862 and onwards.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 120IWS867).

(Waiting for special drawing)
8-33 and 8-34 are flow charts showing the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the special chart hit waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed performance period timer (step 120IWS871), and checks whether the value of the fixed performance period timer after subtraction has timed out (step 120IWS872). If the value of the fixed performance period timer after subtraction has not timed out, the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 120IWS873), and the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) is controlled according to the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data n) (step 120IWS874).

When the process timer times out (step 120IWS875), the performance control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 120IWS876). The performance control CPU 120 also sets the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the decorative symbol stopping pattern is currently being displayed (step 120IWS878). If the decorative symbol stopping pattern is currently being displayed, the process ends. If the decorative symbol stopping pattern is not currently being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the determined stopping pattern (non-time-saving losing pattern, time-saving losing pattern, big win pattern, small win pattern) to stop (step 120IWS879).

If the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in the processing of step 120IWS879 (Y in step 120IWS880), the presentation control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot pattern has been confirmed and displayed (step 120IWS881). Then, the processing ends.

When the small win symbol is stopped and displayed in the processing of step 120IWS879 (Y in step 120IWS882), the presentation control CPU 120 sets a small win stop flag indicating that the small win symbol has been confirmed and displayed (step 120IWS883A). Then, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the execution of a V winning promotion presentation that encourages the game ball to win the V winning hole (step 120IWS883B), and ends the processing.

If the value of the fixed performance period timer after subtraction has timed out (i.e., the pattern fixed period has elapsed), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot stop flag is set (step 120IWS884). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a jackpot start command has been received (step 120IWS885A). Note that whether a jackpot start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether a jackpot start command reception flag (see step 120IWS622) has been set. If a jackpot start command has not been received, the process ends.

If a jackpot start command has been received, the presentation control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 120IWS885B). Then, based on the setting value specified by the setting value command (the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 120IWS642)), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not to display a setting suggestion presentation at the time of the jackpot and the type of presentation (step 120IWS886).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table for the performance during the jackpot according to the presence or absence of a setting suggestion performance at the time of the jackpot and its type (step 120IWS887). The performance control CPU 120 then starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 120IWS888), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS889).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the jackpot (step 120IWS890).

If the big win stop flag is not set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small win stop flag is set (step 120IWS891). If the small win stop flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a small win start command has been received (step 120IWS892). Whether a small win start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether a flag indicating that a small win start command has been received is set in the command analysis process. If a small win start command has not been received, the process ends.

If a small win start command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the small win stop flag (step 120IWS893). Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small win performance (step 120IWS894). Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 120IWS895), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS896).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the small win (step 120IWS897).

If the small win stop flag is also not set (i.e., if a non-time-saving losing pattern or a time-saving losing pattern is stopped and displayed), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 120IWS898).

(Table for deciding the setting suggestion effect when the jackpot occurs)
FIG. 8-35 is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot setting suggestion performance determination table used in step 120IWS886.

As shown in Figure 8-35, in the setting suggestion effect determination table when the setting value is set to "1", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 65%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 10%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "2", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 65%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 10%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "3", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 65%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 10%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "4", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 60%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 15%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "5", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 60%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 15%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "6", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 60%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 15%.

Therefore, in this example, if the jackpot setting suggestion effect A is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "1", if the jackpot setting suggestion effect B is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "2", if the jackpot setting suggestion effect C is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "3", if the jackpot setting suggestion effect D is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "4", if the jackpot setting suggestion effect E is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "5", and if the jackpot setting suggestion effect F is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "6".

The setting suggestion effect at the time of a jackpot is a setting value suggestion effect that is executed on the image display device 5 when a jackpot symbol is displayed.

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the presentation of the rescue time-saving entry presentation and the rescue setting suggestion presentation when transitioning to the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving state, will be described. Figures 8-36 to 8-37 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the presentation up to the transition to the time-saving state. In Figures 8-36 to 8-37, the presentation screen transitions in the order of (A) (B) (C) ... (G).

As shown in Figure 8-36 (A), the display of the decorative pattern 120IW100 begins to change one change before the transition to the rescue time reduction.

As shown in FIG. 8-36 (B), when the display of the decorative pattern 120IW100 starts to change, the rescue time-saving entry effect starts. In the rescue time-saving entry effect, first, while the display of the decorative pattern 120IW100 changes, the entry suggestion display 120IW105, which suggests entry into the rescue time-saving mode and reads "Super hot!", is displayed, and the rescue time-saving entry effect starts. Note that from then on, in the rescue time-saving entry effect, the decorative pattern 120IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 120IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-36(C), an operation suggestion image 120IW106 is displayed, which suggests operating (pressing) the push button 31B (see FIG. 8-1). For example, the operation suggestion image 120IW106 displays the word "press" together with an image encouraging the user to press the push button 31B.

As shown in FIG. 8-36(D), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 120IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the operation suggestion image 120IW106, the text display 120IW107 "V STOCK x 1" is displayed, and the player is notified that the rescue time reduction will begin. In addition, a right-hit instruction display 120IW108 instructing a right hit is displayed next to the small symbol 120IW101. Furthermore, if it has been decided that a rescue setting suggestion effect should be executed, the rescue setting suggestion effect is executed, and a setting value suggestion display 120IW200 suggesting a setting value is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen. This suggests that the setting value is one of settings "4" to "6."

For example, when rescue setting suggestion performance A is executed, the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in blue, when rescue setting suggestion performance B is executed, the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in green, and when rescue setting suggestion performance C is executed, the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in red, and the display color of the setting value suggestion display can be configured to differ depending on the type of rescue setting suggestion performance.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when a rescue setting suggestion performance A is executed, a triangular setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, when a rescue setting suggestion performance B is executed, a diamond-shaped setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, and when a rescue setting suggestion performance C is executed, a star-shaped setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, and the display shape of the setting value suggestion display may be changed depending on the type of rescue setting suggestion performance.

In this example, even if a jackpot is hit, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) can be configured to execute a presentation that displays the text "V STOCK x 1" in the same manner as in FIG. 8-36 (D). In this case, for example, in the start winning judgment process (step S101), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead judgment process to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit and the type of fluctuation pattern, and transmits a look-ahead judgment result designation command that can identify the look-ahead judgment result. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance (so-called reserved consecutive performance) in the same manner as in FIG. 8-36 (D) based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command. For example, if it is determined that there is one item in the reserved memory that will be a jackpot based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the reserved consecutive performance is executed by displaying the text "V STOCK x 1". Also, for example, if it is determined based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command that there are two jackpots in the reserved memory, the text display "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to execute the reserved consecutive performance.

On the other hand, when the rescue time reduction is activated, there is a high probability that the extremely short change display time of 0.5 seconds will be executed during the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction (see FIG. 8-10(B)). Therefore, the change display will be consumed very quickly and a jackpot is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, during the change display that has been activated by the rescue time reduction (in this example, the pattern determination period), the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 8-36(D) is executed without checking the results of the pre-reading judgment. Therefore, the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 8-36(D) is an effect in the same manner as the pseudo-reserved consecutive effect, and is an effect that notifies the user that the rescue time reduction has been activated.

In addition, if the fluctuation that has reached the rescue time reduction is a jackpot fluctuation, for example, 30 seconds may be secured as the fluctuation time, and a presentation similar to that of FIG. 8-36 may be executed to produce a presentation that appears to be the rescue time reduction, and then a presentation that notifies of a jackpot may be executed.

The example shows a case where the right hit instruction display 120IW108 starts to be displayed from the timing of the display of the text display 120IW107 "V STOCK x 1", but the timing of the start of the display of the right hit instruction display 120IW108 is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, the right hit instruction display 120IW108 may start to be displayed from the timing of the confirmation display of the previous stopping pattern, and various modes are possible.

In addition, this example shows a case where a setting suggestion effect is executed when a rescue time reduction occurs and a pseudo consecutive hold effect is executed, but this is not limited to this. It may also be configured to execute a setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs and a consecutive hold effect is executed, or it may be configured not to execute a setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs and a consecutive hold effect is executed. Also, when executing a setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs and a consecutive hold effect is executed, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be different from when a rescue time reduction occurs, or the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect may be different.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-37(E), a mode selection screen 120IW109 is displayed to select the presentation mode during rescue time reduction. For example, a screen to select one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. If a predetermined time has passed without selecting a presentation mode, the presentation mode that the cursor is aligned with is automatically confirmed. Also, even when the mode selection screen 120IW109 is displayed, the right hit instruction display 120IW108 remains displayed next to the small pattern 120IW101. Also, the rescue setting suggestion presentation continues to be executed, and the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed on this screen as well.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-37(F), when the selection of the presentation mode is completed, a start notification screen 120IW110 is displayed to notify the user that the rescue time reduction will begin. For example, the words "Rescue time reduction has begun" are displayed. At this time, the small symbols 120IW101 stop.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-37(G), when the next change starts, the game transitions to time-saving state C, and the rescue time-saving mode starts. At this time, the background image changes to the background image (red) for the special performance mode.

In this example, the rescue time-saving entry effect is executed one change before entering the rescue time-saving mode, but it is also possible to display the number of spins remaining until the rescue time-saving mode, explain the effects during the rescue time-saving mode, and display a countdown before that change.

In addition, in this example, a pattern determination period of 20 seconds is secured in the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, and a mode transition effect and right-hit notification are executed, but the pattern determination period may remain the usual 0.5 seconds, and the game may be configured to transition directly to the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction without performing a mode transition effect, etc.

In addition, this example shows a case where the rescue time-saving counter is initially set to "900" when the RAM clear process is executed, when a jackpot is hit, or when the time-saving function is not activated, but for example, when a story-based effect (such as a story reach effect or a story about whether to perform high-speed fluctuation) is to be executed, the selection buffer and story counter for that story may also be cleared. Also, it may be possible to configure the game so that a story can be set when the rescue time-saving function is activated, or so that different stories can be set depending on the game state.

(Variation 1)
In the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, the case where the time-saving state continues until a small hit occurs uniformly in the time-saving state A via a big win, the time-saving state B via a time-saving miss, and the time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving is shown, but it is not limited to such a form. For example, the time-saving state may be configured to continue until a different number of small hits occur depending on whether it is the time-saving state A via a big win, the time-saving state B via a time-saving miss, or the time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving. Below, a modified example 1 in which the time-saving state continues until a different number of small hits occur depending on whether it is the time-saving state A via a big win, the time-saving state B via a time-saving miss, or the time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving is described.

Figure 8-38 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing in modified example 1. In modified example 1, the processing of steps 120IWS131 to S148 of the special symbol stop processing is the same as those shown in Figures 8-19 and 8-20. In modified example 1, if the rescue time-saving determination flag is set (Y in step 120IWS148), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "900", the combined time-saving count counter to "900", the rescue time-saving count counter to "900", and the small win count counter to "2" (step 120IWS149X). In addition, the processing from step 120IWS150 onwards is the same as those shown in Figure 8-20.

By executing the above process, in variant 1, in the case of time-saving state A via a big win and time-saving state B via a missed time-saving state, the time-saving state continues until one small win occurs, whereas in the case of time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving state, the time-saving state continues until two small wins occur.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and for example, the time-saving state may be configured to continue until a different number of small wins occur between the case of time-saving state A via a big win and the case of time-saving state B via a missed time-saving state. Also, in this example, the time-saving state is configured to continue until two small wins occur in the case of time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving state, but the time-saving state may be configured to continue until another number of small wins occur, such as three.

(Variation 2)
In the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, the case where the subtraction process of the small hit counter is executed at the start of the small hit fluctuation (see steps 120IWS71 to S75) is shown, but it is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, it may be configured to execute the subtraction process of the small hit counter at the end of the small hit game after the small hit fluctuation. Below, we will explain the modified example 2 in which the subtraction process of the small hit counter is executed at the end of the small hit game after the small hit fluctuation.

Figure 8-39 is a flow chart showing the processing after the small hit is closed in variant 2. In variant 2, the processing of steps 120IWS451 to S463 is the same as those shown in Figure 8-24. Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit counter is 0 (step 120IWS463A). If the value of the small hit counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

If the value of the small hit counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit counter (step 120IWS463B).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS463C). If the value of the small hit counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

If the value of the small win counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flags (time-saving flags A to C) that have been set and ends the time-saving state (step 120IWS463D). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

The processing of step 120IWS464 is the same as that shown in Figure 8-24.

(Variation 3)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, when the rescue time reduction is to be performed, the time reduction state is uniformly controlled at the end of the pattern determination period, but it is not limited to such a form, and when the variable display that is the rescue time reduction is a small win variable, it may be configured to be controlled to the time reduction state at the end of the small win game. Below, we will explain a modified example 3 in which the time reduction state is controlled at the end of the small win game when the variable display that is the rescue time reduction is a small win variable.

Figure 8-40 is a flowchart showing the process after the small win is closed in variant 3. Note that in variant 3, even if the rescue time reduction determination flag is set in step 120IWS148 during the special symbol stop process, if the small win flag is set, the process in steps 120IWS149 to S151 is not executed.

In the third modification, the processing of steps S120IWS451 to S462 is the same as those shown in FIG. 8-24. Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time-saving determination flag is set (step S120IWS462A). If the rescue time-saving determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set rescue time-saving determination flag (step S120IWS462B). The CPU 103 also sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "900", the combined time-saving count counter to "900", the rescue time-saving count counter to "900", and the small win count counter to "1" (step S120IWS462C). The CPU 103 also sets the time-saving flag C and controls it to the time-saving state (step S120IWS462D). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a time-saving state C designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS462E). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

The processing of step 120IWS464 is the same as that shown in Figure 8-24.

(Variation 4)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, when the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, when a V winning occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the case of controlling to the time reduction state with a lower advantage (time reduction state with one time reduction) has been shown, but it is not limited to such a form. For example, it may be configured to control to the time reduction state with a lower advantage (for example, a time reduction state with seven time reductions). Below, a description will be given of a modified example 4 in which, when the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, when a V winning occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state with a higher advantage (time reduction state with seven time reductions) is controlled.

Figure 8-41 is a flow chart showing the jackpot end processing in variant 4. In variant 4, the processing of steps 120IWS531 to S539 in the jackpot end processing is the same as those shown in Figure 8-25. Next, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "7", sets the combined time-saving count counter to "99", and sets the small jackpot count counter to "1" (step 120IWS540X). Note that the processing of steps 120IWS541 to S541 is the same as those shown in Figure 8-25.

In the fourth modified example, by executing the above process, if the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to a time reduction state with 7 times of time reduction (see step 120IWS540). Therefore, when considering the case where the change display of the first special pattern is executed, if the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to a time reduction state with a higher advantage (in this example, a time reduction state with 7 times of time reduction, which is more than 1 time). On the other hand, when considering the case where the change display of the second special pattern is executed, if the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to a time reduction state with a lower advantage (in this example, a time reduction state with 7 times of time reduction, which is less than 99 times).

(Variation 5)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic portion 120IW, after the rescue time reduction is started, if the 900 variable display times are completed without a big win or a small win occurring during the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction, the rescue time reduction is started again (the rescue time reduction loops), but this is not limited to such a case, and the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction may be configured to end temporarily. Below, a description is given of a modified example 5 in which the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction is configured to end temporarily.

Figure 8-42 is a flow chart showing the normal processing of special symbols in the modified example 5. In the modified example 5, the processing of steps 120IWS51 to S85 in the normal processing of special symbols is the same as those shown in Figures 8-15 and 8-16. In the modified example 5, if the value of the rescue time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 (Y in step 120IWS85), the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C is set (step 120IWS85A). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., if 900 variable displays have been completed without a big win or a small win during the time-saving state C via the rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "900" (step 120IWS85B). Note that the processing from step 120IWS86 onwards is the same as those shown in Figure 8-16.

Figure 8-43 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing in the modified example 5. In the modified example 5, the processing of steps 120IWS to S148 in the special symbol stop processing is the same as those shown in Figures 8-19 and 8-20. In the modified example 5, when the rescue time reduction determination flag is set (Y in step 120IWS148), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time reduction counter to "900", the combined time reduction counter to "900", and the small win counter to "1" (step 120IWS149Z). That is, in the modified example 5, the rescue time reduction counter is not set at the end of the variable display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred. Note that the processing from step 120IWS150 onwards is the same as those shown in Figures 8-20 and 8-21.

By executing the above process, in variant 5, the rescue time reduction counter is not set at the end of the variable display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred, and then, if 900 variable displays have ended without a big or small win during time-saving state C via the rescue time reduction, the rescue time reduction counter is set. Therefore, in variant 5, even if 900 variable displays have ended without a big or small win during time-saving state C via the rescue time reduction after the rescue time reduction has occurred, time-saving state C ends once and the rescue time reduction does not loop.

(Variation 6)
In the above-mentioned modified example 5, when the rescue time reduction occurs, the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0, so during the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction, in the normal special pattern processing, Y is determined in step 120IWS83, and the subtraction processing of the rescue time reduction counter in step 120IWS84 is not executed. Note that the subtraction processing of the rescue time reduction counter may be executed during the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction. Below, a description is given of modified example 6, which allows the subtraction processing of the rescue time reduction counter to be executed during the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction.

Figure 8-44 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of special symbols in variant 6. In variant 6, the processing of steps 120IWS51 to S82 in the normal processing of special symbols is the same as those shown in Figures 8-15 and 8-16. In variant 6, there is no process of determining the value of the rescue time reduction counter in step 120IWS83, and the CPU 103 simply subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 120IWS84).

Next, the CPU 130 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after the subtraction is less than 0 (i.e., a negative value) (step 120IWS84A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after the subtraction is less than 0, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time reduction counter to "0" (step 120IWS84B). Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS87.

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not less than 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS84C). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS87.

If the value of the rescue time-saving counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C is set (step 120IWS84D). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., 900 variable displays have been completed without a big win or small win during the time-saving state C via the rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "900" (step 120IWS84E). Note that the processing from step 120IWS86 onwards is the same as that shown in Figure 8-16.

By executing the above process, in variant 6, as in variant 5, the rescue time reduction counter is not set at the end of the variable display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred, and the rescue time reduction counter is set when 900 variable displays are completed without a big hit or small hit during time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction. Therefore, in variant 6, even if 900 variable displays are completed without a big hit or small hit during time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction after the rescue time reduction has occurred, time reduction state C ends once and the rescue time reduction does not loop.

(Variation 7)
In the above-mentioned modified example 5 and modified example 6, it may be further configured to be able to execute the pre-reading advance notice performance. And, it may be configured to limit the pre-reading advance notice performance in a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the time-saving state C via the rescue time-saving is ended. Below, a description will be given of modified example 7 in which the pre-reading advance notice performance is limited in a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the time-saving state C via the rescue time-saving is ended.

In the seventh variant, in the start winning judgment process (step 120IWS101) of the special symbol process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead judgment of whether or not a big win or a small win will occur, whether or not the time-saving feature will be missed, the big win type, the small win type, the time-saving feature type, the variation pattern type, and the like. Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send a look-ahead judgment result designation command capable of identifying the look-ahead judgment result to the performance control CPU 120. In the look-ahead notice setting process (step S161) of the performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence and type of a look-ahead notice performance based on the look-ahead judgment result designation command received, and performs control to execute the look-ahead notice performance for one or more variation displays before the variation display to be predicted is executed.

Figure 8-45 is a timing chart showing the timing of the pre-reading preview performance restriction period in variant 7. As shown in Figure 8-45, when 900 variable display cycles have been completed without a big win, small win, or time-saving miss since the rescue time-saving count counter was set, rescue time-saving occurs and control is exercised in time-saving state C. Next, when another 900 variable display cycles have been completed without a big win or small win during time-saving state C via rescue time-saving (i.e., when the 1800th variable display cycle has been completed since the rescue time-saving count counter was set), time-saving state C ends.

The performance control CPU 120 also restricts the execution of the look-ahead preview performance during a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the time-saving state C ends. In this example, since the upper limit of the combined reserved memory count is 8, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is restricted during a predetermined period from the change display 8 changes before the time-saving state C ends until the rescue time-saving state starts, and during a specific period from the rescue time-saving state starts until the change display 8 changes after the time-saving state C ends. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-45, when counting after the rescue time-saving count counter is set, it is determined that the look-ahead preview performance will be executed from the 1792nd change display to the 1808th change display.

The "restriction on look-ahead preview performance" may be controlled so that look-ahead preview performance is not executed at all, or the probability of execution of the look-ahead preview performance may be reduced, or only some of the multiple types of look-ahead preview performance may be executed.

(Variation 8)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each modification, the control of a plurality of time-saving states may be configured to be executed simultaneously in parallel. Fig. 8-46 is a timing chart showing the timing of the control of various time-saving states in modification 8. In the example shown in Fig. 8-46, when the big win game state is ended (timing T1), a transition to time-saving state A with the time-saving number of times being 99 is shown.

Next, at timing T2 while the time-saving state A continues, a new time-saving occurrence condition (in this example, the occurrence of a time-saving failure) is established. In this case, in the modified example 8, as shown in FIG. 8-46, in parallel with the control of the time-saving state A, the control of the time-saving state B (in this example, 30 times of time-saving) based on the new time-saving failure is started. Then, when the 30 times of the fluctuation display are completed (timing T3), the control of the time-saving state B is terminated. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 8-46, the control of the time-saving state A continues because the 99 times of the fluctuation display have not yet been completed at the stage of timing T3. Note that, during the period from timing T2 to T3, the control of the time-saving state A and the control of the time-saving state B are executed in parallel internally, but it appears that the time-saving state continues as it is.

Next, at timing T4 while the time-saving state A is continuing, a new time-saving occurrence condition (in this example, the occurrence of a time-saving miss) is established. In this case, in the modified example 8, as shown in FIG. 8-46, in parallel with the control of the time-saving state A, the control of the time-saving state B (in this example, the number of time-saving times is 30) based on the new time-saving miss is started. Then, at timing T5 before the end of the 30-time variable display, the 99th variable display after the control to the time-saving state A is ended, and the control to the time-saving state A is ended. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 8-46, the control of the time-saving state B continues because the 30-time variable display has not yet been ended at the stage of timing T5. Then, when the 30-time variable display is ended (timing T6), the control to the time-saving state B is ended. Therefore, in terms of internal processing, the time-saving state A is ended at timing T5 after the end of the jackpot game, but the control of the time-saving state B is also executed in parallel, so it appears that the time-saving state was controlled to more than 99 times after the end of the jackpot game.

(Variation 9)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, by judging Y in step 120IWS1702 and executing steps 120IWS1703 and S1710, a common fluctuation pattern can be determined when the time reduction is not achieved but the time reduction is achieved. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even when the time reduction is not achieved but the time reduction is achieved, a different fluctuation pattern can be determined.

(Variation 10)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic unit 120IW, by switching to a background image corresponding to the special performance mode, the setting suggestion performance can be executed even after the variable display in which the rescue time reduction is established is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, based on the result of the look-ahead judgment, in the variable display before the variable display in which the rescue time reduction is established, a provocative performance such as "special performance mode??" can be executed to execute the setting suggestion performance.

As explained above, the characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples have the inventive configurations shown below in (Means A1) to (Means A10), (Means B1) to (Means B6), (Means C1) to (Means C5), and (Means D1) to (Means D5).

(Means A1) A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information including a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and update means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display, and the special state control means updates the numerical information updated by the update means to a specific value (e.g., a special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS114 to S116 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can control the game to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, the establishment of a rescue time reduction) by setting the value of the first symbol to "0" or "1" and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is set to "0"); an updating means that updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the variable display of the first special pattern is executed or the variable display of the second special pattern is executed); and a special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS114 to S116 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can control the game to a special state (for example, a small win game state) that is different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small win pattern) that is different from the specific display result is derived and displayed; and a counting means that counts the number of times the special state has occurred in the special state. and special state terminating means for terminating the special state (for example, a portion for executing step 120IWS73 in the game control microcomputer 100). The special state terminating means is capable of terminating the special state based on the number of times the special state counted by the special counting means has occurred reaching a specific number of times (for example, once) (for example, when Y is determined in step 120IWS74, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a time-saving end flag in step 120IWS75, and determines Y in step 120IWS141 and executes step 120IWS143). The special state control means is capable of controlling to the special state during the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed when a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which a special condition is established. (For example, even in the case of a small win variation, if the rescue time-saving determination flag is set in 120IWS148 at the timing of the end of the pattern determination period, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150, and the small win game state thereafter is controlled to time-saving state C), and the special counting means does not count the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is established (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS73 at the start of the variation to subtract 1 from the small win number counter, and executes step 120IWS149 at the end of the variation in the case of rescue time-saving to set the small win number counter, so that in the small win variation where rescue time-saving is established, after the small win number counter is set in step 120IWS149, the small win number counter is not immediately subtracted in the variable display). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control in a situation where both the special state and the special state occur. For example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a special condition is met and control is exercised to a special state, but a special display result is displayed and the special state ends immediately, thereby preventing disadvantages to the player.

In this example, regarding "controllable to a special state during a special state," when the change display that is the time-saving relief is a small win change, the time-saving state C is changed at the end of the pattern determination period, and then the time-saving state C is controlled during the small win game, but the timing of the change to the time-saving state C is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, the time-saving state C may be changed from the start of the small win change that is the time-saving relief, or the time-saving state C may be changed halfway through the small win game. In this way, it is sufficient if there is a period during the small win game that is controlled to the time-saving state C in some form. In addition, when the time-saving state C is changed from the start of the small win change, the small win count counter may also be decremented at the start of the small win change.

In addition, although this example shows a case where the "specific number of times" is one time, this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the time-saving state may be configured to end based on the occurrence of multiple small wins, such as two or three, during the time-saving state, and multiple times may be set as the specific number of times.

(Means A2) In means A1, the special state ending means may be configured to end the special state when the number of times the special state counted by the special counting means reaches a specific number (e.g., 1 time) and when a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 1 time, 7 times, 99 times, 900 times) in the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time-saving end flag in step 120IWS75 when Y in step 120IWS74, sets the time-saving end flag in step 120IWS82 when Y in step 120IWS78 and when Y in step 120IWS81, and executes step 120IWS143 by determining Y in step 120IWS141). Such a configuration allows for suitable control in situations where both the special state and the special state occur. For example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a special condition is met and control is exercised to a special state, but a special display result is displayed and the special state ends immediately, thereby preventing disadvantages to the player.

(Means A3) In means A1 or A2, the special state control means can control the special state based on the advantageous state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS537), and the special state termination means can be configured to terminate the special state when the number of times the special state is counted by the special counting means becomes the same (for example, 1 time) when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of a special condition and when the special state is controlled based on the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the small win counter to "1" in step 120IWS149). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition from becoming too advantageous. For example, it is possible to prevent a game from being played so as to be controlled to an advantageous special state.

(Means A4) In any of the means A1 to A3, the special state control means may be configured to control the special state based on the advantageous state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS537), and the special state termination means may be configured to terminate the special state when the number of times the special state is counted by the special counting means becomes different (for example, 2 times) when the special state is controlled to the advantageous state based on the establishment of a special condition and when the special state is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in variant 1, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the small win counter to "2" in step 120IWS149X). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition from becoming too advantageous. For example, it is possible to prevent the game from being played so as to be controlled to an advantageous special state.

In addition, it may be difficult for a player to immediately notice the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving function, but in variant 1, while in the normal time-saving state the time-saving state ends with one small win, the time-saving state ends with two small wins only when the time-saving state is controlled via the rescue time-saving function, so that even if the first small win misses a win in the second start winning hole (misses the charge of the second reserved memory), another chance to win a win in the second start winning hole can be given.

In addition, in variant 1, in the normal time-saving state, the number of time-saving times is often as small as 1 or 7, and there are relatively few cases in which the time-saving state ends when a small hit occurs, whereas in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the number of time-saving times is as high as 900, and there are many cases in which the time-saving state ends when a small hit occurs. Therefore, by reliably ending the time-saving state when a small hit occurs, it is possible to prevent players from playing in a strategic manner.

(Means A5) In any of the means A1 to A4, the special state control means may be configured to count the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is met (for example, in the modified example 2, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS463B at the end of a small win game, so that in a small win variation where the rescue time reduction is met, after the small win count counter is set in step 120IWS149, the small win count counter is immediately decremented in the variable display). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control in a situation where both the special state and the special state occur. For example, if a strategy element remains by controlling to the special state in a special state where a special condition is met, it becomes a strategy element for the player, and the risk of it becoming a disadvantage to the game center can be reduced.

(Means A6) In any of means A1 to A5, the special state control means may be configured such that, when a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display in which a special condition is established, the special state can be controlled to a special state after a special state based on the derived and displayed special display result (for example, in variant example 3, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS462D at the end of a small win game, so that in a small win variation in which rescue time reduction is established, the time reduction state C is controlled at the end of the small win game). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control in a situation in which both a special state and a special state occur. For example, when a special condition is established and control is established to a special state, it is possible to wait until the control of the special state starts, making it easier to perform various controls.

(Means A7) In any of means A1 to A6, the special state control means may be configured to be controllable to a first special state (e.g., a time-saving state with one time of time saving) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S544), to be controllable to a second special state (e.g., a time-saving state with seven times of time saving) which is more advantageous than the first special state after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S542), and to be controllable to the first special state after the advantageous state when a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display in which a special condition is established, and in a special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed, the special state is controlled to an advantageous state based on the game medium passing through a specific area (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S540). Such a configuration makes it possible to control special states that are not too advantageous to the player (i.e., not too disadvantageous to the gaming facility).

(Means A8) In any of means A1 to A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (e.g., a time-saving state with one time of time-saving) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S544), and can be controlled to a second special state (e.g., a time-saving state with seven times of time-saving) that is more advantageous than the first special state after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state (e.g., the game control microcomputer The game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120IWS537, S542), a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where a special condition is established, and when the special display result is derived and displayed in the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to control to a second special state after the advantageous state when the game medium passes through a specific area (for example, in variant 4, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S540X). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that is not too advantageous for the player (i.e., not too disadvantageous for the game facility).

(Means A9) In any of means A1 to A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (e.g., a time-saving state with 99 time-saving times) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S545), and can be controlled to a second special state (e.g., a time-saving state with 7 time-saving times) that is less advantageous than the first special state after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S54 2), a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where a special condition is established, and in a special state based on the derived display of the special display result, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the game medium passing through a specific area, it can be controlled to the first special state after the advantageous state (for example, when the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S542, if a V win occurs due to a small win fluctuation based on the variable display of the second special pattern, it can be controlled to a time-saving state with 99 time-saving times). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that is not too advantageous for the player (i.e., not too disadvantageous for the game facility).

(Means A10) In any of means A1 to A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (e.g., a time-saving state with 99 time-saving times) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S545), and can be controlled to a second special state (e.g., a time-saving state with 7 time-saving times) that is less advantageous than the first special state after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state (e.g., the game control microcomputer The game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120IWS537, S542), a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where a special condition is established, and when the special display result is derived and displayed in the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to control to a second special state after the advantageous state when the game medium passes through a specific area (for example, in variant 4, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S540X). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that is not too advantageous for the player (i.e., not too disadvantageous for the game facility).

(Means B1) A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information including a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, update means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving counter) based on the execution of the variable display, and presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CP) that can execute a presentation corresponding to the variable display. and a part for executing steps S170 to S173 in U120), the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, a rescue time-saving is established) by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (for example, "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 900 times) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS150), the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special pattern is executed or the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the value of the rescue time-saving number counter is updated uniformly), and the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special display result (for example, a pattern that does not cause the time-saving) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed. (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS160), controls to a special state when a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is satisfied, and there are a plurality of types of special display results including a first special display result (e.g., the pattern "6" in the time-saving miss A) and a second special display result (e.g., the pattern "8" in the time-saving miss A), and the special state control means is capable of controlling to the same special state when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS160 regardless of whether the pattern "6" is derived and displayed or the pattern "8" is derived and displayed), and the performance execution means controls to a special state when the first special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is not satisfied in a normal state, The present invention is characterized in that different presentations are executed in the cases where the first special display result is displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, when step 120IWS1706 is N, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS1707 and S1710, and when step 120IWS1706 is Y, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS1708 and S1710, and can determine different variation patterns), and when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied in the normal state is executed, a common presentation is executed in the cases where the first special display result is displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, when the time-saving misses but a rescue time-saving occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 judges Y in step 120IWS1702 and executes steps 120IWS1703 and S1710, and can determine a common variation pattern). With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately control even in a situation where both a special state is controlled due to the establishment of a special condition and a special state is controlled due to a derived display of a special display result occur. For example, it is possible to provide an appropriate presentation when a special state is controlled due to the establishment of a special condition.

In this example, the "same special state" is controlled to the time-saving state B of 100 times the same number of times when the time-saving miss A occurs (see step 120IWS155, S160), regardless of whether the pattern "6" is derived and displayed or the pattern "8" is derived and displayed. However, this is not limited to such a case. For example, the "same special state" may be configured to execute one or more of the following: (1) controlling to the same number of times the time-saving, (2) determining the variation pattern of the special pattern using the same variation pattern table, (3) determining the variation pattern of the normal pattern using the same variation pattern table, and (4) controlling the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) to the open state using the same opening pattern, or may be configured to execute all of (1) to (4).

In this example, a case where a different variation pattern is determined as "executing a different presentation" is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a different added time may be added to the variation time indicated by the variation pattern when the pattern "6" is derived and displayed and when the pattern "8" is derived and displayed. Also, for example, a configuration may be made to execute either (1) a process to determine a different variation pattern or (2) a process to add a different added time, or a configuration may be made to execute both.

In addition to differentiating the change time, the pattern determination period at the end of the change may also be different.

(Means B2) In means B1, the effect execution means may be configured to be capable of executing a common effect when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed in a special state (for example, if step 120IWS1704 is Y and step 120IWS1705 is Y, the game control microcomputer 100 can execute steps 120IWS1709 and S1710 to determine a common variation pattern). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide suitable control even in a situation where both a special state is controlled due to the establishment of a special condition and a special state is controlled due to the derived display of a special display result occur. For example, a suitable effect can be provided when a special state is controlled due to the establishment of a special condition.

In this example, when the first special pattern change display is executed, there is a probability of about 1/200 that the time-saving feature has failed, and when the second special pattern change display is executed, there is a probability of about 1/400 that the time-saving feature has failed. However, this is not the only possible embodiment, and for example, the probability of the time-saving feature failing when the second special pattern change display is executed may be further lowered (for example, to 1/800) to make it less likely that the time-saving feature will fail during the time-saving mode.

Also, for example, the probability of the time-saving feature missing when the second special symbol change display is executed may be increased so that if there is a second reserved memory when the time-saving feature ends, the revival effect is more likely to be executed by the change display of the second special symbol after the time-saving feature ends.

(Means B3) Means B1 or B2 may be provided with a display result determination means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS93 in the game control microcomputer 100) that determines the display result, and the display result determination means may be configured to execute a common process for determining the type of display result that will be controlled to an advantageous state when controlled to an advantageous state, and for determining the type of special display result when a special display result is obtained (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS93 in common when determining a jackpot pattern and when determining a time-saving miss pattern). With such a configuration, the common processing can be used to suppress an increase in program capacity.

(Means B4) In any of means B1 to B3, a variable display control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that executes control of the variable display, and the variable display control means determines a variable display period during which the variable display is executed according to the type of display result (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 determines a variation pattern), and when a variable display is executed in which a special condition is met in the normal state, determines a different variable display period for when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 determines a variable display period for when the first special display result is derived and displayed, in step 12 When step 120IWS1706 is N, steps 120IWS1707 and S1710 are executed, and when step 120IWS1706 is Y, steps 120IWS1708 and S1710 are executed, and different variation patterns can be determined), when variable display is executed in a special state, a common variable display period is determined for the case where the first special display result is derived and the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, when the time reduction is missed but the time reduction is rescued, the game control microcomputer 100 judges Y in step 120IWS1702 and executes steps 120IWS1703 and S1710, and a common variation pattern can be determined). With such a configuration, the display result and the variable display period can be suitably adjusted according to the situation.

(Means B5) In any of means B1 to B4, the effect execution means may be configured to execute different effects when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed when a variable display is executed for which a special condition is met in the normal state (for example, in variant example 9, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to determine different variation patterns even when the time-saving effect is missed and a rescue time-saving effect occurs). With such a configuration, the display result and the variable display period can be optimized according to the situation.

(Means B6) Any of means B1 to B5 may be provided with a variable display control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) that controls the variable display, and the variable display control means may be configured to determine a fixed display period for the display result, and the fixed display period may be changed depending on the type of display result (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS1127, S1133, S1135, S1137). With such a configuration, the display result and the variable display period can be suitably adjusted depending on the situation.

In this example, the pattern determination period is varied depending on whether a rescue time reduction has occurred and the display result, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the pattern determination period may be constant (e.g., 0.5 seconds) regardless of whether a rescue time reduction has occurred or the display result.

(Means C1) A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information including a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern), and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and has a special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and a numerical information (e.g., a rescue and a setting means (for example, a portion that executes step 120IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can set the numerical information updated by the update means to a specific value (for example, "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 900 times) so that a special condition is established (for example, a rescue time reduction is established). The game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150, the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), and a notification effect execution means (for example, an execution means) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a rescue time reduction entry effect) that notifies that the special state is controlled by the special state control means based on the establishment of a special condition. The present invention further includes a suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS808, S845 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a rescue setting suggestion effect) that suggests the setting value set by the setting means, and the suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestion effect when a notification effect is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 120IWS808, S845, and can execute a rescue setting suggestion effect when a rescue time short entry effect is executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control even in a situation where both a case where the special state is controlled by the establishment of a special condition and a case where the special state is controlled by the derived display of the special display result occur. For example, an appropriate effect can be performed when the special state is controlled by the establishment of a special condition. In addition, since the rate at which the special condition is established changes depending on the setting value, the player's interest can be increased when the special state is controlled by executing a suggestion effect depending on the rate at which the special condition is established.

In this example, the probability of a jackpot varies depending on the setting value, and as a result, the likelihood of a rescue time reduction occurring also varies, with rescue time reduction occurring more easily when the setting value is set low. Therefore, when a rescue time reduction occurs, there is a possibility that the setting value may be set low. Therefore, in this example, a rescue time setting suggestion effect is executed during the rescue time reduction, which gives the player some sense that the setting value is high, making it difficult for the player's interest to decrease. Therefore, in this example, the rescue time setting suggestion effect is configured to be executed when the setting value is set to a relatively high value of "4" to "6," and the execution rate is different from the setting suggestion effect executed at other times, such as the jackpot setting suggestion effect.

(Means C2) In means C1, the setting suggestion effect execution means may be configured to execute a suggestion effect when the variable display where a special condition is met is not controlled to an advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 does not process rescue time reduction in the event of a jackpot fluctuation). With such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be executed without interfering with other effects.

In this example, we show a case where rescue time reduction processing is not performed for large hit fluctuations, while rescue time reduction processing is performed for small hit fluctuations, but this is not limited to such a case, and the configuration may be such that rescue time reduction processing is not performed for small hit fluctuations either.

(Means C3) In means C1 or C2, the setting suggestion effect execution means may be configured to execute the suggestion effect even after a special condition is met (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 120IWS640 when step 120IWS638 is Y). Such a configuration allows for suggestion of setting values over a long period of time, which can increase interest.

(Means C4) In any of means C1 to C3, the setting suggestion effect execution means may be configured to execute a suggestion effect before a special condition is met (for example, in variant 10, the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting suggestion effect in a variable display prior to a variable display in which the rescue time reduction is met, based on the results of a look-ahead determination). Such a configuration allows for suggestions of setting values over a long period of time, thereby increasing interest.

(Means C5) In any of the means C1 to C4, the setting suggestion effect execution means may be configured to execute other suggestion effects (e.g., a setting suggestion effect at the time of a big win) that can be executed at a timing different from the suggestion effect when a special condition is established (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 120IWS887, S889 and step S176), and suggestion effects that suggest favorable setting values are more likely to be executed when a special condition is established than other suggestion effects (e.g., as shown in FIG. 8-30, the setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue is configured to be executable when the setting value is set to "4" to "6", so that the setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue is a setting suggestion effect that suggests a relatively high setting). With such a configuration, the more favorable the setting value, the lower the probability of the special condition being established, so by executing the suggestion effect, the player's interest when the special condition is established can be increased.

In this example, the setting suggestion effect at the time of the jackpot is executed during the fanfare period of the jackpot game, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be executed during the round period or the ending period of the jackpot game.

(Means D1) A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information including a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern), and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and a controller that controls the game machine to perform the variable display. and updating means (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can subtract and update numerical information (for example, a rescue time shortening counter) from a set initial value (for example, "900") based on the fact that the numerical information is updated by subtracting it from the set initial value (for example, "900"), and the special state control means can control to a special state when the numerical information that the update means subtracts and updates becomes a specific value (for example, "0") (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150), and the update means controls the special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. The numerical information is updated by subtracting it when a variable display is executed (for example, the value of the rescue time shortening counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether a variable display of the first special symbol or a variable display of the second special symbol is executed), the numerical information that is updated by subtracting it is set to an initial value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in modified examples 5 and 6, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS85B, S84E), and the special state control means changes the state from the normal state to the special state based on the fact that the numerical information that is updated by subtracting it by the update means has become a specific value. After the control, during the period until the predetermined condition is satisfied and the initial value is set, the update means does not control again from the normal state to the special state based on the fact that the numerical information updated by subtraction has become a specific value (for example, in the modified example 5, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the processing of steps 120IWS84 to S86 when Y is determined in step S120IWS83. In the modified example 6, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the processing of steps 120IWS84D to S86 when Y is determined in step S120IWS84A or when N is determined in step 120IWS84C). With such a configuration, when controlling the transition to the special state according to the number of variable displays, the subtraction update processing can be performed in common before and after the numerical information becomes a specific value, which prevents the program capacity from increasing and enables suitable control. For example, if the transition to the special state is not performed when the numerical information becomes a specific value, it is possible to prevent a reduction in capacity caused by preparing a dedicated program for the period after the specific value is reached.

The specified conditions include the case where the rescue time reduction counter is set when the time reduction state via rescue time reduction ends by executing steps 120IWS85B and S84E, as well as the case where step 120IWS13 is executed to set the rescue time reduction counter when the initialization process is executed when the power is turned on, and the case where step 120IWS135 is executed to set the rescue time reduction counter when a jackpot occurs.

When the rescue time reduction counter is set when a jackpot occurs, it may be set at the start of the jackpot game, during a round of the jackpot game, or at the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, when setting the rescue time reduction counter when the initialization process is executed when the power is turned on, the process may be different depending on whether the setting is changed or not. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set when the setting is changed and the initialization process is executed, but the current value of the rescue time reduction counter may be maintained when the initialization process is executed without changing the setting. Conversely, the rescue time reduction counter may be configured to be maintained when the setting is changed and the initialization process is executed, but the rescue time reduction counter may be set when the initialization process is executed without changing the setting.

(Means D2) In means D1, the update means may be configured to be capable of subtractively updating the numerical information in cases where variable display is executed when the subtractively updated numerical information is greater than a specific value and where variable display is executed when the subtractively updated numerical information is a specific value (for example, in variant example 6, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS84), and when the subtractively updated numerical information is greater than a specific value, the numerical information is updated to the numerical information after subtraction (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS84C to S86 when step 120IWS84A is N), and when the subtractively updated numerical information is less than the specific value, the numerical information is updated to the specific value (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS84B when step 120IWS84A is Y). With this configuration, when controlling the transition to a special state according to the number of times the variable display is made, the subtraction update process can be performed in common before and after the numerical information becomes a specific value, which prevents the program capacity from increasing and enables suitable control. For example, if the transition to a special state is not made when the numerical information becomes a specific value, it is possible to prevent a reduction in capacity due to the need to prepare a dedicated program for the period after the specific value is reached.

(Means D3) Means D1 or D2 may be configured to include an operating means (e.g., a clear switch) for performing an operation, and an initial value setting means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100) for setting the numerical information updated by the update means to an initial value in response to the operation of the operating means. With such a configuration, it is possible to select whether or not to set the numerical information to an initial value by operating the operating means, thereby improving convenience in terms of operation.

In addition, a dedicated operating means (button or switch) other than the clear switch may be provided as an operating means for changing settings or setting the rescue time reduction counter.

(Means D4) In any of the means D1 to D3, the special state control means may be configured to be able to control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving missing pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS160), and to be able to control to a special state when a special display result is displayed even when the numerical information updated by the update means is a specific value, and to be able to control to a special state when a special display result is displayed even after the numerical information updated by the update means has become a specific value (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 can execute step 120IWS88 regardless of whether or not the game is in time-saving state C via rescue time-saving). With such a configuration, it is possible to control to a special state after the numerical information updated by subtraction becomes a specific value again, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Means D5) In any of means D1 to D4, a decision means for deciding whether or not to control to an advantageous state (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS62 in the game control microcomputer 100), a judgment means for judging whether or not to control to an advantageous state before the decision of the decision means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS101 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a pre-reading preview performance execution means capable of executing a pre-reading preview performance based on the judgment result of the judgment means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS102 in the performance control CPU 120). The system may be configured to include a portion for executing step S161, and a pre-reading notice performance limiting means for limiting the execution of the pre-reading notice performance during a predetermined period before the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value and during a specific period after the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, in modified example 7, as shown in FIG. 8-45, the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is limited during a predetermined period from the change display 8 changes before the time-saving state C ends to the time-saving relief state, and during a specific period from the time-saving relief state C ends to the change display 8 changes after the time-saving state C ends). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game because there is a possibility that the numerical information updated by the subtraction will be controlled to a special state after it becomes a specific value again.

In the above characteristic part 120IW and each modified example, the number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is uniformly 900 times, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the rescue time reduction may be configured to occur based on the number of times the variable display is executed depending on the set value. For example, when the set value is "1" to "5", the rescue time reduction occurs based on 900 times of variable display being executed without a big hit, a small hit, or a time reduction miss, while when the set value is "6", the rescue time reduction may be configured to occur based on 600 times of variable display being executed without a big hit, a small hit, or a time reduction miss, and the number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached may be different only for specific set values.

Also, for example, the number of times the time is changed before the rescue time reduction is triggered may be different for each setting value for all of the setting values "1" to "6". In this case, for example, the ratio of the denominator of the jackpot probability to the number of times the time is changed before the rescue time reduction is triggered may be configured to be approximately 3 times the same. Also, for example, the number of times the time is changed before the rescue time reduction is triggered may be different within the range of 2.5P≦n≦3.0P (P=denominator of the jackpot probability, n=number of times the time is changed before the rescue time reduction is triggered).

In addition, even if the time-saving state is reached via rescue time-saving, the time-saving state may not necessarily continue until the next big win occurs. In this case, the time-saving state may be configured to end when a small win occurs as shown in the above characteristic part 120IW, or the time-saving state may be configured to end when the variable display has ended a specified number of times (900 times in this example) as shown in variant 5 and variant 6.

Also, as shown in variants 5 and 6, after the variable display ends a specified number of times (900 times in this example) in the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving, and transitions to the normal state, if the variable display ends a specified number of times (for example, 900 times) without a big win, small win, or time-saving miss, the rescue time-saving state will resume and transition to the time-saving state, or the rescue time-saving state will not resume. In this case, if the rescue time-saving state is not resumed, for example, if the rescue time-saving counter value becomes 0, the rescue time-saving counter may not be decremented from the next processing step, or the rescue time-saving counter may be decremented from the next processing step and reset to 0 if it becomes a negative value.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1A) to (Means 10A) below may be applied to the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1A) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and an update means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS84 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display. ), and the state control means can control to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times and a special condition is established (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; a part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means may be configured to update the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, the player can be rescued in an appropriate manner. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing the player's motivation to play.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special condition may be configured to be established based on a predetermined display result (e.g., a losing pattern) different from the specific display result being derived and displayed a special number of times in succession as the display result of the variable display (e.g., the part that executes steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; the part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, the player is rescued when a display result unfavorable to the player is derived and displayed consecutively, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(Means 3A) In means 1A or means 2A, the update means may be configured to update the numerical information (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) when a variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (for example, a time-saving state, or a guaranteed bonus state). Such a configuration can effectively realize rescue of the player. Specifically, the numerical information is updated fairly, and since the state can be controlled to the special state again even after it has been controlled to the special state, it is possible to control the state to the special state until it is effectively controlled to an advantageous state, which can reduce the player's investment and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Means 4A) In any of means 1A to 3A, the update means may be configured to set the numerical information to an initial value when a predetermined condition is met (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS13, S135, S149, and S161 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent the tendency to gamble more than necessary.

(Means 5A) Means 4A may be configured so that the predetermined condition is to be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, when the advantageous state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent the player from becoming more gambling than necessary.

(Means 6A) In means 4A, the state control means may be configured to be able to control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving miss) different from a specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (e.g., a portion that executes step 120IWS160 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the predetermined condition is that the special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., a portion that executes step 120IWS161 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent excessive gambling.

(Means 7A) In means 4A, the predetermined condition may be configured so that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is essentially possible to control the special state until the next advantageous state, thereby increasing the degree of salvation for the player.

(Means 8A) Means 4A may be provided with a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding the numerical information updated by the update means even when the power supply is stopped, and the update means may be configured to set the numerical information held by the backup storage means to an initial value when a specific condition is met (e.g., execution of an initialization process) (e.g., a portion that executes step 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the predetermined condition is that the specific condition is met (e.g., a portion that executes steps S8 and 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the game center to operate, since if numerical information up to the special number of times is held when initialization is performed in the game center, it may be too disadvantageous for the game center.

(Means 9A) Any of means 1A to 8A includes a presentation control means (e.g., a portion that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120) that corresponds to the variable display, and the state control means can control to a special state for a specific period of more than a special number of times based on the execution of a special number of variable displays (e.g., a portion that executes steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and can control to a special state for a specific period again based on the execution of a special number of variable displays in the special state (e.g., a portion that executes steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations in the first specific period and the second specific period. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, so that a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed by taking measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display to change the presentation mode.

(Means 10A) Any of means 1A to 8A may be provided with a presentation control means corresponding to variable display (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120), and the state control means may be capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period of more than a special number of times based on the execution of a special number of variable displays (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and may be capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period again based on the execution of a special number of variable displays in a special state (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation in the first specific period and the second specific period. With this configuration, when the special state is controlled during the second specific period, the player is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, so by deliberately executing the same presentation, the player is not made more aware than necessary that the player is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1B-1), (Means 1B-2) to (Means 5B) below may be applied to the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1B-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and has a gaming area in which gaming media can be shot into a first path (e.g., a path by hitting left) and a second path (e.g., a path by hitting right), a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and a numerical value based on the execution of the variable display. The present invention is provided with an update means capable of updating information (e.g., a portion executing step S120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a process execution means (e.g., a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) that updates a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including control of variable display and control of advantageous state, and executes a process corresponding to the data value, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., a portion executing step S120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). a portion for executing step S120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; and a portion for executing step S120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100.), the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a portion for executing step S120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), the process execution means executes a first process relating to the variable display when the data value is a first numerical value (for example, a portion for executing steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100), and executes a second process relating to the advantageous state when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value. The game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute a third process for controlling the state to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition when the data value is a third value different from the first and second values (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute a next change postponement process), and may be configured to include a launch promotion notification means that issues a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched to the second path during the execution of the third process, in which the game medium is launched to the first path in the normal state and a game medium is launched to the second path in the special state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by issuing a launch promotion notification to the second path before the special state is controlled, it is possible to execute a performance related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 1B-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display. and a processing execution means (for example, a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) that updates a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processing including control of variable display and control of advantageous state, and executes processing corresponding to the data value. The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special count (for example, a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100). a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S120IWS85 and S86; and a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step S120IWS150; an updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step S120IWS84), a processing execution means executes a first processing relating to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S110 to S113), When the data value is a second value different from the first value, a second process related to the advantageous state is executed (for example, a part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the data value is a third value different from the first value and the second value, the state control means executes a third process for controlling to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute a next change postponement process), and may be configured to include a presentation execution means that executes a notification presentation that notifies the player that the special state will be controlled during the execution of the third process. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by issuing a launch promotion notification to the second path before the special state is controlled, a presentation related to the launch promotion notification can be executed early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 2B) In means 1B-1 and 1B-2, the process execution means may be configured to execute a second process after the first process when a specific display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is met. With such a configuration, priority is given to control of an advantageous state, so that a disadvantageous result is not reached for the player, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3B) In means 1B-1, 1B-2 or 2B, the update means updates the numerical information when variable display is started (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the process execution means may be configured to change the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the update means reaches a specific value, and to change the special information from the second information to the first information when the state control means controls to a special state, and to execute different processes when the special information is the first information and when it is the second information. With such a configuration, the process of transitioning to a special state can be executed preferably by managing the special information.

(Means 4B) Means 3B may include a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) that determines the variable display pattern of the variable display, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine a different variable display pattern when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an appropriate presentation when the special number of variable displays is executed.

(Means 5B) Means 3B may include a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) that determines the variable display pattern of the variable display, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine a variable display pattern in which the confirmation time of the display result differs when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an appropriate presentation when the special number of variable displays is executed.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1C) to (Means 6C) below may be applied to the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1C) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in a gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in a presentation control CPU 120) that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display, and the gaming control means controls a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. The game control system includes a state control means (e.g., a portion executing steps S120IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling numerical information based on execution of a variable display (e.g., a portion executing step S120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a state information control means for controlling state information that can specify the state controlled by the state control means, and the state control means is capable of controlling a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display (e.g., The update means can control the game to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, thereby establishing a special condition (for example, the portion executing steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; the portion executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the portion executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The state information control means may be configured to set the state information to a first numerical value in a normal state, set the state information to a second numerical value when the state is controlled to a special state after the state is controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and set the state information to a third numerical value different from the first and second numerical values when the state is controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition, and the game control means may be configured to transmit specific information to the presentation control means and to transmit specific information corresponding to the case where the state information is the second numerical value or the third numerical value when the state is in a special state. With such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be achieved. For example, control becomes easier because different game states can be suitably identified, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, a suitable presentation can be performed when the presentation control means performs a different presentation.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the state information control means may be configured to set the state information to a fourth numerical value different from the first, second and third numerical values when a special condition is satisfied again after the state information has been controlled to a special state based on the satisfaction of a special condition. Such a configuration allows for suitable control even when new functions are added and the specifications become more complex. For example, control becomes easier as different game states can be suitably identified, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, a suitable presentation can be executed when the presentation control means executes a different presentation.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, the presentation control means may be configured to be able to execute different presentations when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a specific display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. With such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition can be efficiently consumed, making it possible to execute presentations according to the situation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Means 4C) In any of means 1C to 3C, the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation (for example, display a common background image) when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a specific display result, and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. Such a configuration makes it possible to make the presentation in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition the same every time, which prevents an increase in development costs since new presentations are not required, and increases the interest of the game since it does not confuse the player.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to 4C, the state control means can control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving miss) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS160 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means can be configured to execute different presentations when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived and displayed special display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. With such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition can be efficiently consumed, making it possible to execute presentations according to the situation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Means 6C) In any of means 1C to 4C, the state control means may be configured to control to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation (for example, display a common background image) when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of the special display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the presentation in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition the same every time, which prevents an increase in development costs since a new presentation is not required, and increases the interest of the game since it does not confuse the player.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1D) to (Means 4D) below may be applied to the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1D) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120) that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display, and the gaming control means includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and when power supply is stopped, and a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display is executed, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times and a special condition is established (e.g., a portion executing steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; a portion executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (e.g., a portion executing step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). The game control means is capable of transmitting predetermined information to the presentation control means when power supply is started, and the presentation control means may be configured to be capable of executing a suggestive presentation relating to the number of times the variable display is executed during a predetermined period after power supply is started based on receiving the predetermined information. With such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be achieved. For example, this will motivate players to start playing from the opening of the amusement arcade, which can increase the utilization rate of gaming machines.

(Means 2D) In means 1D, the game control means may be configured to be able to transmit specific information capable of identifying the numerical information stored in the backup storage means to the performance control means when power supply is started. Such a configuration makes it possible to provide suitable control even if new functions are added and the specifications become more complex. For example, this can motivate players to play from the opening of the gaming facility, increasing the operating rate of gaming machines while suppressing an increase in the processing load.

(Means 3D) In means 1D or 2D, the game control means can transmit specific information to the performance control means in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the performance control means can execute a special performance related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information, and the specific information may be configured to include first specific information (e.g., a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is equal to or less than a predetermined value, and second specific information (e.g., a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is greater than the predetermined value. Such a configuration can enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, the risk of unknowingly causing losses can be reduced and processing related to the specific information can be suitably realized.

(Means 4D) In any of means 1D to 3D, the presentation control means may be configured to be capable of executing a suggestion presentation that suggests that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met based on the execution of a first predetermined number of variable displays that is less than the special number of times, and to be capable of executing a suggestion presentation each time a second predetermined number of variable displays that is less than the first predetermined number of times is executed before the execution of the special number of variable displays. Such a configuration makes it possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become more complex. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, the risk of unknowingly causing losses can be reduced.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1E-1) and (Means 1E-2) below may be applied to the above characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1E-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120) that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display, and the gaming control means controls a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. a state control means (e.g., a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps S120IWS150, S160, and S537) capable of controlling the game to a state where a predetermined display result is derived and displayed in succession (e.g., a time-shortened state); an update means (e.g., a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps S120IWS84) capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of a variable display; a backup storage means (e.g., a RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display has been executed when power supply is stopped; and a backup storage means including information relating to the number of times a predetermined display result has been derived and displayed in succession when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means can control the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times and a special condition is established (for example, a portion that executes steps 120IWS85 and 120IWS86 in the game control microcomputer 100, a portion that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means executes a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information. The numerical information is updated when the display is executed (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations when the special state is controlled by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized, and when the special state is controlled by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition after the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to know that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of elements such as guessing setting values increases, which can improve the interest of the game.

(Means 1E-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120) that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display, and the gaming control means controls a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. a state control means (e.g., a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps S120IWS150, S160, S537) capable of controlling the game to a state where a predetermined display result is derived and displayed in succession (e.g., a time-shortened state); an update means (e.g., a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps S120IWS84) capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of a variable display; a backup storage means (e.g., a RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display is executed when the power supply is stopped; and a backup storage means (e.g., a RAM 102) which holds numerical information relating to the number of times a predetermined display result has been derived and displayed in succession when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, a portion executing steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100, a portion executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means executes variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. The numerical information is updated when the display is executed (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations after being controlled to the special state when the state control means controls the state to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized, and when the state control means controls the state to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition after the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized. Such a configuration makes it possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to know that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of elements such as guessing set values increases, which can improve the interest of the game.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 090IW)
Next, the characteristic part 090IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characteristic part 090IW, the game state is controlled to either the normal state (non-time-saving state) or the time-saving state. As will be described in detail later, it is possible to control from the normal state to the time-saving state via the small win game state based on the derivation and display of the small win pattern. In addition, the display result of the small win includes the display result of the small win A or the small win B that can be controlled in the time-saving state, and the display result of the small win C that cannot be controlled in the time-saving state. And, the ratio of the display result of the small win A or the small win B being derived and displayed is different between the case where the display result of the small win is derived and displayed by performing the variable display of the first special pattern and the case where the display result of the small win is derived and displayed by performing the variable display of the second special pattern.

(Big hit type determination table, small hit type determination table)
9-1(A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among them, FIG. 9-1(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 9-1(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot to be a "10R time-saving jackpot" based on a random number for determining the type of jackpot when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot symbol.

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot to be a "10R time-saving jackpot" based on the random number for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol.

A "10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 10-round jackpot game state, and transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. Once the game transitions to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-1(A), in this example, if the first special symbol is displayed and a jackpot is reached, it is determined to be a 10R time-saving jackpot with a 100% probability. Also, as shown in FIG. 9-1(B), in this example, if the second special symbol is displayed and a jackpot is reached, it is determined to be a 10R time-saving jackpot with a 100% probability.

The type of jackpot is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, multiple types of time-saving jackpots with different number of time-saving times (e.g., 3 times or 5 times) or multiple types of time-saving jackpots with different number of rounds (e.g., 2 rounds or 4 rounds) may be provided. In addition, this example shows a case where only time-saving jackpots that transition to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends are provided, but it is also possible to configure it so that a non-time-saving jackpot (normal jackpot) that does not transition to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends is provided. In addition, this example shows a case where a 100R time-saving jackpot is determined with a 100% probability when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, but it is also possible to configure it so that multiple types of jackpot types are determined even when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed.

Figure 9-1 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing the small win type determination table stored in ROM 101. As shown in Figure 9-1 (C), the small win type determination table is a table that is referenced when a determination is made to make the variable display result a small win pattern, in order to determine the type of small win as either "small win A", "small win B", or "small win C" based on a random number for determining the type of win.

A "small win A" is a small win that transitions to a time-saving state after the end of a small win game, on the condition that the game ball that entered the special winning port during the small win game (first round) did not win a V (it is detected by the non-V winning port switch and it is detected that it did not pass through the V winning port). Once it transitions to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained until the 10 variable displays are completed. Note that a "small win A" is a small win that controls the game to a big win game state for the second to fourth rounds, on the condition that a V win has occurred, and transitions to the time-saving state after the big win game state ends. However, when a "small win A" occurs, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device is controlled so that a V win does not occur.

A "small hit B" is a small hit that transitions to a time-saving state after the end of a small hit game, on the condition that the game ball that entered the special winning port during the small hit game (first round) did not make a V win (it is detected by the non-V winning port switch and it is detected that it did not pass through the V winning port). Once it transitions to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained until the end of the five variable displays. Note that a "small hit B" is a small hit that, on the condition that a V win has occurred, controls the game to a big hit game state for the second to fourth rounds, and transitions to the time-saving state after the big hit game state ends. However, when a "small hit B" occurs, the opening pattern is first controlled to open the special variable winning ball device so that a V win does not occur.

A "small hit C" is a small hit that does not transition to a time-saving state after the end of a small hit game, even if the game ball that entered the special winning port during the small hit game (first round) does not enter the V (it is detected by the non-V winning port switch and it is detected that it did not pass through the V winning port). Also, a "small hit C" is a small hit that, on the condition that a V win has occurred, controls the game to a big hit game state for the second to fourth rounds, and transitions to a time-saving state after the big hit game state ends. And when a "small hit C" occurs, the opening pattern is controlled to open the special variable winning ball device so that a V win occurs in most cases.

As shown in Figure 9-1 (C), in this example, when the first special pattern is displayed in a variable manner and a small win occurs, 25% of the time it is determined to be a "small win A," 25% of the time it is determined to be a "small win B," and 50% of the time it is determined to be a "small win C."

As shown in Figure 9-1 (D), in this example, when the second special pattern is displayed in a variable manner and a small win occurs, 5% of the time it is determined to be a "small win A," 5% of the time it is determined to be a "small win B," and 90% of the time it is determined to be a "small win C."

The types of small wins are not limited to the ones shown in this example. For example, multiple types of time-saving big wins with different times of time saving (e.g., 3 times or 5 times) may be provided. Also, it may be configured to provide a small win without V winning, in which a V win is practically impossible during small win play and there is no transition to a big win play after a small win play.

In addition, since the probability of a small win is higher when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed than when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the rate of small win A or small win B (i.e., a small win with time reduction) is higher when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, but when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the rate of a small win with time reduction may be 100%.

(Small win game opening pattern)
Next, the opening pattern of the small win game will be explained. Figure 9-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small win game. As shown in Figure 9-2, after the small win game starts at timing S1, when the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in the open state at timing S2.

As shown in Figure 9-2 (A), in the case of small win A or B (with time reduction), when the V winning port opening and closing plate is controlled to the closed state, the special variable winning ball device (special winning port) is opened for 0.05 seconds, then after a closing time of 1 second, the special winning port is opened and closed again for 0.05 seconds, and after a closing time of 12 seconds, the special winning port is opened and closed twice in the same manner.

Also, as shown in Figure 9-2 (B), in the case of small win C (no time reduction), when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is controlled to the open state, the special variable winning ball device (special winning hole) is controlled to the open state, so that the special winning hole is opened for 0.05 seconds, closed for 1 second, and then opened again for 0.05 seconds, repeating this operation, so that the special winning hole is opened 10 times with one small win.

The operation of the V prize opening and closing plate is the same for small win A or small win B (with time reduction) and small win C (without time reduction), and in either case it is open for 8 seconds.

In this example, the opening time of each special winning port in the event of a small win is extremely short at 0.05 seconds, but as already explained, the special variable winning ball device is formed with multiple regulating pieces, and about 2 to 3 game balls snake down the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device, so even if the opening time is short, if the bottom member is controlled to be in the open state, the game balls on the bottom member can fall and enter the special variable winning ball device.

And, in the case of small win C (no time reduction), when the V prize opening plate is open, the special variable prize ball device is in the open state, so it is possible for the game ball to enter the V prize opening. Also, in the case of small win A or B (with time reduction), when the V prize opening plate is closed, the special variable prize ball device is in the open state, so it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the V prize opening.

In the case of a small win C (no time reduction), if the game ball that entered the special winning port does not pass through the V winning port, it is not controlled to the time reduction state, but in the case of a small win A or B (with time reduction), if the game ball that entered the special winning port does not pass through the V winning port, it is controlled to the time reduction state. As a result, in the case of a small win C (no time reduction), it is highly likely that the game ball will pass through the V winning port and be controlled to the big win state, but it will not be controlled to the time reduction state, and in the case of a small win A or B (with time reduction), it is highly unlikely that the game ball will not pass through the V winning port and be controlled to the big win state, but it is highly likely that it will be controlled to the time reduction state.

If the game ball enters the special winning hole and a V win occurs, after the final opening of the special winning hole, a predetermined period of closing time (interval time) and the end time of the small win (ending time) have elapsed, and then the game moves to a big win game state, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state from the second round to the fourth round.

In addition, in both cases of small hit A or B (with time reduction) and small hit C (without time reduction), the ending period starts from timing S3 to S4, but the ending period t3 in the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction) is longer than the ending period t4 in the case of small hit C (without time reduction). For example, the ending period t3 is 10 seconds longer than the ending period t4. This makes it possible to ensure time to display the start screen for the time-saving state (see Figure 9-9 (N)) in the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction).

In addition, in the case of small win A or B (with time reduction), the ending period may be changed depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning hole (i.e., whether or not the game transitions to the time reduction state). Specifically, when the game ball has not entered the V winning hole, the game is controlled to the time reduction state, so in this case the ending period is lengthened.

In this way, in this example, the special variable winning ball device can be controlled to an open state using different patterns (in this example, the number of openings) when the display result for small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result for small win C is derived and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the device to a time-saving state.

Specifically, in this example, a V winning hole opening and closing plate is provided that performs the same operation when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed, when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is in a state that blocks the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole, and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is in a state that does not block the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to the time-saving state.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIG. 9-3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the variation pattern table in the feature part 090IW. Among these, FIG. 9-3 shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 9-4 shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for the second special symbol.

First, the variation pattern of the first special symbol will be explained using Figure 9-3. As shown in Figure 9-3, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the following: variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), variation pattern PA1-2 (non-reach in normal variation → development performance), variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA1-4 (non-reach in shortened variation → development performance), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (normal reach → development performance), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach β). Also, when executing the change display of the first special symbol, if there is a miss during the time-saving state, the change pattern is determined to be one of the following: change pattern PA1-5 (shortened change), change pattern PA1-6 (shortened change with no reach → developing effect), change pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), change pattern PA2-2 (normal reach → developing effect), change pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), or change pattern PA2-4 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in this example, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern is determined to be one of the variable patterns PB1-1 (normal reach), PB1-2 (super reach α), and PB1-3 (super reach β).In addition, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, the variable pattern is determined to be one of the variable patterns PB1-1 (normal reach), PB1-2 (super reach α), and PB1-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in this example, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, if a small hit C (no time reduction) occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern is determined to be one of the following: variable pattern PC1-1 (normal reach), variable pattern PC1-2 (super reach α), or variable pattern PC1-3 (super reach β). Also, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, if a small hit C occurs during the time reduction state, the variable pattern is determined to be one of the following: variable pattern PC1-1 (normal reach), variable pattern PC1-2 (super reach α), or variable pattern PC1-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in this example, when the first special symbol change display is executed, if a small hit A or B (with time reduction) occurs during the normal state, the change pattern is determined to be one of the change patterns PC1-4 (non-reach with normal change → development effect), PC1-5 (non-reach with shortened change → development effect), and PC1-7 (normal reach → development effect). Also, when the first special symbol change display is executed, if a small hit A or B (with time reduction) occurs during the time reduction state, the change pattern is determined to be one of the change patterns PC1-6 (non-reach with shortened change → development effect), and PC1-7 (normal reach → development effect).

Next, the variation pattern of the second special symbol will be explained using FIG. 9-4. As shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be either variation pattern PA3-1 or variation pattern PA3-2 (non-reach in normal variation → development performance). Also, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the time-saving state, the variation pattern is determined to be either variation pattern PA3-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA3-4 (non-reach in shortened variation → development performance), variation pattern PB3-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PB3-2 (normal reach → development performance), variation pattern PB3-3 (super reach α), variation pattern PB3-4 (super reach β).

As shown in FIG. 9-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern is determined to be variable pattern PA3-5 (normal reach). When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, the variable pattern is determined to be either variable pattern PC3-1 (normal reach), variable pattern PC3-2 (super reach α), or variable pattern PC3-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Figure 9-4, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, if small wins A to C occur during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be variation pattern PA3-6 (normal reach). Also, if small win C occurs during the time-saving state, the variation pattern is determined to be either variation pattern PD3-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PD3-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PD3-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in Figure 9-4, in this example, when the change display of the second special symbol is executed, if small win A or B (with time reduction) occurs during the time reduction state, the change pattern is determined to be either change pattern PD3-4 (non-reach with shortened change → development effect) or change pattern PD3-5 (normal reach → development effect).

In this example, in the normal symbol process processing (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether the result of the normal symbol variable display is a hit (normal symbol hit), and controls the execution of the normal symbol variable display based on the result of the determination. In this example, in the normal state, it is determined that there is a 10% probability of a normal symbol hit, and in the time-saving state, it is determined that there is a 90% probability of a normal symbol hit. In addition, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) to an open state based on the determination that there is a normal symbol hit in the normal symbol process processing (step S26).

In this way, in this example, the rate at which the development performance is executed as a specific performance during the variable display differs between when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed. Specifically, in the case of small hit A or small hit B, the paste performance is executed, but in the case of small hit C, the development performance is not executed. This avoids inconsistencies between the look-ahead preview performance and the performance after the big hit game state or the time-saving state, allowing the look-ahead preview performance to be executed optimally.

In addition, when a small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) occurs, a common fluctuation pattern may be set for a small hit C (without time reduction), a miss, or a big hit.

(Processing after closing small hit)
FIG. 9-5 is a flow chart showing the small win closing post-processing (step 090IWS116) in the special pattern process processing in the feature section 090IW. In the small win closing post-processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the small win end display timer is set (step 090IWS451), and if the small win end display timer is set, proceeds to step 090IWS453. If the small win end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small win end display timer to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small win end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small win end display time) (step 090IWS452), and ends the process.

In step 090IWS453, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small win end display timer. The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the small win end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the small win end display time has elapsed (step 090IWS454). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the small win end display time has elapsed, the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning flag is set (step 090IWS455). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flag and the time-saving count counter (step 090IWS456). The CPU 103 also resets the V winning flag (step 090IWS457). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a big win start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS458). The CPU 103 also sets the time timer before the big win opening (step 090IWS459).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-hit processing (step 090IWS117) (step 090IWS460).

When it is confirmed in the processing of step 090IWS456 that the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not it is a small win A (step 090IWS461). If it is a small win A, it checks whether or not the non-V winning flag is set (step 090IWS461a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465. If the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag (step 090IWS462). The time-saving counter is set to "10" (step 090IWS463). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a small win end designation A command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS464). Then, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465.

If the CPU 103 confirms that the winning is not a small win A (step 090IWS461: N), it checks whether the winning is a small win B (step 090IWS467). If the winning is a small win B, it checks whether the non-V winning flag is set (step 090IWS467a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, it proceeds to step 090IWS465. If the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag (step 090IWS468). It sets the time-saving counter to "5" (step 090IWS469). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a small win end designation B command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS470). It then proceeds to step 090IWS465.

If the CPU 103 determines that the winning combination is not a small win B (step 090IWS467: N), it sends a small win end command C to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS471). Then, it proceeds to step 090IWS465.

In step 090IWS465, the CPU 103 resets the small win flag (step 090IWS465). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a small win end command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS462). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (step 090IWS110) (step 090IWS463).

The timer that measures the ending period after the small hit closes has a value set depending on whether it is a small hit A or B (with time reduction) or a small hit C (without time reduction), but the value is set so that the ending period in the case of a small hit A or B (with time reduction) is longer than the ending period in the case of a small hit C (without time reduction).

(Waiting for special drawing)
9-6 and 9-7 are flow charts showing the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7 in the characteristic part 090IW. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the big win stop flag is set (step 090IWS871). The big win stop flag is a flag indicating that the big win symbol has already been derived and displayed but the big win start designation command has not yet been received, and is set in step 090IWS875 described later. If the big win stop flag is set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS876.

If the big win stop flag is not set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small win stop flag is set (step 090IWS872). The small win stop flag is a flag that indicates that the small win pattern has already been derived and displayed but that the small win start command has not yet been received, and is set in step 090IWS883, which will be described later. If the small win stop flag is set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS885.

If the small win stop flag is also not set, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop pattern (miss pattern, big win pattern, small win pattern) (step 090IWS873).

If the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in step 090IWS873 (Y in step 090IWS874), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS875). Next, the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether a jackpot start command has been received (step 090IWS876). Whether a jackpot start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether a jackpot start command reception flag (see step 090IWS622) has been set. If a jackpot start command has not been received, the process ends.

If a jackpot start command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS877). Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the performance during the jackpot (step 090IWS878). Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 090IWS879), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 090IWS880).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the jackpot (step 090IWS881).

If the big win symbol is not displayed in the process of step 090IWS873 (N in step 090IWS874), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small win symbol is displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (step 090IWS882). If the small win symbol is displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (Y in step 090IWS882), the performance control CPU 120 sets the small win stop flag (step 090IWS883). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small win start command has been received (step 090IWS885). Whether the small win start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether a flag indicating that the small win start command has been received is set in the command analysis process. If the small win start command has not been received, the process ends as is.

If a small hit start command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the small hit stop flag (step 090IWS886). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it is a small hit A or a small hit B (with time reduction) (step 090IWS887a). If it is a small hit A or a small hit B, a process table for a small hit notification performance that notifies the player that it is a small hit and a right hit instruction A that instructs a right hit is selected (step 090IWS887b). Also, if it is not a small hit A or a small hit B, that is, if it is a small hit C (without time reduction), a process data for a V winning promotion performance that encourages the game ball to enter the V winning hole and a right hit instruction B that instructs a right hit is selected (step 090IWS887b). Note that the right hit instruction A and the right hit instruction B have different aspects. Also, the right hit instruction is also different from the right hit instruction C in the time reduction state. For example, the differences in appearance include the size, position, and content of the image for the right-hit instruction.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 090IWS888), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 090IWS889). The performance control CPU 120 also sets a small win performance period measurement timer to measure the performance period during small win play (step 090IWS890).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the small win (step 090IWS891).

In this example, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in an open state during small win play, so in the small win performance processing, a performance corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning ball device is executed as a small win performance.

If it is determined that there will be neither a big win nor a small win (N in step 090IWS882), i.e., if it is determined that there will be a miss, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 090IWS895).

(Example of performance)
Next, specific examples of the presentation when small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) occurs, and when small hit C (without time reduction) will be explained.

Figures 9-8 to 9-10 show the screen transitions when small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) occurs in normal conditions (low probability/low base state).

As shown in FIG. 9-8(A), when controlled in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the image display device 5 displays small symbols 090IW100 on the left, center, and right, which correspond to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the upper left. In this example, since in the normal state, a start winning occurs almost always in the first start winning hole, an example is shown in which a game ball wins in the first start winning hole and the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100 begins. Then, linked to the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100, decorative symbols 090IW101 on the left, center, and right, which are larger than the small symbol 090IW100, begin to vary in the center of the screen.

As shown in Figure 9-8 (B) and (C), let's say that the left and right decorative symbols 090IW101 stop and the big win symbol creates a normal reach. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 remains in a fluctuating display.

As shown in Figure 9-8 (D), let us assume that the middle decorative pattern 090IW101 stops and the missing pattern stops. At this time, the decorative pattern 090IW101 is not completely stopped, but is in a temporary stopped state that involves shaking. Note that the small pattern 090IW100 continues to be displayed in a fluctuating manner.

As shown in Figure 9-8 (E), the temporarily stopped decorative symbol 090IW101 is temporarily erased and the development performance is executed. In this example, the word "Time reduction?" 090IW102, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state, is displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small symbol 090IW100. Note that the small symbol 090IW100 remains displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in Figure 9-8 (F), after the development effect shown in Figure 9-8 (E) is executed, the decorative symbol 090IW101 that was temporarily stopped is displayed again. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 remains displayed.

As shown in Figure 9-8 (G) (H), let us assume that the left and right decorative symbols 090IW101 have stopped and a small win A or small win B is in reach. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 remains in a fluctuating display.

As shown in Figure 9-9 (I), the remaining decorative pattern 090IW101 stops, and the small win pattern "135" for small win A or small win B stops. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 also stops at "135".

As shown in Figure 9-9 (J), when the small win pattern "135" stops on the small pattern 090IW100 and the decorative pattern 090IW101, during the pre-opening time before the special variable winning ball device is opened, the words "Small win!" 090IW103, indicating that a small win is about to begin, are displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small pattern 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (K), when a small win game starts, a background A during a small win is displayed, and the characters "small win in progress" 090IW105 are displayed to inform the player that a small win game is in progress. In addition, in the case of a small win A or a small win B, it is difficult to make the game ball enter the V winning hole, making it difficult to generate a big win. For this reason, it is more disappointing for the player than a small win C, which is easier to generate a big win, but in the case of a small win A or a small win B, the V is not entered, and the game is controlled to a time-saving state. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the special variable winning ball device, a right hit instruction display (right hit instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed, and the right hit instruction display (right hit instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed in a small and inconspicuous manner at the bottom right of the screen so as not to unnecessarily stir up the player's disappointment. The right hit instruction display 090IW106 is composed of the characters "right hit" and one arrow pointing to the right. In addition, to make the right-hit instruction display 090IW106 less noticeable, the background A during a small win is a flashy background that attracts the player's interest, such as by featuring a character.

As shown in Figure 9-9 (L), when the small win game state ends without a win in the V winning slot, an ending screen is displayed during the ending period of the small win. For example, a background or character corresponding to the ending screen is displayed.

As shown in Figure 9-9 (M), after the end screen of the small win game is displayed, the start screen of the time-saving mode is displayed. For example, an image indicating that the time-saving mode is starting and the number of times the time-saving mode will change are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 9-9(N), when the display of the start screen of the time-saving state ends, the small pattern 090IW100 and the decorative patterns 090IW101 on the left, center, and right start to change, and the control of the time-saving state starts. When the control of the time-saving state starts, the background during the time-saving state is displayed, and the number of remaining changes in the time-saving state 090IW107 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. Furthermore, during the time-saving state, a right-hit instruction display (right-hit instruction C) 090IW108 is displayed at the top of the screen to allow the game ball to enter the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B. The right-hit instruction display 090IW108 during the time-saving state is composed of the characters "right hit" and two arrows pointing to the right. The right-hit instruction display 090IW108 is displayed larger than the right-hit instruction display 090IW106, and the display position is also different.

As shown in Figure 9-9 (O), Figure 9-10 (P) (Q), assume that the decorative pattern 090IW101 stops, the small pattern 090IW100 stops, and the loss pattern stops.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (R), the next change is then started, and when the display of the decorative pattern 090IW101 and the small pattern 090IW100 changes starts, the remaining number of changes 090IW107 is subtracted. After that, the same control is performed until the time-saving state ends.

Figures 9-11 and 9-12 show the screen transitions when a small hit C (no time reduction) occurs in normal conditions (low probability/low base state).

As shown in FIG. 9-11(A), when controlled in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the image display device 5 displays small symbols 090IW100 on the left, center, and right, which correspond to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the upper left. In this example, since in the normal state, a start winning occurs almost always in the first start winning slot, an example is shown in which a game ball wins in the first start winning slot and the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100 begins. Then, linked to the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100, decorative symbols 090IW101 on the left, center, and right, which are larger than the small symbol 090IW100, begin to vary in the center of the screen.

As shown in Figures 9-11 (B), (C), and (D), let us say that the decorative patterns 090IW101 on the left, center, and right stop, and the small win pattern "357" for small win C stops. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 also stops at the same time as "357".

As shown in Figure 9-11 (E), when the small win pattern "357" stops on the small pattern 090IW100 and the decorative pattern 090IW101, during the pre-opening time before the special variable winning ball device is opened, the words "Small win!" 090IW103, indicating that a small win is about to begin, are displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small pattern 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 9-11(F), when a small win game is started, the background B during the small win is displayed, and the characters "Aim for V!" 090IW109 are displayed to inform the player that the game ball will be launched aiming at the V winning hole of the special variable winning ball device. In addition, in the case of a small win C, the game ball is more likely to enter the V winning hole, making it easier to generate a big win. This makes the player happy because they can get a large number of balls. Therefore, in order to cause the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device and generate a big win, a right hit instruction display (right hit instruction B) 090IW110 is displayed, and the right hit instruction display 090IW110 is displayed in a large and noticeable manner in the center of the screen. The right hit instruction display 090IW110 is composed of the characters "right hit" and three arrows pointing to the right. In order to make the right hit instruction display 090IW107 stand out, the background B during the small win is a simple screen without any characters, making it a plain background that does not attract the player's interest. The right hit instruction display 090IW110 is displayed larger than the right hit instruction display 090IW106 during a small win A or B and the right hit instruction display 090IW108 during the time-saving mode, and the display position is also different.

In this way, the right hit instruction display 090IW106 for small hit A or small hit B, the right hit instruction display 090IW110 for small hit C, and the right hit instruction display 090IW108 during time-saving are all different in size, display position, and display format (number of arrows).

As shown in Figure 9-11 (G), when a prize is won in the V prize slot and the small win game state ends, the letter "V" 090IW104 is displayed in the center of the screen during the ending period of the small win, indicating that a prize will be won in the V prize slot and a big win will occur.

As shown in FIG. 9-12(H), the word "ROUND2" 090IW111, indicating that the big win game (second round) is about to begin, is then displayed in the center of the screen, larger than the small symbol 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (I), when a jackpot game (second round) starts, a jackpot background is displayed and the game is played in the jackpot game state. The same applies to the third and fourth rounds. Note that in this example, an example of a small jackpot C occurring during normal play is described, but if a small jackpot C occurs during the time-saving state, the same presentation as above is performed during small jackpot play, and a larger right-hit instruction display is displayed than for small jackpot A or small jackpot B. Also, different presentations may be performed for a small jackpot C occurring during normal play and for a small jackpot C occurring during the time-saving state, and the size of the right-hit instruction display may be different.

In this way, in this example, when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, the presentation executed when the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state is different from when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed. Specifically, when small win A or small win B is generated, the characters "small win in progress" 090IW105 are displayed during small win play to notify that a small win is in progress (Figure 9-9 (K)), while the characters "Aim for V!" 090IW109 are displayed to notify that the game ball will be launched aiming at the V winning hole of the special variable winning ball device (Figure 9-11 (F)). Therefore, the presentation can be executed appropriately when the display result of a small win is derived and displayed.

In this example, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided so that game balls passing through a right-hit path, which allows game balls to flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area, can enter. A launch promotion display is displayed to promote the launch of game balls into the right-hit path, and the launch promotion display is displayed in a different manner when a display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and when a display result of small hit C is derived and displayed. Specifically, since a small hit C is easier to generate a big hit than a small hit A or B, a right hit instruction display 090IW106 (see FIG. 9-9 (K)) is displayed when a small hit A or B is reached, and a right hit instruction display 090IW110 (see FIG. 9-11 (F)) is displayed when a small hit C is reached. This allows the game to proceed smoothly.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-8(E), it is possible to execute a presentation suggesting that the reel will be controlled to a time-saving state as a preview presentation of a small win. That is, an advanced presentation is executed, and the word "Time-saving?" 090IW102 is displayed, suggesting that the reel will be controlled to a time-saving state. This increases the variety of pre-reading preview presentations, thereby improving the excitement of the game.

(Modification)
Next, a modified example of the performance executed in this feature unit 090IW will be described. In the modified example, in FIG. 9-2, when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device is made different from that when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, the ease of winning the game ball into the V winning port is made different, and whether or not to control to the time-saving state is controlled. In the modified example, when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, the special variable winning ball device is opened by the same pattern, but by making the time before opening the special variable winning ball device different, the ease of winning the game ball into the V winning port is made different, and whether or not to control to the time-saving state is controlled. Note that the description of the parts common to FIG. 9-2 is omitted.

Figure 9-13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of small win games. Note that the operation of the V prize opening and closing plate is the same for small win A or small win B (with time reduction) and small win C (without time reduction).

As shown in Figure 9-13 (A), in the case of small win A or B (with time reduction), after the small win game starts at timing S1, when the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state at timing S2. By setting the pre-opening period t1 in this way, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is controlled to the closed state. Then, by repeating the operation of opening the special winning hole for 0.05 seconds, closing it for 1 second, and then opening it again for 0.05 seconds, the special winning hole is opened 10 times with one small win.

As shown in Figure 9-12 (B), in the case of small win C (no time reduction), after the small win game starts at timing S1, when the pre-opening period t2 (fanfare time) shorter than the pre-opening period t1 has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state at timing S2. By setting the pre-opening period t2 in this way, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is controlled to the open state. Then, by repeating the operation of opening the special winning hole for 0.05 seconds, closing it for 1 second, and then opening it again for 0.05 seconds in the same pattern as Figure 9-13 (A), the special winning hole is opened 10 times with one small win.

As described above, in this example, the special variable winning ball device can be controlled to an open state using the same pattern when the display result for small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result for small win C is derived and displayed. This allows for optimal control over whether or not to control to the time-saving state, and prevents the user from knowing in advance which small win result will be derived and displayed.

In addition, in this example, a V-winning opening and closing plate is provided that performs the same operation when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed, and the period until the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state differs when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to the time-saving state.

(Other variations)
In addition, in this characteristic part 090IW, it is possible to provide multiple types of small wins that do not allow the game ball to enter the V winning port. As multiple types of small wins, a small win that transitions to a time-saving state when the game ball enters the special winning port but does not enter the V winning port, and a small win that does not transition to a time-saving state when the game ball enters the special winning port but does not enter the V winning port are provided. It is possible to configure the small win that transitions to a time-saving state when the game ball enters the special winning port but does not enter the V winning port, and the small win that does not transition to a time-saving state when the game ball enters the special winning port but does not enter the V winning port, to execute different effects. The effects may be different during either the fluctuation or the small win game state, or both.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned features and variations, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through the big win state or small win state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without operating the special variable winning ball device 7.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbol or part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving patterns, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving patterns, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing pattern, a lottery random number for a big win pattern, a lottery random number for a small win pattern, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

In addition, these time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols that are displayed as losing symbols.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern can be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

In addition, when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is held, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. In addition, a lottery using a structure may be held, for example, a time-saving area may be set inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time-saving pattern may be won when the game ball passes through the time-saving area.

In addition, when drawing a lottery for the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random number values as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since the settings can affect performance other than the probability of winning.

The timing of the lottery results for the time-saving symbol may be determined after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but only in the low probability/low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already in, the number of time-saving times may be reset or the lottery may not be performed, as long as this is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be set to a number of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving patterns can be changed between Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving periods awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times the time-saving function is played may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving function until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of times the time-saving function is played may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

The number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving state may be different between the time-saving state controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a specified number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times the time-saving limiter is activated will be updated.

The time it takes for the time-saving symbol to be confirmed may also be different from the time it takes for the other symbols to be confirmed.

In this example, it is possible to configure the device so that the game is controlled to the time-saving state (so-called ceiling) when the number of times the pattern changes in the normal state reaches a predetermined number. Specifically, a counter is provided to count the number of times the game changes before the game is controlled to the time-saving state, and the counter starts counting when the RAM is initialized (when the clear switch is operated, when the settings are changed, etc.) or when a jackpot is completed. The game is controlled to the time-saving state when the counted number of times the game changes reaches a predetermined number. The counting method may be to determine whether the number of times the game changes has reached a predetermined number by subtracting the value set in the counter each time the game changes and determining whether the count value has become 0, or to determine whether the number of times the game changes has reached a predetermined number by adding to the counter value each time the game changes. The predetermined number of times until the game is controlled to the time-saving state may be determined by lottery. This makes it impossible to know when the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, which increases the interest of the game.

The predetermined number of times n, which is the number of times the pattern changes before the time-saving state is controlled, can be set to 2.5P≦n≦3.0P, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/319, P=319). The predetermined number of times N, which is the number of times the pattern changes before the time-saving state is controlled, can be set to 0.4P≦N≦3.8P, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/319, P=319). Note that these are just examples, and P is not limited to these ranges.

In addition, the setting of the predetermined number of times P when initializing the RAM (when operating the clear switch, changing the settings, etc.) or when a jackpot occurs may be the same as the number of times before initialization. In this case, it is expected that the number of times of fluctuation will reach the predetermined number of times P soon after starting the game and will be controlled to the time-saving state, so that the operating rate of the pachinko game machine can be increased.
On the other hand, the setting of the predetermined number of times P when initializing the RAM (when operating the clear switch, changing the settings, etc.) or when a big win occurs may be set so as not to carry over the number of times before the initialization. In this case, all players can play under fair conditions.

In addition, when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number and is controlled to a time-saving state, the time-saving state may be ended when the number of fluctuations reaches an upper limit, or the time-saving state may be continued until the next jackpot.

When the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, counting of the number of fluctuations may be started again. In such a configuration, for example, if an upper limit number of times for the time-saving state is set and the upper limit number is set to a number greater than the predetermined number of times until the time-saving state is entered, the count value will reach the predetermined number during the time-saving state and the upper limit number will be set again, so that the time-saving state can be continued until the next jackpot while the upper limit number is set.

It is also possible to not count the number of changes during the time-saving state. In this case, if a maximum number of times the time-saving state can be entered is set, the time-saving state will end when the number of changes reaches the maximum number.

Also, when the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches a first number, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to control to the time-saving state, and if the lottery is not won, the time-saving state may be controlled when the number of fluctuations reaches a second number (the so-called pattern of reaching the ceiling via a false ceiling).

In addition, if a ceiling is set in the feature part IW090 and it is configured to control to the time-saving state when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, the counter value continues counting without being reset regardless of whether it is a small hit A or a small hit B (with time-saving). In the case of a small hit C (without time-saving), if no big hit occurs, the counter value continues counting without being reset. As a result, if it is a small hit A or a small hit B (with time-saving), the count value may reach the predetermined number during the time-saving state after the small hit play ends, and the time-saving state may be extended. Therefore, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for the development after the small hit play ends. Also, even if it becomes a small hit C (without time-saving) and no big hit occurs, there is a possibility that it will be controlled to the time-saving state immediately after the small hit play ends, so it is possible to create a sense of expectation for the development after the small hit play ends.

As explained above, this feature section 090IW discloses the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1) to (Means 8) below.

(Means 1)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed,
A state control means capable of controlling the display to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
A variable means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device) that has a special area (e.g., a V winning hole) and can be controlled to a first state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance (for example, a portion that executes step S76 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 7 ),
When a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed, the variable means can be controlled to the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, a part that executes step S118 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The special display result includes a first special display result (e.g., a display result of a small win A or a small win B) and a second special display result different from the first special display result (e.g., a display result of a small win C),
The state control means includes:
In the normal state, when the first special display result (for example, a display result of small win A or small win B) is derived and displayed, if the game medium does not pass through the special area, control is performed to the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of step 090IWS462 when Y is determined in step 090IWS461a, and step 090IWS468 when Y is determined in step 090IWS467a),
In the normal state, if the game medium does not pass through the special area when the second special display result (for example, a display result resulting in a small win C) is derived and displayed, the game is not controlled to the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, when step 090IWS467 in the game control microcomputer 100 is N, the process of step 090IWS461a and step 090IWS462, or step 090IWS467a and step 090IWS468 is not executed).
The ease of passing through the special area of the gaming medium is different when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the part shown in FIG. 9-2 ).
The performance execution means is capable of executing different performances when the variable means enters the first state in the cases where the first special display result is derived and displayed and in the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 9-7, the part that executes steps 090IWS887b, 887c in the performance control CPU 120, the part shown in Figure 9-9 (K) and Figure 9-11 (F)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute a presentation when the special display result is derived and displayed.

In this example, the game is switched to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that the special winning port wins but the V win does not occur, but this is not limited to the above. For example, if a small win occurs, the game may be switched to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that the game ball does not win the special winning port.

(Means 2) In Means 1,
The rate at which a specific effect is executed in the effect during variable display differs between when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 9-3 and 9-4, an advanced effect is executed when there is a small hit A or a small hit B, but is not executed when there is a small hit C).
With such a configuration, inconsistencies between the look-ahead preview performance and the performance after an advantageous state or a special state can be avoided, so that the look-ahead preview performance can be executed preferably.

(Means 3) In means 1 or means 2,
The variable winning device is provided so that a game medium passing through a predetermined path (for example, a right-hitting path) can enter the variable winning device,
A launch promotion display means for displaying a launch promotion (e.g., a right-hit instruction display) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the predetermined path (for example, a part for executing steps 090IWS887b and 887c in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 9-7),
The launch promotion display means performs the launch promotion display in different manners when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 9-7, the part that executes steps 090IWS887b, 887c in the performance control CPU 120, the part shown in Figure 9-9 (K) and Figure 9-11 (F)).
Such a configuration allows the game to progress smoothly.

In this example, when small win A or small win B occurs, which transitions to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that the V has not been won, the special variable winning ball device is set to an open state so that the V is not won, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a small win may be provided that transitions to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that the V has not been won, and that opens the special variable winning ball device to make it easier to win a V.

(Means 4) In any one of means 1 to 3,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state using different patterns when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the part shown in Figure 9-2).
With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Means 5) In any one of means 1 to 4,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state in the same pattern when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably control whether or not to control to a special state, and it is also possible to prevent the special display result that will be derived and displayed from being guessed in advance.

(Means 6) In any one of means 1 to means 5,
the variable winning means includes a movable member (e.g., a V winning opening opening plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed;
When the first special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state that obstructs the passage of the game medium to the special area,
When the second special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state that does not obstruct the passage of the gaming medium into the special area (for example, the part shown in Figure 9-2).
With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Means 7) In any one of means 1 to 6,
the variable winning means includes a movable member (e.g., a V winning opening opening plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed;
The period until the variable winning means is controlled to the first state differs between when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the part shown in Figure 9-13).
With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Means 8) In any one of means 1 to means 7,
a plurality of types of special display results in which the game medium does not pass through the special area;
the plurality of types of special display results include a special display result that is controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area, and a special display result that is not controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area,
Different presentations are executed when the special display result controlled to the special state is derived and displayed when the game medium does not pass through the special area and when the special display result not controlled to the special state is derived and displayed when the game medium does not pass through the special area.
With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Explanation of Characteristic Part 113IW)
Next, the characteristic part 113IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characteristic part 113IW, the game state is controlled to be either a normal state, a time-saving state, or a probability-changing state (also controlled in the time-saving state). In this example, in the time-saving state, the average special-diagram fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the average normal-diagram fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of a "normal-diagram hit" in the normal-diagram game is higher compared to the normal state. For example, while the normal-diagram hit probability is 10% in the normal state, the normal-diagram hit probability is increased to 90% in the time-saving state, making it easier for the game ball to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port). It is not limited to such a mode, and for example, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be lengthened compared to the normal state, so that the game ball is easier to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port).

In addition, in this example, the probability of a jackpot (jackpot probability) is increased in the special state compared to the normal state and the time-saving state. In this example, when the special state is entered, the time-saving state is also entered.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result is a jackpot and the game is controlled to a guaranteed bonus state or a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, even if the variable display result is a miss, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state based on the derived display of a time-saving miss pattern.

Furthermore, in this example, the machine may be controlled to a time-saving state (rescue time-saving) after the power is turned on (when the RAM clear process is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, if the next jackpot does not occur even after a predetermined number of variable displays (800 times in this example) have ended. This time-saving time-saving state is provided to rescue players who have played for a long period of time but have not yet won a jackpot (for example, to reduce the amount of money invested in the game), and is a game state called "play time".

In the following, the time-saving state controlled based on the occurrence of a jackpot will be referred to as "time-saving state A" or "time-saving state via jackpot", the time-saving state controlled based on the stopping of the time-saving failure symbol will be referred to as "time-saving state B" or "time-saving state via time-saving failure", and in this example, the time-saving state controlled when the next jackpot does not occur even after the variable display has ended a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) after the power to the gaming machine is turned on (when the RAM clear process is executed) or after the occurrence of a jackpot, "time-saving state C" or "time-saving state via rescue time-saving".

In the time-saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the time for which the normal symbol changes, (3) control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and (4) control to shorten the time for which the special symbol changes can be performed. All of the controls (1) to (4) may be performed, or some of the controls (1) to (4) may not be performed. For example, the controls (1) to (4) performed may be different or the same in the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a missed time-saving state, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state.

For example, the probability of a normal hit in the non-time-saving state (normal state) may be set to 100% (no misses on normal), or the probability of a normal miss may be made extremely low so that the probability of a normal hit is effectively 100%, and in the time-saving state, control (1) may not be performed (i.e., the probability of a normal hit may not be changed from the non-time-saving state) and some or all of the controls (2) to (4) may be performed.

The number of fluctuations n before control is exercised in rescue time reduction and the number of time reductions N in rescue time reduction are preferably specified as follows:

2.5P≦n≦3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time-saving times N is 120 to 1140. In this example, since the jackpot probability differs for each set value s, the number of fluctuations ns for each set value (set value s: 1 to 6) is as follows. Since the jackpot probability for the set value "1" is about 1/319, the number of fluctuations n1 is 797.5 to 957. Since the jackpot probability for the set value "2" is about 1/310, the number of fluctuations n2 is 775 to 930. Since the jackpot probability for the set value "3" is about 1/300, the number of fluctuations n3 is 750 to 900. Since the jackpot probability for the set value "4" is about 1/290, the number of fluctuations n4 is 725 to 870. When the setting value is "5", the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/280, so the number of fluctuations n5 is 700 to 840. When the setting value is "6", the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/270, so the number of fluctuations n6 is 675 to 810. The following explanation will be given assuming that the number of fluctuations n is set to "800", which can be applicable to any of the setting values. Similarly, the number of time-saving times N is set to "800", which can be applicable to any of the setting values.

Note that although we have set a value for the number of fluctuations n that can be applied regardless of which setting value is set, it is sufficient to set a value that can be applied when the setting value "1" with the lowest probability of winning is set (as described above, the number of fluctuations n1 is 797.5 to 957). In other words, a value such as "900" may be set as the number of fluctuations n.

Similarly, the number of time-saving times N is set to a value that can be applied regardless of which setting value is set, but it is sufficient to set a value that can be applied when the setting value "1", which has the lowest probability of winning, is set.

In this example, the number of fluctuations n and the number of time-saving times N are the same value of 800, but the number of fluctuations n may be greater than the number of time-saving times N, or conversely, the number of fluctuations n may be less than the number of time-saving times N.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
10-1 and 10-2 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 113IW. Among them, FIG. 10-1(A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table A for the big win excluding the rescue time-saving entry fluctuation. Also, FIG. 10-1(B) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table B for the miss in the normal state. Also, FIG. 10-1(C) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table C for the miss in the time-saving state controlled via the big win. Also, FIG. 10-1(D) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table D for the miss in the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss.

Also, FIG. 10-1 (E) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table E for a miss during a time-saving state controlled via a rescue time-saving. Also, FIG. 10-2 (F) and (G) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables F and G for a miss within 10 fluctuations immediately before a rescue time-saving. Of these, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 10-2 (F) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before a rescue time-saving that is selected when the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 3 or less. Also, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 10-2 (G) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before a rescue time-saving that is selected when the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 4 or more.

If a miss occurs within the 10 fluctuations immediately prior to the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables F and G shown in Figures 10-2 (F) and (G). However, during the period from when the RAM is cleared to when a jackpot occurs, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table B shown in Figure 10-1 (B) even if the miss occurs within the 10 fluctuations immediately prior to the rescue time reduction.

Figure 10-2 (H) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table H for when a player misses during a high probability state. However, in this example, even if the player is in a high probability state or a time-saving state, if the number of reserved memories is not 1 or more (if there are no reserved memories), the fluctuation pattern is determined using fluctuation pattern table B.

Furthermore, Figures 10-2 (I) and (J) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables I and J for misses during rescue time-saving entry fluctuations. Of these, fluctuation pattern table I shown in Figure 10-2 (I) is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected when in a non-time-saving state (normal state). Furthermore, fluctuation pattern table J shown in Figure 10-2 (J) is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected when in a time-saving state.

In the event of a miss in the rescue time reduction entry fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables I and J shown in Figures 10-2 (I) and (J). However, during the period from when the RAM is cleared to when a jackpot is hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table B shown in Figure 10-1 (B) even if the rescue time reduction entry fluctuation results in a miss.

Furthermore, Figures 10-2 (K) and (L) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables K and L for jackpots during rescue time-saving entry fluctuations. Of these, the fluctuation pattern table K shown in Figure 10-2 (K) is the fluctuation pattern table selected when in a non-time-saving state (normal state). Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern table L shown in Figure 10-2 (L) is the fluctuation pattern table selected when in a time-saving state.

When a jackpot occurs during a rescue time reduction entry fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables K and L shown in Figures 10-2 (K) and (L). However, during the period from when the RAM is cleared to when a jackpot occurs, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table A shown in Figure 10-1 (A) even if a jackpot occurs during a rescue time reduction entry fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 10-1(A), in this example, when a jackpot is hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PB2-1 (normal reach), PB2-2 (super reach α), and PB2-3 (super reach β). The fluctuation pattern for a jackpot has a special chart fluctuation time that is 10,000 ms longer than the fluctuation pattern for a miss that performs the same reach effect. This is because after a reach effect of the same length as the miss fluctuation is performed, a congratulatory effect is performed to celebrate the jackpot, or a re-draw effect is performed to make it look like a new draw is being performed (for example, a re-draw effect is performed in which the jackpot symbol showing a 10R jackpot A is temporarily stopped and changed to a jackpot symbol showing a 10R jackpot B).

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), in this example, if a miss occurs during normal conditions, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-1(C), in this example, if a miss occurs during the time-saving state controlled via a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (D), in this example, when a time-saving state controlled via a time-saving miss occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (E), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Fig. 10-1(C), Fig. 10-1(D), and Fig. 10-1(E), in this example, during the time-saving state, the probability that the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), and the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-super-shortened fluctuation) are determined is high, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than during the normal state. Furthermore, even during the same time-saving state, during the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is 80%, which is higher than during the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, and the average fluctuation time is shorter. Furthermore, during the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving state, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-super-shortened fluctuation) is 99%, which is higher than during the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss or the jackpot, and the average fluctuation time is even shorter.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-2(F), in this example, if the number of reserved memories (for example, the combined number of reserved memories) is 3 or less, if the number of reserved memories is within 10 fluctuations before the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), PA2-1 (normal reach), PA2-2 (super reach α), and PA2-3 (super reach β), and the probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) being determined is high at 90%. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-2(G), in this example, if the number of reserved memories (for example, the combined number of reserved memories) is 4 or more, if the number of reserved memories is within 10 fluctuations before the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), PA2-1 (normal reach), PA2-2 (super reach α), and PA2-3 (super reach β), and the probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) being determined is high at 90%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (H), in this example, if a miss occurs during a special probability state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-1 (C) and (E), when determining the variation pattern of the miss variation, the selection rate of the variation pattern having a shorter variation time is higher for the time-saving state that has gone through the rescue time-saving state than for the time-saving state that has gone through the jackpot game state. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in interest when the rescue time-saving state is reached after playing for a long period of time.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-1 (C) and (E), when determining the variation pattern of the miss variation, the selection rate of the variation pattern with reach effects is lower in the time-saving state that has passed through the rescue time-saving state than in the time-saving state that has passed through the jackpot game state. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in interest when the rescue time-saving state is reached after playing for a long period of time.

As shown in Figure 10-2 (H), in this example, during the special probability state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is determined with a high probability of 90%, and the average fluctuation time is even shorter than during the time-shortened state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (I), in this example, if the rescue time-saving entry fluctuation results in a miss in a non-time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (miss to enter time-saving). If fluctuation pattern PA3-1 is determined, a time-saving entry presentation is performed to notify the user of a transition (entry) to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (J), in this example, if the rescue time-saving entry fluctuation in the time-saving state results in a miss, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (miss for time-saving promotion). If fluctuation pattern PA3-2 is determined, a time-saving promotion effect is performed to notify the user of a transition (promotion) to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving. Hereinafter, the transition from a time-saving state via a time-saving miss to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving may be referred to as "promotion."

The time-saving entry effect and the time-saving promotion effect are both effects that are performed when the time-saving state C is controlled, but the contents of the effects are different. Specifically, the time-saving entry effect displays a character string indicating that the time-saving state C will be controlled (see FIG. 10-12 (G)) on the image display device 5, while the time-saving promotion effect displays a character string indicating that the time-saving state C will be controlled and promoted (see FIG. 10-15 (D)) on the image display device 5. Also, the time-saving entry effect displays a right-hit notification image to promote right-hitting (see FIG. 10-12 (H)), while the time-saving promotion effect does not display the right-hit notification image (see FIG. 10-15 (D)). In this way, the notification mode of the control to the time-saving state C is different between the case where the normal state is controlled to the time-saving state C and the case where the time-saving state B is controlled (promoted) to the time-saving state C. This makes it possible to give the player a special feeling when the time-saving state is promoted, and to increase the interest.

The notification manner of control to time-saving state C may be the same when controlling from the normal state to time-saving state C and when controlling (promoting) from time-saving state B to time-saving state C. For example, in either case, variation pattern PA3-1 may be selected and a time-saving entry performance may be performed. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the number of variation patterns and performance data, and to save on memory capacity.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (K), in this example, if a jackpot occurs due to a rescue time-saving entry fluctuation in a non-time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PA3-3 (time-saving entry pseudo jackpot). When fluctuation pattern PA3-3 is determined, a time-saving entry effect is performed to notify the player of the transition (entry) to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving, and then a jackpot is notified and a congratulatory effect or a re-draw effect is performed. Note that the effect performed after the time-saving entry effect may be an effect that can be executed when other fluctuation patterns are selected, but it may also be an effect that is not executed when other fluctuation patterns are selected, which can give the player a sense of surprise and specialness.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (L), in this example, if a jackpot occurs in a non-time-saving state due to a time-saving rescue entry fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA3-4 (time-saving promotion pseudo jackpot). When fluctuation pattern PA3-4 is determined, a time-saving promotion effect is performed to notify the player of the transition (promotion) to a time-saving state via a time-saving rescue, and then a jackpot is notified and a congratulatory effect or a re-draw effect is performed. Note that the effect performed after the time-saving promotion effect may be an effect that can be performed when other fluctuation patterns are selected, but it may also be an effect that is not performed when other fluctuation patterns are selected, which can give the player a sense of surprise and specialness.

Note that the length of the fluctuation time is different between when the rescue time shortening fluctuation results in a miss and when the rescue time shortening fluctuation results in a jackpot, but it is also possible to select a fluctuation pattern with the same length of fluctuation time, or a common fluctuation pattern. This can reduce memory capacity.

Note that the method for setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in Figures 10-1 and 10-2 is just one example, and various configurations are possible.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (E), during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4, which is an extremely short fluctuation of 1.5 seconds, is high, and the speed at which the fluctuation display is consumed is fast, so there are few types of preview effects and pre-reading preview effects that can be executed. For example, during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, effects such as displaying an effect image at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, lighting up lamps or LEDs, outputting a specified sound effect or a sound that stops the fluctuation that is different from normal are executed.

In addition, this example shows a case where a fluctuation pattern table E is provided specifically for the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, but it is also possible to configure it so that, for example, without providing a fluctuation pattern table E specifically for the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern is determined using a fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 10-1 (C)) for the time-saving state via a jackpot.

In addition, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the variation pattern table F or G (see FIG. 10-2 (F) or (G)) is switched to, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the variation pattern table may be configured to switch so that the reach rate gradually decreases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached decreases, or the variation pattern table may be configured to switch so that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested only when the number of remaining fluctuations is a dividing number such as 100 or 200.

(Test terminal treatment)
10-3 and 10-4 are flow charts showing an example of a process related to output of each test signal in the test terminal process. The test terminal process is executed in the game control timer interrupt process.

In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 first clears the bits of each signal in the test signal output buffer of the output port buffer (step 113IWS31). Then, if it is during the jackpot pattern determination period (Y in step 113IWS32), during the jackpot period including the fanfare period and the ending period (Y in step 113IWS33), or if any of the time-saving flags are set (Y in step 113IWS34), it sets the bit of the launch position designation signal 3 in the test signal output buffer (step 113IWS35). The time-saving flags include a time-saving flag A indicating time-saving state A, a first time-saving flag B indicating time-saving state B, and a time-saving flag C indicating time-saving state C.

If it is not during the jackpot pattern determination period, not during the jackpot period including the fanfare period and ending period, and none of the time-saving flags are set (N in step 113IWS34), the bit of the launch position designation signal 1 in the test signal output buffer is set (step 113IWS36).

When a jackpot symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the normal state, the launch position designation signal 3 is output when the symbol stop period begins (Y in step 113IWS32), whereas when a time-saving loss symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the normal state, the time-saving flag B is set when the symbol stop period of the time-saving loss symbol ends, and the launch position designation signal 3 is output when the symbol stop period ends (Y in step 113IWS34). In other words, the timing of switching the launch position designation signal is configured to differ depending on the trigger for controlling the transition to the time-saving state.

In addition, in this embodiment, by switching the output of the launch position designation signals 1 and 3, information indicating which playing style the player is expected to use can be notified to an external device (test device), but by setting/resetting a single launch position designation signal, information indicating which playing style the player is expected to use can be notified to an external device (test device). For example, if N is found in step 113IWS34, the process proceeds to step 113IWS37 without processing step 113IWS36, or the process of step 113IWS31 is not performed, and instead of processing step 113IWS36, the process clears the bit of the launch position designation signal 3, so that information indicating which playing style the player is expected to use can be notified to an external device (test device) depending on whether the bit of the launch position designation signal 3 is set.

In addition, if the first special symbol is in the winning symbol confirmation period (Y in step 113IWS37A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 signal (step 113IWS37B) and sets the bit of symbol 1 data bit2 (step 113IWS37C).

Also, when the first special symbol is in the period in which the time-saving failure symbol is confirmed (Y in step 113IWS37D), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 time-saving failure signal (step 113IWS37E) and sets the bit of the symbol 1 data bit1 (step 113IWS37F). Note that the processing of steps 113IWS37E and S37F can be output even if the rescue time-saving count counter has reached 0. As described below, when the time-saving failure symbol is displayed as stopped during a rescue time-saving entry fluctuation, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state is given priority over the time-saving state via the time-saving failure, but even in this case, a signal indicating that the time-saving failure symbol has been displayed as stopped is appropriately output to the outside.

In addition, if the first special symbol is in a pattern confirmation period without time reduction (Y in step 113IWS37G), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the symbol 1 data bit 0 (step 113IWS37H).

In addition, if the jackpot pattern determination period for the second special pattern is in progress (Y in step 113IWS38A), the CPU 103 sets the bit for the special pattern 2 hit signal (step 113IWS38B) and sets the bit for pattern 2 data bit2 (step 113IWS38C).

Also, if the second special symbol is in the period in which the time-saving failure symbol is confirmed (Y in step 113IWS38D), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 time-saving failure signal (step 113IWS38E) and sets the bit of the symbol 2 data bit1 (step 113IWS38F). Note that the processing of steps 113IWS38E and S38F can be output even if the rescue time-saving count counter has reached 0. As described below, when the time-saving failure symbol is displayed as stopped during a rescue time-saving entry fluctuation, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state is given priority over the time-saving state via the time-saving failure, but even in this case, a signal indicating that the time-saving failure symbol is displayed as stopped is appropriately output to the outside.

In addition, if the second special symbol is in a pattern confirmation period without time reduction (Y in step 113IWS38G), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the symbol 2 data bit 0 (step 113IWS38H).

In addition, when the number of rescue time reductions is reached based on the variation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39A), the CPU 103 sets a bit of a special symbol 1 rescue time reach signal (step 113IWS39B). In addition, when the number of rescue time reductions is reached based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39C), the CPU 103 sets a bit of a special symbol 2 rescue time reach signal (step 113IWS39D). Specifically, when the time reduction flag C is set, a flag is set depending on whether the data "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, and based on the flag, it is possible to specify which special symbol variation is the basis for which rescue time reduction. In this example, the special pattern 1 rescue count reaching signal is output instantaneously when the rescue time reduction count is reached based on the variation of the first special pattern, but the special pattern 1 rescue count reaching signal may be output continuously during the period in which the time reduction state via rescue time reduction is controlled based on the variation of the first special pattern. Similarly, in this example, the special pattern 1 rescue count reaching signal is output instantaneously when the rescue time reduction count is reached based on the variation of the second special pattern, but the special pattern 2 rescue count reaching signal may be output continuously during the period in which the time reduction state via rescue time reduction is controlled based on the variation of the second special pattern.

If the high probability state is being controlled based on the variation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40A), the CPU 103 sets a bit for the special symbol 1 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40B). If the high probability state is being controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40C), the CPU 103 sets a bit for the special symbol 2 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40D). Specifically, a flag is set depending on whether the data "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer when the high probability state flag is set, and it is possible to specify based on the flag which special symbol variation has been used to control the high probability state.

If the time-saving state is being controlled based on the variation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS41A), the CPU 103 sets a bit for the special symbol 1 variation time-saving state signal (step 113IWS41B). If the time-saving state is being controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS41C), the CPU 103 sets a bit for the special symbol 2 variation time-saving state signal (step 113IWS41D). Specifically, when the time-saving flag is set, a flag is set depending on whether the data "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, and based on the flag, it is possible to specify which special symbol variation has been used to control the probability variable state.

Furthermore, if the time-saving flag A is set (Y in step 113IWS42A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the easy-to-win state designation signal 1 (step 113IWS42B). If the time-saving flag B is set (Y in step 113IWS42C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the easy-to-win state designation signal 2 (step 113IWS42D). If the time-saving flag C is set (Y in step 113IWS42E), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the easy-to-win state designation signal 3 (step 113IWS42F). As described below, when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state, the time-saving flags are reset when the jackpot fluctuation stops, and the time-saving flag A can be set when the jackpot ends. Therefore, when a 10R jackpot A occurs in the time-saving state A, the easy-to-win state designation signal 1 is temporarily turned off during the period from when the jackpot fluctuation stops to when the jackpot ends.

Then, the CPU 103 outputs the contents of the test signal output buffer to the output port (step 113IWS43), thereby transmitting each signal as a test signal to the test signal terminal. By outputting the test signals in this manner, the internal state of the gaming machine can be identified on the testing device side.

(Customer waiting demo performance control process)
FIG. 10-5 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting demo performance control process. The customer waiting demo performance control process is a process that is performed after step S161 in the performance control process and before steps S170 to S177. In other words, the customer waiting demo performance control process is a process that is performed every time the performance control process is performed. In the customer waiting demo performance control process, when 10 seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the customer waiting demo designation command, the performance control CPU 120 performs a telop display execution lottery process to determine whether or not to execute a telop display performance (Y in step 113IWS250, S251). Specifically, the CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a telop display performance by using a telop display execution lottery table according to the set value.

Figures 10-6 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the caption display execution lottery table. In the caption display execution lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to whether or not a caption display effect will be executed is assigned for each remaining number of times until the rescue time reduction, but in the example shown in Figures 10-6 (A) and (B), the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown to simplify the explanation. The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the caption display execution lottery and determines the decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

Figure 10-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the caption display execution lottery table used when the setting value "1" is set. Figure 10-6 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the caption display execution lottery table used when the setting value "6" is set. The caption display execution lottery table used when the setting values "2" to "5" are set is not shown.

When the caption display execution lottery table (set value "1") shown in FIG. 10-6 (A) is used, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, it is determined 30% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 70% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, it is determined 40% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 60% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 to 100, it is determined 50% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 50% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, it is determined 55% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 45% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed.

When the caption display execution lottery table (set value "6") shown in FIG. 10-6 (B) is used, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, it is determined 60% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 40% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, it is determined 70% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 30% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 to 100, it is determined 80% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 20% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, it is determined 85% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 15% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed.

In this way, the system is configured so that the rate at which the caption display effect is executed is higher when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less than when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 or more. This increases interest by making the player look forward to the number of times the rescue time reduction can be changed, and also prevents the player from suffering a disadvantage due to ending play just before the number of times the rescue time reduction can be changed is reached.

In this way, the system is configured to execute the telop display effect at a higher rate when the setting value is set to "6" than when the setting value is set to "1." This allows the player to predict the setting value based on the frequency with which the telop display effect is executed.

The system is also configured so that the fewer the number of remaining changes until the rescue time-saving feature is activated, the higher the rate at which the caption display effect is executed. This allows the player to predict the number of remaining changes until the rescue time-saving feature is activated based on the frequency at which the caption display effect is executed.

The number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction can be specified by the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. In other words, before the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is received indicating that there are 200 times until the rescue time reduction, the lottery is held assuming that the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, and after the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is received indicating that there are 200 times until the rescue time reduction but before the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is received indicating that there are 100 times until the rescue time reduction, the lottery is held assuming that the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, and after the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is received indicating that there are 100 times until the rescue time reduction, the lottery is held assuming that the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 100 or less.

When it is decided to execute a subtitle display effect, the effect control CPU 120 performs a subtitle display mode determination lottery process to determine the mode of the subtitle display effect (step 113IWS253). Specifically, the subtitle display mode determination lottery table according to the set value is used to determine the mode of the subtitle display effect.

Figures 10-6 (C) and (D) are explanatory diagrams showing the caption display mode determination lottery table. In the caption display mode determination lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to the performance mode of the caption display performance (the color of the frame of the caption display area; blue, red) is assigned for each remaining number of times until the rescue time reduction, but in the example shown in Figures 10-6 (C) and (D), the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown to simplify the explanation. The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the caption display mode determination lottery and determines the decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

Figure 10-6 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing the caption display mode determination lottery table used when the setting value "1" is set. Figure 10-6 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the caption display mode determination lottery table used when the setting value "6" is set. The caption display mode determination lottery table used when the setting values "2" to "5" are set is not shown.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table (set value "1") shown in FIG. 10-6(C) is used, if the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 40%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 60%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 70%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 30%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 11 to 100, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 80%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 20%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 85%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 15%.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table (set value "6") shown in FIG. 10-6 (D) is used, if the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 70%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 30%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 80%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 20%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 11 to 100, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 90%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 10%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 95%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 5%.

In this way, the frame of the caption display area is configured to be displayed in red more frequently when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less than when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is 11 or more. This increases interest by making the player look forward to reaching the number of times the rescue time reduction can be changed.

In this way, the frame of the telop display area is configured to be displayed in red more frequently when the setting value is set to "6" than when the setting value is set to "1." This allows the player to predict the setting value based on the presentation mode of the telop display presentation.

In addition, the fewer the number of remaining changes until the rescue time-saving feature is activated, the higher the percentage of the frame of the telop display area that is displayed in red. This allows the player to predict the number of remaining changes until the rescue time-saving feature is activated based on the presentation mode of the telop display presentation.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts a caption display performance that displays the caption display area in the determined manner (step 113IWS254).

In addition, if three minutes have passed since receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the demo movie (Y in step 113IWS255, S256).

The captions and demo movie displayed here will end when the game ball passes through the starting hole, the next variation begins, or a player operation is detected.

Figure 10-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice setting process. In the advance notice setting process shown in Figure 10-7, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received (step 113 IWS 1011), and if not, ends the advance notice setting process.

The start winning command is a command that indicates the winning judgment result obtained when the game control microcomputer 100 extracts a random number value to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the fluctuation pattern when a start winning occurs in the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B, and predicts and judges the display result and the fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random number value. The start winning command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when a start winning occurs in the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B. Examples of start winning commands include a pattern designation command, a fluctuation category command, a start winning designation command, and a combined reserved memory number designation command.

The pattern designation command is a presentation control command that indicates whether or not a winning combination will result in a jackpot and the type of winning combination. The variable category command is a presentation control command that indicates the range of judgment values that the value of the random number for determining the type of variable pattern falls within (the result of determining the type of variable pattern). The start winning combination command is a presentation control command that indicates which of the first and second start winning combinations has been selected as the start winning combination. The combined reserved memory number designation command is a presentation control command that specifies the total number (combined reserved memory number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number.

In this embodiment, it is possible to determine, based on the fluctuation category command, whether the fluctuation is accompanied by a super reach, a normal reach, a pseudo-consecutive, or if it is a pseudo-consecutive, how many times the fluctuation is repeated, or whether it is undetermined. "Undetermined" refers to a case where the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determination random number obtained at the time of the start winning differs depending on the number of reserved memories at the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the start winning.

The start-win command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is temporarily stored in a start-win command storage area formed in RAM. Specifically, in the command analysis process (step S75), the performance control CPU 120 stores the commands in the first free storage area of the start-win command storage area in the order in which they were received. Then, each time the display of the decorative pattern begins to change (each time a combined reserved memory count subtraction command is received), each command stored in the start-win command storage area is deleted from the one stored in the first storage area 1, and the contents of the start-win command storage area are shifted.

If a new start winning command is received in step 113IWS1011, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying a new pending display (step 113IWS1012). Then, it is determined whether or not a look-ahead flag indicating that a look-ahead preview performance is being executed is set (step 113IWS1013), and if it is set, the look-ahead preview setting process ends. If it is not set, it is determined whether or not it is controlled to a time-saving state (step 113IWS1014), and if it is controlled to a time-saving state, it proceeds to step 113IWS1016.

If the time-saving state is not being controlled, the number of reserved memories is compared with the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state (step 113IWS1015), and if the number of reserved memories is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If the number of reserved memories is equal to or less than the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state is 10 or less (step 113IWS1016). If the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state is 10 or less, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state is not 10 or less, a pre-reading performance execution lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice performance. Specifically, a pre-reading notice performance execution lottery table is used to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice performance.

In the lottery table for the execution of the pre-reading preview performance, a judgment value is assigned for each winning judgment result (jackpot, miss with time-saving feature, miss without time-saving feature) as to whether or not the pre-reading preview performance will be executed, and if so, the performance mode (first mode, second mode) of the pre-reading preview performance.

The first aspect of the look-ahead preview performance is a performance in which the number of changes until the predicted target of the look-ahead preview performance starts to change is displayed in red as a countdown, and the second aspect of the look-ahead preview performance is a performance in which the number of changes until the predicted target of the look-ahead preview performance starts to change is displayed in blue as a countdown.

For example, if the winning judgment result is a jackpot, there is a 70% chance that the first mode of pre-reading preview performance will be performed, and a 30% chance that the pre-reading preview performance will not be performed. If the winning judgment result is a miss with no time reduction, there is a 40% chance that the second mode of pre-reading preview performance will be performed, and a 60% chance that the pre-reading preview performance will not be performed. If the winning judgment result is a miss with no time reduction, there is a 4% chance that the first mode of pre-reading preview performance will be performed, a 6% chance that the second mode of pre-reading preview performance will be performed, and a 90% chance that the pre-reading preview performance will not be performed.

In this way, the first mode of the look-ahead preview performance can be performed in both cases of a jackpot and a miss with no time-saving feature, so it is a look-ahead preview performance that suggests control will be made to a jackpot. Also, the second mode of the look-ahead preview performance can be performed in both cases of a miss with no time-saving feature and a miss with no time-saving feature, so it is a look-ahead preview performance that suggests control will be made to a miss with no time-saving feature.

If it is decided to execute a look-ahead preview performance, the performance control CPU 120 displays the look-ahead display area and countdown display on the image display unit 5 (step 113IWS1019) and sets the look-ahead flag (step 113IWS1020).

In this way, by processing step 113IWS1015, when the number of reserved memories is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, that is, when the number of reserved memories is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, the execution of a look-ahead preview performance is restricted (prohibited) for a reserved memory that is stored before the rescue time reduction change is reached and corresponds to a change that occurs after control is given to a time reduction state via the rescue time reduction. This makes it possible to restrict the execution of look-ahead preview performances that span before and after the control of the rescue time reduction, and to avoid malfunctions in the performance.

In addition, by performing the processing of step 113IWS1016, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is restricted (prohibited). This prevents the countdown performance corresponding to the control of the rescue time reduction and the look-ahead preview performance from being executed at the same time.

For example, in a gaming machine capable of displaying a countdown when the number of times the rescue time reduction has been reached and a countdown display as a look-ahead preview effect, if the countdown display when the number of times the rescue time reduction has been reached and the countdown display as a look-ahead preview effect are allowed to be executed in an overlapping manner, it is expected that the presentation will become complicated. In particular, if the presentation showing the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction and the look-ahead preview effect both involve countdown displays, it will be difficult to know which countdown display to pay attention to, which is likely to reduce the presentation effect. Therefore, by configuring the presentation showing the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction and the look-ahead preview effect not to be executed in an overlapping manner, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the presentation effect.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-8 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 113IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 113IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 113IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 113IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo consecutive win is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines a chance pattern (for example, a combination of patterns that are not a reach but are one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445") as a provisional stop pattern during the pseudo consecutive win in step 113IWS802. The performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 113IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In step 113IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates "10R jackpot A", the performance control CPU 120 determines a decorative pattern combination in which three symbols are the same even number symbols as the stopping symbols (10R jackpot A symbol). Also, if the received display result designation command indicates "10R jackpot B", the performance control CPU 120 determines a decorative pattern combination in which three symbols are the same odd number symbols as the stopping symbols (10R jackpot B symbol).

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach performance is involved, a combination of decorative symbols where the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. Note that the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond symbol) depending on the type of time-saving.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for the decorative patterns, a stopping pattern that evokes a jackpot (a pattern combination in which the left, center, and right are all the same) is called a jackpot pattern. A stopping pattern that evokes a loss is called a loss pattern.

The performance control CPU 120 also performs a preview performance setting process to set a preview performance that indicates the reliability of controlling the game to a jackpot game state (step 113IWS802A). Specifically, in the preview performance setting process, a preview performance execution lottery table according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance, and if it is decided to execute a preview performance, a preview performance mode determination lottery table according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is used to determine the performance mode of the preview performance to be executed, and sets the execution of the preview performance of the determined performance mode. Then, although not shown in the figure, the process table including the preview performance set here is selected in steps 113IWS804, S806, and S807 described later.

In the preview performance execution lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to whether or not a preview performance will be executed is assigned for each variable display result (jackpot, miss). The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the preview performance execution lottery and determines the decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

When the preview performance execution lottery table (number of remaining changes until rescue time reduction > 10) is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 70% chance that the preview performance will be executed, and a 30% chance that the preview performance will not be executed. If the variable display result is a miss, there is a 10% chance that the preview performance will be executed, and a 90% chance that the preview performance will not be executed.

When the preview performance execution lottery table (number of remaining changes until rescue time reduction ≦ 10) is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 70% chance that the preview performance will be executed, and a 30% chance that the preview performance will not be executed. If the variable display result is a miss, there is a 1% chance that the preview performance will be executed, and a 99% chance that the preview performance will not be executed.

In this way, the configuration makes it easier to execute the preview performance when the jackpot fluctuation occurs than when the miss fluctuation occurs.

In addition, in this way, the configuration is such that the probability of executing a preview performance when the variable display result is a miss is lower when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less than when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is more than 10. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the period when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less.

In the preview performance mode determination lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to the preview performance mode (color of the character to be displayed; blue, red) is assigned for each variable display result (jackpot, miss). The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the preview performance mode determination lottery and determines the decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

When the preview performance mode determination lottery table is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, red is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 70% of the time, and blue is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 30% of the time. If the variable display result is a miss, red is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 10% of the time, and blue is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 90% of the time.

When the preview performance mode determination lottery table is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, red is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 70% of the time, and blue is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 30% of the time. If the variable display result is a miss, red is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 1% of the time, and blue is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 99% of the time.

In this way, red is more likely to be selected as the color of the character displayed in the preview performance in the case of a jackpot fluctuation than in the case of a miss fluctuation.

In addition, in this way, red is more likely to be selected as the character color when the variable display result is a miss when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less than when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is more than 10. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the period when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less.

Next, if the look-ahead flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 updates the countdown display in the look-ahead preview performance (steps 113IWS802B, S802C). Then, it checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700 (step 113IWS803). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700 can be determined, for example, by checking whether a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a promotional performance corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached (step 113IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100), a process table including a promotional performance corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations "100 times" is selected. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is "07 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 700), a process table including a promotional performance corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations "800 times" is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is not 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 10 or less (step 113IWS805). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 10 or less can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown performance and an effect performance according to the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached (step 113IWS806). For example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is "0A (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10), a process table including a countdown performance according to the count number "10" until the rescue time reduction is reached is selected. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 1), a process table including a countdown performance according to the count number "1" until the rescue time reduction is reached is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

In this example, the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is determined based on the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command and rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and a teasing effect or a countdown effect is executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when a background designation command that designates a background image is transmitted, the EXT data of the background designation command may be set to a value corresponding to the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction occurs and transmitted. The performance control CPU 120 may then determine the remaining number of changes based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and execute a teasing effect or a countdown effect.

In addition, in this example, even if the number of fluctuations for the rescue time reduction is reached, if a jackpot fluctuation occurs, the same fluctuation pattern for a jackpot as usual is used, but this is not limited to this, and the fluctuation display may be configured to be executed using a fluctuation pattern that specifies a reach performance with a short fluctuation time.

In addition, in this example, if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, an effect presentation is performed in which an effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. For example, the fewer the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached, the wider the display range of the effect image on the image display device 5 becomes.

In addition, the processing of steps 113IWS803 to S806 can be performed regardless of the game state. This makes it possible to execute hype effects, countdown effects, and effect effects according to the remaining number of plays, just as when controlled to the normal state, even when controlled to the time-saving state B, and provides a sense of relief time-saving even in the time-saving state B, thereby increasing interest.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs is not 10 or less (N in step 113IWS805), the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (step 113IWS807). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS808).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 80. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 113IWS809). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this characteristic section 113IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern command.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 113IWS810).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 113IWS811).

(Variable display performance processing)
10-9 and 10-10 are flow charts showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 113IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 113IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 113IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is set to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 113IWS844). In addition, the control state for the performance device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data that are set next (step 113IWS845).

Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance checks whether or not it has received the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command (step 113IWS846). Specifically, it checks whether or not the first confirmation A command reception flag or the second confirmation A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If it has received the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance selects a process table corresponding to the mode transition designation (a designation that notifies the player of a transition to a time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-hit notification (step 113IWS847). Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS848). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 113IWS849). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 113IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS861A.

In this example, when the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time-saving function has missed during normal operation and cases where the time-saving function has rescued. In step 113 IWS847, if the time-saving function has missed during normal operation, a process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for time-saving function misses and the right-hit notification is selected, and if the time-saving function has rescued, a process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for rescue time-saving function and the right-hit notification is selected. Whether the time-saving function has rescued and the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking whether the EXT data of the received rescue time-saving count 1 designation command is "00 (H)".

If neither the first pattern confirmation A designation command nor the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received (step 113IWS856). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation B command reception flag or the second confirmation B command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received, it proceeds to step 113IWS858.

If neither the first pattern determination B designation command nor the second pattern determination B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 113IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first pattern determination B designation command or the second pattern determination B designation command is received (Y in step 113IWS856), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y in step 113IWS857), the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the normal pattern determination display (step 113IWS858). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS859). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 113IWS860). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to the determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 113IWS861). Then proceed to step 113IWS861A.

In this example, in addition to when a pattern determination command is received, if the variable time timer times out (see step 113IWS857), the process proceeds to step 113IWS858 and onwards and the pattern determination period begins. However, unless a pattern determination command is missed, step 113IWS857 will normally be judged as Y and the process will not proceed to step 113IWS858 and onwards.

In step 113IWS861A, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the change is the target change of the look-ahead preview performance (step 113IWS861A). For example, the value of the number of reserved memories when the look-ahead preview performance starts is set as the number of times K the look-ahead preview performance is executed, and the number of times K is subtracted by one when the change starts. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the change can be determined to be the target change of the look-ahead preview performance. If the change is the target change of the look-ahead preview performance, the look-ahead flag is reset (step 113IWS861B) and the process proceeds to step 113IWS862. In this way, the look-ahead flag is set when the look-ahead preview performance starts, and the look-ahead flag is reset when the change of the preview target change of the look-ahead preview performance stops, and the look-ahead preview performance targeting the reserved memory that occurred while the look-ahead flag was set is not performed, so that multiple look-ahead preview performances are not executed in duplicate. Note that multiple look-ahead preview performances may be executed in duplicate.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 113IWS862).

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving, will be described. Figures 10-11 to 10-15 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time-saving state. In Figures 10-11 to 10-15, the performance screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

Figures 10-11 to 10-14 show specific examples of the presentation mode when the normal state is controlled to time-saving state C. Figure 10-15 shows a specific example of the presentation mode when the time-saving state is controlled to time-saving state C from time-saving state B.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is displayed every 100 spins when the symbols stop. In this example, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 113IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the small symbol 113IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, when there are 700 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time reduction, the decorative symbol 113IW100 and the small symbol 113IW101 stop and a missing symbol (in this example, the combination of symbols "134") is derived and displayed. At this time, the remaining spin count display 113IW102 is displayed in the upper left, saying "700 spins left to start the rescue time reduction!". At this time, an explanation of the effects of the rescue time reduction is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the caption display 113IW103.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-11(B), for example, when there are 600 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, the decorative symbol 113IW100 and the small symbol 113IW101 stop and a missing symbol (in this example, the symbol combination "423") is derived and displayed. At this time, as in FIG. 10-11(A), the remaining spins display 113IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner saying "600 spins left until rescue time-saving mode begins!" At this time, an explanation of the effects of the rescue time-saving mode is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the caption display 113IW103.

In this example, as shown in Figures 10-11 (A) and (B), a teasing effect suggesting the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is performed every 100 changes, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the teasing effect may be configured not to be performed when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is between 400 and 700, but to be performed when the number of remaining changes is 300 or less (i.e., the remaining number of changes is 300, 200, or 100).

In addition, instead of necessarily executing the teasing effect when the number of remaining fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command specifying the number of rescue time reductions to be 2 is received, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed, and if it is decided to execute the teasing effect, the teasing effect is executed in the manner shown in Figures 10-11 (A) and (B). In this case, it is desirable to configure so that the execution rate of the teasing effect increases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached decreases.

As shown in Figures 10-11(C) to 10-12(E), when there are 10 spins remaining before the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, the decorative symbol 113IW100 is not displayed when the symbol stops, but only the small symbol 113IW101 is displayed, and a countdown display 113IW104 according to the remaining number of spins is displayed in the center of the screen. For example, the countdown display 113IW104 shows a countdown from "10" to "1" each time the symbol stops after the display of the varying symbols ends. Each figure shows an example in which a losing symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols "653", "844", "278", and "216") is derived and displayed.

As shown in Fig. 10-11(C) to Fig. 10-12(E), after 10 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, an effect effect is performed in which an effect image in a display range according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving mode is displayed, and as shown in Fig. 10-12(F) to Fig. 10-12(H), in a fluctuation in which the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving mode is 0, a time-saving entry effect is performed, the symbols stop, and the losing symbols (in this example, the combination of symbols "254") are displayed. At this time, the decorative symbols may not be displayed, and the losing symbols may be displayed only in the small symbols. Note that Fig. 10-12(G) and (H) show a period in which the losing symbols as small symbols are temporarily stopped, and the special symbols continue to fluctuate. Fig. 10-13(I) to Fig. 10-14(M) show a period in which the losing symbols as small symbols are displayed as confirmed, and the special symbols also stop fluctuating.

In addition, in FIG. 10-12 (G), a character string indicating that the time-saving state will be controlled to 800 times is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby notifying the control to time-saving state C. Then, in FIG. 10-12 (H), a right-hit promotion image to promote right-hitting is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that since the case of controlling from the normal state to time-saving state C is shown here, the right-hit promotion image is displayed, but since right-hitting has already been performed when controlling from time-saving state B to time-saving state C, the display of the right-hit notification image is limited when the pattern stops (see FIG. 10-15 (D)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-13(I), when the period for determining the symbol is entered, the mode effect start display 113IW105 "Super Hot!" is displayed, and the mode transition effect begins. Note that from this point on, in the mode transition effect, the decorative symbol 113IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 113IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13(J), when the mode transition presentation starts, an operation suggestion image 113IW106 is displayed, which suggests operating (pressing) the push button 31B. For example, the operation suggestion image 113IW106 displays the word "press" together with an image encouraging the pressing of the push button 31B.

As shown in FIG. 10-13(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 113IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the operation suggestion image 113IW106, the text display 113IW107 "V STOCK x 1" is displayed, notifying the player that the rescue time reduction will begin. In addition, the right-hit instruction display 113IW108, which instructs the player to hit to the right, is displayed next to the small pattern 113IW101.

In this example, even if a jackpot is hit, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) can be configured to execute a presentation that displays the text display "V STOCK x 1" in the same manner as in FIG. 10-13 (K). In this case, for example, in the start winning judgment process (step S101), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead judgment process to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit and the type of fluctuation pattern, and transmits a look-ahead judgment result designation command that can identify the look-ahead judgment result. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance (so-called reserved consecutive performance) in the same manner as in FIG. 10-13 (K) based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command. For example, if it is determined that there is one item in the reserved memory that will be a jackpot based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the reserved consecutive performance is executed by displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1". Also, for example, if it is determined based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command that there are two jackpots in the reserved memory, the text display "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to execute the reserved consecutive performance.

On the other hand, when the rescue time reduction is activated, there is a high probability that the extremely short fluctuation display of 1.5 seconds will be executed during the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction (see FIG. 10-1 (E)). Therefore, the fluctuation display will be consumed very quickly and a jackpot is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, during the fluctuation display that has been activated by the rescue time reduction (in this example, the pattern determination period), the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 10-13 (K) is executed without checking the results of the pre-reading judgment. Therefore, the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 10-13 (K) is an effect in the same manner as the pseudo-reserved consecutive effect, and is an effect that notifies the user that the rescue time reduction has been activated.

In addition, if the fluctuation that has reached the rescue time reduction is a jackpot fluctuation, for example, 30 seconds may be secured as the fluctuation time, and a performance that appears to be the rescue time reduction may be executed first, followed by a performance that notifies of a jackpot.

Although the example shows a case where the display of the right hit instruction display 113IW108 starts from the timing of the display of the text display 113IW107 "V STOCK x 1", the timing of the start of the display of the right hit instruction display 113IW108 is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, the display of the right hit instruction display 113IW108 may start from the timing of the confirmation display of the stop pattern shown in FIG. 10-12 (H), and various modes are possible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (L), a mode selection screen 113IW109 is displayed to select the presentation mode for the rescue time reduction. For example, a screen to select one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. Note that if a predetermined time has passed without selecting a presentation mode, the presentation mode that the cursor is aligned with is automatically confirmed. Also, even when the mode selection screen 113IW109 is displayed, the right hit instruction display 113IW108 remains displayed next to the small pattern 113IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (M), when the selection of the presentation mode is completed, a start notification screen 113IW110 is displayed to notify the user that the rescue time reduction will begin. For example, the words "Rescue time reduction entered" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation begins, the game transitions to time reduction state C, and the rescue time reduction begins.

In this example, when the pattern stops, the remaining number of spins until the rescue time-saving feature and the explanation of the effects during the rescue time-saving feature and a countdown are displayed, but this may also be done when the pattern starts to change or while it is changing.

In addition, in this example, a pattern determination period of 20 seconds is secured in the variable display that results in rescue time reduction, and a mode transition effect and right-hit notification are executed, but the pattern determination period may remain the usual 0.5 seconds, and the game may be configured to transition directly to the time-saving state via rescue time reduction without performing a mode transition effect, etc.

In addition, this example shows a case where the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "800" when the RAM clear process is executed or when a jackpot is hit, but for example, when configuring to execute a story-based presentation (for example, a story reach presentation or a story such as whether to perform high-speed fluctuation), the selection buffer for that story and the story counter may also be cleared. Also, it may be possible to configure it so that a story can be set when the rescue time reduction is activated, or so that different stories can be set depending on the game state.

In this way, Fig. 10-11 to Fig. 10-14 show the case where the normal state is controlled to the time-saving state C, while Fig. 10-15 shows a specific example of the presentation mode when the time-saving state is controlled to the time-saving state C from the time-saving state B. For example, Fig. 10-15 (A) and (B) show examples of the display of the timing when there are 10 spins and 1 spin remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving state B in the time-saving state B, in addition to the display of Fig. 10-11 (C) and Fig. 10-12 (E) showing examples of the display of the timing when there are 10 spins and 1 spin remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving state in the normal state, a right-hit notification presentation (display of a right-pointing arrow image) is performed due to the time-saving state. This right-hit notification presentation is performed continuously while the time-saving state is controlled. It is to be noted that the value of the time-saving state counter in Fig. 10-15 (A) is 60, and the value of the time-saving state counter in Fig. 10-15 (B) is 51.

As shown in Figures 10-15(C) and (D), when the value of the rescue time-saving counter becomes 0, a time-saving promotion effect is performed. Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-15(D), a character string indicating the promotion is displayed. At this time, unlike Figure 10-12(H), the right-hit notification image is not displayed again because the game is already controlled to the time-saving state.

The countdown effect and the effect effect are executed only when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10, but this is not limited to this. For example, the countdown effect and the effect effect may be executed at a timing other than when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 (by executing a so-called false effect) to make the player expect to enter the rescue time reduction. In this case, for example, the change when the time reduction counter value is 50 may be ended, and the countdown display and the effect display may be started when the next change is started, and the countdown display and the effect display may be performed over multiple changes, and the countdown display and the effect display may be ended at a predetermined timing (in the illustrated example, the third change after the countdown display and the effect display were started). This false effect is not limited to being executed when the time reduction counter value is 50, but may also be executed when the time reduction counter value is 100 or 200.

The rate at which false effects are executed may also differ depending on the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving period; for example, the rate at which they occur may be higher the fewer the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving period. This allows the player to feel that the rescue time-saving period is approaching, increasing interest. Also, this false effect may not be executed when a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern involving an SP reach) is selected.

As explained above, this characteristic part 113IW includes the following inventions:

As described in JP2005-95449A, there have been gaming machines that count the number of times the pattern changes, and control the machine to a certain variable state when the counting result reaches a value corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring (i.e., when a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) changes without a jackpot occurring). Similarly, there have been gaming machines that control the game state to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state in which the pattern changes frequently) when the counting result reaches a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in JP2005-95449A, there was room for improvement in the presentation control in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the number of times the variable display occurs. Therefore, the following gaming machines (means 113-1) to (means 113-7) are described in this characteristic section 113IW.

(Means 113-1) A gaming machine capable of controlling a game machine to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed by executing a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern),
A variable display execution means (e.g., a part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole) and the establishment of a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a fluctuating game state);
A reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied;
A determination means capable of determining to control to an advantageous state;
A determination means (for example, a part that executes step S101 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of determining that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state before the determination by the determination means;
a specific suggestion performance execution means (for example, a part that executes step 113IWS1019 in the performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific suggestion performance (for example, a first mode of foresight notice performance. Specific examples of foresight notice performance are not limited to a countdown display, but may be a performance in which a special decorative pattern (chance eye) is stopped and displayed, a hold change performance in which the color or shape of the hold display is changed, or a zone performance in which a special background is displayed), which suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state based on the judgment result by the judgment means;
A state control means capable of controlling the engine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more easily satisfied than in a normal state;
updating means for updating numerical information (e.g., a relief time reduction counter);
The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes).
The state control means can control the state to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (e.g., a value of a rescue time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed,
The device further includes a special suggestion effect execution means (e.g., a portion that executes steps S113IWS804, S806, and S254 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute special suggestion effects (e.g., teasing effects, countdown effects, effect effects, and subtitle display effects) related to the establishment of a special condition,
The specific suggestion performance execution means is
It is possible to restrict the execution of a specific suggestion performance that targets a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is satisfied (for example, when Y is determined in step 113IWS1015, the performance control CPU 120 prohibits the execution of a first mode of pre-reading preview performance that spans before and after the start of control for the rescue time reduction by not executing 113IWS1019).
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of a specific suggestion presentation is restricted during a specified period from when the numerical information updated by the update means reaches a specific value from a specified value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter is "10") corresponding to a specified number of times (e.g., 790 times) that is less than the special number of times (e.g., 790 times) (e.g., when step 113IWS1016 in the presentation control CPU 120 is Y, step 113IWS1019 is not executed, thereby prohibiting the execution of a first type of pre-reading preview presentation in the fluctuation immediately before control to the rescue time reduction).

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent problems with the presentation while preventing the presentation from becoming too complicated and reducing a decline in interest.

In this example, if the game is already controlled to the time-saving state, the execution of a pre-reading preview performance that spans both before and after the start of control to the rescue time-saving state is not prohibited (if step 113IWS1014 is Y, step 113IWS1015 is not performed), but this is not limited to this, and even if the game is controlled to the time-saving state, the execution of a pre-reading preview performance that spans both before and after the start of control to the rescue time-saving state may be prohibited.

In addition, in this example, a special suggestion effect is executed during a specified period until the numerical information updated by the update means reaches a specific value from a specified value corresponding to a specified number of times less than the special number of times, and the execution of the specific suggestion effect is restricted during the specified period. Specifically, when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction reaches 10, the execution of the countdown effect is started and the execution of the look-ahead preview effect is prohibited. This prevents the special suggestion effect and the specific suggestion effect from being executed at the same time, which prevents the effect from becoming complicated and reduces a decline in interest.

In addition, in this example, the execution of a look-ahead preview performance that spans both before and after the start of control to reduce the rescue time is prohibited, but the restriction method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing multiple types of look-ahead preview performances, some of the multiple types of look-ahead preview performances may be prohibited from being executed if they span both before and after the start of control to reduce the rescue time, while other look-ahead preview performances may not be prohibited from being executed (may be executed) even if they span both before and after the start of control to reduce the rescue time.

Similarly, in this example, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance in the fluctuation immediately before control to the rescue time reduction is prohibited, but the restriction method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing multiple types of look-ahead preview performance, some of the multiple types of look-ahead preview performance may be prohibited from being executed in the fluctuation immediately before control to the rescue time reduction, while other look-ahead preview performances may not be prohibited from being executed (may be executed) in the fluctuation immediately before control to the rescue time reduction.

(Means 113-2) In the means 113-1, the state control means can control to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed,
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
The state control means, when a special condition is established and a special display result is derived and displayed, can control to a special state of advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to the time-shortened state via rescue time-shortened by giving priority to control to a time-shortened state via a time-shortened state rather than control to a time-shortened state via a time-shortened state, and thereby controls to the time-shortened state via rescue time-shortened when a time-shortened miss pattern is stopped and displayed in a fluctuation that results in rescue time-shortened (fluctuation that causes the rescue time-shortened count counter to become 0)).
The display control device further includes a special suggestion effect execution means (e.g., a portion that executes step 113IWS1019 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute a special suggestion effect (e.g., a pre-reading notice effect of the second mode) that suggests that a special display result will be derived and displayed based on the determination result by the determination means,
The special suggestion effect execution means may restrict the execution of the special suggestion effect during a specified period from when the numerical information updated by the update means reaches a specific value from a specified value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter is "10") corresponding to a specified number of times (e.g., 790 times) that is less than the special number of times (e.g., 790 times) (e.g., when step 113IWS1016 in the effect control CPU 120 is Y, 113IWS1019 is not executed, thereby prohibiting the execution of the second type of pre-reading preview effect in the fluctuation immediately before being controlled to the rescue time reduction).

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the presentation from becoming too complicated, suppressing a decline in interest, and increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 113-3) In means 113-1 or 113-2, the execution rate of the special suggestion effect may be higher in a predetermined period before the special condition is met (for example, a period in which the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less) than in a period before the predetermined period (for example, a period in which the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is 11 or more) (see Figures 10-6 (A) and (B)).

This configuration can increase interest by making players look forward to the realization of special conditions, and can also prevent players from suffering disadvantages due to ending play just before the special conditions are realized.

(Means 113-4) In any of means 113-1 to 113-3, the special suggestion effect execution means may vary the proportion of the special suggestion effect to be executed by one of a plurality of effect modes depending on the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction) (see Figures 10-6 (C) and (D)).

This configuration makes players look forward to the realization of special conditions, increasing interest.

In addition to the caption display effects, if the execution of promotional effects, countdown effects, and effect effects that indicate the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated is determined by lottery, the execution rate may vary depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated.

(Means 113-5) Any of means 113-1 to 113-4 may be provided with an explanatory performance execution means capable of executing an explanatory performance regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (see Figures 10-11 (A) and (B)).

Such a configuration can improve players' understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

The explanation performance may also be executed at a different rate or at a different rate depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction. For example, the explanation performance may be executed at a higher rate the fewer the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction. In addition, when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the execution rate of the explanation performance may be lowered to prevent a reduction in the performance effect of the countdown performance or effect performance that indicates the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction.

(Means 113-6) In any of means 113-1 to 113-5, the special suggestion effect execution means may execute, as the special suggestion effect, a first special suggestion effect (e.g., a teasing effect, a countdown effect) in which it is easy to identify the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met, and a second special suggestion effect (e.g., an effect effect, a caption display effect) in which it is more difficult to identify the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met than the first special suggestion effect (see Figures 10-11 (C) to 10-12 (E)).

Such a configuration can increase the player's interest in playing the game.

(Means 113-7) In any of the means 113-1 to 113-6, when variable display is not being performed and hold information is not stored in the hold storage means, a predetermined image display means (for example, a part that executes step 113IWS256 in the performance control CPU 120) capable of displaying a predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) is provided;
The special suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a special suggestion effect (e.g., a caption display effect) when a specified image is displayed (e.g., a caption display effect and a demo movie effect can be executed in overlapping order. Either the display of the specified image or the suggestion effect can be executed first, or they can be executed simultaneously), and the rate at which the special suggestion effect is executed when a specified image is displayed may differ depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met (see Figures 10-6 (A) and (B)).

With this configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to whether or not a special suggestion effect is being performed, and to promote operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, the selection ratio of the special suggestion effect mode when a specific image is displayed may be changed depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is met (see Figures 10-6 (C) and (D)). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special suggestion effect mode, increasing interest and promoting operation of the gaming machine.

Also, as described in JP2005-95449A, there have been machines that count the number of times the pattern changes, and control the machine to a certain variable state when the count result reaches a value corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring (i.e., when a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) changes without a jackpot occurring). Similarly, there have been machines that control the game state to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state in which the pattern changes frequently) when the count result reaches a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in JP2005-95449A, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display number, there was insufficient interest when the special condition for the variable display number was established. Therefore, the following gaming machines (means 114-1) to (means 114-8) are described in this characteristic section 113IW.

(Means 114-1) A gaming machine capable of controlling a game machine to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) that is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern),
A state control means capable of controlling the display to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
updating means for updating numerical information (e.g., a relief time reduction counter);
The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
The state control means is
The numerical information updated by the update means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by a specific value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter is “0”) corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed,
When a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, the special state can be controlled;
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
The state control means can control to a special state of an advantage degree corresponding to the establishment of a special condition based on the establishment of a special condition when the state is controlled to a special state of an advantage degree corresponding to the derivation and display of the special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls (promotes) to a time-shortening state via a rescue time-shortening state based on the reaching of a rescue time-shortening fluctuation when controlled to a time-shortening state via a time-shortening loss);
Further, when a special condition is satisfied, a notification effect execution means (for example, a part in the effect control CPU 120 that performs steps S113IWS806, S809, and S845) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a time-saving entry effect, a time-saving promotion effect) that notifies the satisfaction of the special condition is provided.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect based on the establishment of a special condition when the special display result is controlled to a special state of advantage corresponding to the derived display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a time-saving promotion effect when the variation pattern PA3-2 is selected).

With this configuration, when the special display result is controlled to a special state with a degree of advantage corresponding to the derived display, if a special condition is met, a special feeling can be given through the notification effect, thereby increasing interest.

(Means 114-2) In means 114-1, the notification effect execution means can execute a notification effect when a special condition is met in the normal state, and the presentation manner of the notification effect differs between when a special condition is met in the normal state and when a special condition is met in the special state (for example, the presentation control CPU 120 executes steps 113IWS806, S809, and S845 to execute a time-saving entry presentation when control is switched from the normal state to time-saving state C, and executes a time-saving promotion presentation when control is switched from time-saving state B to time-saving state C).

With this configuration, notifications can be presented in a way that is appropriate to the situation, giving players a sense of exclusivity and increasing their interest.

In this example, the presentation style of the notification effects (time-saving entry effect, time-saving promotion effect) performed during the change is different between a change in which the rescue time-saving count counter in the normal state = 0 and a change in which the rescue time-saving count counter in the time-saving state = 0, but the timing of the execution of the notification effects is not limited to during the change. For example, the presentation style of the notification effects performed during the pattern determination period from when the pattern stops to when the next change starts may be different between a change in which the rescue time-saving count counter in the normal state = 0 and a change in which the rescue time-saving count counter in the time-saving state = 0. In that case, the presentation style during the change may be the same.

(Means 114-3) In the means 114-1 or 114-2, a launch promotion notification means (for example, a part in the performance control CPU 120 that performs steps 113IWS806, S809, and S845) capable of executing a launch promotion notification (for example, displaying a right-hit notification image shown in FIG. 10-12 (H)) to promote the launch of the game medium toward a special path is provided,
The launch promotion notification means may be capable of executing a launch promotion notification when a special condition is met in the normal state, while restricting the execution of the launch promotion notification when a special condition is met in the special state (for example, the performance control CPU 120 may display a right-hit notification image based on control from the normal state to time-saving state C (see Figure 10-12 (H)), and may not display a right-hit notification image based on control from time-saving state B to time-saving state C (see Figure 10-15 (D)). Note that, although Figure 10-15 (D) displays a right-hit promotion image (a right-facing arrow displayed under the small pattern) based on control to time-saving state B, this right-hit promotion image is different from the right-hit notification image displayed based on control to time-saving state C).

Such a configuration can prevent the presentation from becoming too complicated.

If the execution of the launch promotion notification is restricted when a special condition is met in the special state, it may be possible to prohibit the execution of the launch promotion notification as shown in FIG. 10-15(D), or to execute the launch promotion notification in a less aggressive manner than when a special condition is met in the normal state. For example, the launch promotion notification may be made by reducing the display range or making the arrow transparent. In addition, when a special condition is met in the normal state, the launch promotion notification may be made on the image display device 5, which attracts a high level of attention from players, while when a special condition is met in the special state, the launch promotion notification may be made using light-emitting members or speakers 8L, 8R, which attract less attention from players than the image display device 5.

The launch promotion notification means can execute, in different modes, a first launch promotion notification (e.g., a right-facing arrow in FIG. 10-12 (H)) that promotes the launch of the gaming medium toward a special path when a special condition is met in the normal state, and a second launch promotion notification (e.g., a right-facing arrow in FIG. 10-15 (A) to (D)) that promotes the launch of the gaming medium toward a special path while the special state is being controlled. When a special condition is met in the special state, the first launch promotion notification may not be executed, but the second launch promotion notification may be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the presentation from becoming too complicated while issuing notifications according to the situation.

(Means 114-4) In any of means 114-1 to 114-3, the presentation style of the notification presentation may be the same when a special condition is met in the normal state and when a special condition is met in the special state (for example, the presentation executed when control is made from the normal state to time-saving state C may be the same as the presentation executed when control is made from time-saving state B to time-saving state C).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of variation patterns and the amount of performance data, and reduce memory capacity.

(Means 114-5) In any of means 114-1 to 114-4, when a transition from a normal state to a special state occurs based on the establishment of a special condition, specific suggestion effects that predict the variable display executed after the special condition occurs may be restricted (for example, when N in step 113IWS1014, the performance control CPU 120 executes step 113IWS1015), while when a transition from a low-advantage special state (for example, time-saving state B with 100 time-saving times) to a high-advantage special state (for example, time-saving state C with 800 time-saving times) occurs based on the establishment of a special condition, specific suggestion effects that predict the variable display executed after the special condition occurs may be executed (for example, when Y in step 113IWS1014, the performance control CPU 120 executes step 113IWS1019).

With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately provide specific suggestion presentations while minimizing the occurrence of problems with presentation.

(Means 114-6) Any of means 114-1 to 114-5 may be provided with a special suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion in the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 113IWS806 regardless of whether or not the time-saving state is in effect) that can execute a special suggestion effect related to the establishment of a special condition in a special state.

With this configuration, it is possible to heighten interest by creating anticipation of the realization of special conditions in special situations.

The presentation style of the special suggestion effects may differ between the normal state and the time-saving state. For example, the text color of the countdown effect, or the color or pattern of the effect of the effect effect may be different.

(Means 114-7) In any one of the means 114-1 to 114-6, a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that performs step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a variable pattern other than the variable patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, the variable patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4) in which the variable display period is shortened compared to the predetermined variable display pattern,
The variable display pattern determination means may be configured so that a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied has a higher probability of determining a shortened variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result than a special state controlled based on the derived display of a special display result (see Figures 10-1 (D) and (E)).

Such a configuration can prevent a decline in interest. For example, if a player has played for a long period of time and a loss in a long fluctuation pattern is selected with a high probability even when the time-saving rescue mode is activated, this can be expected to cause stress to the player. Therefore, by configuring the game so that a loss in a time-saving rescue mode via a short fluctuation pattern is more likely to be selected, the stress caused to the player can be reduced.

(Means 114-8) In any one of the means 114-1 to 114-7, a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that performs step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to the execution of a reach performance,
The variable display pattern determination means may be configured so that the special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied has a lower probability of determining a specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result than the special state controlled based on the derived display of a special display result (see Figures 10-1 (D) and (E)).

Such a configuration can prevent a decline in interest. For example, if the probability of a missed reach being selected is high even after a rescue time-saving state has been reached after playing for a long period of time, it is expected that this will cause stress to the player. Therefore, by configuring the game so that a missed reach variation pattern is less likely to be selected in a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, the stress caused to the player can be reduced.

Also, as described in JP2005-95449A, there have been machines that count the number of times the pattern changes, and control the machine to a certain variable state based on the count result reaching a value corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring (i.e., based on the machine changing a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring). Similarly, there have been machines that control the game state to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state in which the pattern changes frequently) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in JP2005-95449A, there was room for improvement in the control of the gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the number of times the variable display occurs. Therefore, the following gaming machines (means 115-1) to (means 115-4) are described in this characteristic section 113IW.

(Means 115-1) A gaming machine capable of controlling a game machine to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) that is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern),
A first passage area (e.g., a first start winning hole) is provided at a position where a game medium passing through a specific path (e.g., a left area) among a plurality of paths through which a game medium (e.g., a game ball) can move can pass;
A second passing area (e.g., a second start winning port) provided at a position where the game medium passing through a special path (e.g., a right area) different from the specific path can pass through;
a variable display execution means (e.g., a portion that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing, as variable display of identification information, variable display of first identification information based on the establishment of a first start condition (e.g., the entry of a game ball into a first start winning hole) and variable display of second identification information based on the establishment of a second start condition (e.g., the entry of a game ball into a second start winning hole);
A state control means capable of controlling the engine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the second start condition is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal state;
updating means for updating numerical information (e.g., a relief time reduction counter);
The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
The second starting condition is established based on the game medium passing through the second passing area,
The state control means is
The numerical information updated by the update means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by a specific value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter is “0”) corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed,
It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to the time-saving state A by performing step 113IWS537).
a special output means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that performs steps 113IWS42B and S42F) that can execute a special output (for example, output of easy-to-win state designation signals 1 and 3) that can distinguish between a special state that is controlled after an advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state via a jackpot (time-saving state A)) and a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established (for example, a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state C);
Further, a specific output means (e.g., a part of the game control microcomputer 100 that performs step 113IWS35) capable of executing a specific output (e.g., output of a launch position designation signal 3) capable of specifying that the game medium should be launched toward a special path in a special state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific output means is capable of executing a specific output in common for a special state controlled after an advantageous state and a special state controlled when a special condition is established (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 performs step 113IWS35 in common regardless of which time-saving flag is set).

With such a configuration, the trigger for control to the special state can be specified externally, and the specific signal can be standardized. For example, it can be specified externally whether the trigger for control to the time-saving state is the occurrence of a jackpot or a rescue time-saving.

In this example, the test device outputs a signal that can distinguish between the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, and can output a common signal that can specify that a right hit should be made whether the machine is controlled to the time-saving state via a jackpot or the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state. Similarly, an external device such as a hall management computer can output a signal that can distinguish between the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, and can output a common signal that can specify that a right hit should be made whether the machine is controlled to the time-saving state via a jackpot or the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state. This allows the hall management computer to perform operational analysis such as the rate at which the rescue time-saving state is reached during actual operation and the customer demographics of players when the rescue time-saving state is reached, and also allows for common signals.

(Means 115-2) In the means 115-1, the state control means can control to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed,
The special output means may be capable of executing a special output (e.g., output of easy-to-win state designation signals 2, 3) that can distinguish between a special state that is controlled when a special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., a time-saving state via a missed time-saving state (time-saving state B)) and a special state that is controlled when a special condition is met (e.g., a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state (time-saving state C)) (e.g., a part that performs steps 113IWS42D, S42F in the game control microcomputer 100).

With such a configuration, it is possible to externally specify the trigger for control to the special state. For example, it is possible to externally specify whether the trigger for control to the time-saving state is the stopping of a symbol that fails the time-saving state or a rescue time-saving state.

(Means 115-3) In the means 115-1 or 115-2, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed,
The degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
The state control means may be capable of controlling to a special state of advantage corresponding to the establishment of a special condition when a special condition is established and a special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may prioritize control to a time-shortened state via a rescue time-shortened state over control to a time-shortened state via a time-shortened state, so that when a time-shortened loss pattern is displayed in a fluctuation that results in a rescue time-shortened state (a fluctuation that causes the rescue time-shortened count counter to become 0), the state control means may control to a time-shortened state via a rescue time-shortened state).

Such a configuration can increase the player's chances of recovery.

(Means 115-4) In any of the means 115-1 to 115-3, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed,
The degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
When a special condition is met and a special display result is derived and displayed, a signal control means (for example, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that performs step 113IWS37E when a time-saving missing pattern is displayed in a stopped state even if the fluctuation results in a time-saving rescue) may be provided.

With such a configuration, the display results can be properly notified to the outside.

The contents shown in this characteristic section 113IW may also be applied to the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 105-1) to (Means 107-15) below.

(Means 105-1) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and is controllable to a favorable advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, the gaming machine comprising: a state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state; and an update means that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display; The state control means can control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes), and the advantageous state is of a plurality of types including a specific advantageous state (e.g., 10R jackpot A) and a special advantageous state (e.g., 10R jackpot B), and the advantageous degree of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the plurality of advantageous states is controlled to, and the advantageous degree of the special state controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is higher than the advantageous degree of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. (For example, after a 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to a 100-time time-saving state, and after a 10R jackpot B, it is mainly controlled to a time-saving state until the next jackpot occurs), and the advantage of the special state controlled when a special condition is met is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to a specific advantageous state (For example, after a 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to a 100-time time-saving state, and it may be controlled to a 800-time time-saving state as a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving. Such a configuration can increase the degree of rescue for the player.

(Means 105-2) When the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, the ratio of players being controlled to a special state with a special advantageous degree (for example, a time-saving state that continues until the next jackpot occurs) after being controlled to an advantageous state is different (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is different when the first special pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes, and the implementation of the variable display for the special condition to be established is different when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information). The number of rows may be common to the special number of times (for example, the number of times required to shorten the rescue time after a jackpot based on the variation of the first special symbol and after a jackpot based on the variation of the second special symbol is 800 times). With such a configuration, different gameplay characteristics are exhibited when the first identification information is variable displayed and when the second identification information is variable displayed, thereby increasing interest, while the special number of times is common to the first identification information and when the second identification information is variable displayed, preventing excessive gambling.

(Means 105-3) A setting means is provided that can set one of a plurality of setting values including an unfavorable setting value (e.g., setting value "1") with a first probability (e.g., about 1/319) of being controlled to an advantageous state, and an advantageous setting value (e.g., setting value "6") with a second probability (e.g., about 1/270) with a higher probability of being controlled to an advantageous state than the first probability, and when the setting is set to an unfavorable setting value, the special condition is more likely to be established than when the setting is set to an advantageous setting value, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, after a 10R jackpot A, the time-saving state is mainly controlled to 100 times, and the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving may be controlled to 800 times. With such a configuration, even when an unfavorable setting value is set, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, so that the player can be rescued more effectively.

(Means 105-4) A setting means is provided that can set one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which one of the multiple types is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is common regardless of which setting value is set, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which a special condition is established is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the length of the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving may be common regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling tendency due to the setting value being set, and to realize healthy gameplay.

(Means 105-5) When the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the second identification information, the proportion of the advantageous state among the multiple types is different, and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous degree of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is common (for example, when the time-shortened state is controlled through a rescue time-shortened state based on the variation of the first special symbol and when the time-shortened state is controlled through a rescue time-shortened state based on the variation of the second special symbol, both may be controlled to a time-shortened state of 800 times. With such a configuration, while different gameplay characteristics are exhibited in the case of performing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous degree of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is common regardless of the setting value, so that an appropriate rescue degree can be achieved while suppressing an increase in gambling.

(Means 105-6) A variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, fluctuation patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4) in which the variable display period is shortened compared to the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine the shortened variable display pattern more frequently when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is met than in a special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, in the case of a miss fluctuation, in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, a fluctuation pattern is selected using fluctuation pattern table E shown in Figure 10-1 (E), and in the time-saving state via a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern is selected using fluctuation pattern tables C and H shown in Figures 10-1 (C) and 10-1 (H)). With this configuration, a decline in interest can be prevented by transitioning to a special state with a faster play speed (for example, a time-saving state with a shorter fluctuation time) based on having played for a long period of time.

(Means 105-7) A variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to the execution of a reach performance, and the variable display pattern determination means may determine a specific variable display pattern at a lower rate when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when a special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, in the case of a miss variation, a variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 10-1 (E) in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, and a variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table H shown in FIG. 10-2 (H) in the time-saving state via a jackpot). With such a configuration, a decline in interest can be suppressed by transitioning to a special state with a high game speed (for example, a time-saving state in which the frequency of reach occurrence is suppressed) based on playing for a long period of time.

(Means 105-8) The update means can update specific numerical information (e.g., a time-saving count counter) different from the numerical information based on the execution of variable display in the special state, the state control means can control to a special state by setting special information (e.g., a time-saving flag) and can end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and can end the special state based on the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value (e.g., the value of the time-saving count counter: 0) corresponding to a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) in the special state, and the special state is ended based on the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value (e.g., the value of the time-saving count counter: 0) corresponding to a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) in the special state, and the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the update means even when the power supply is stopped, and an initialization means can initialize the memory contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition (e.g., an output signal from a clear switch is on when the power is turned on) is satisfied, and the initialization means may initialize the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and not initialize the numerical information (e.g., resetting whether the time-saving flag is set or not and the value of the time-saving count counter, while not resetting the value of the relief time-saving count counter). With this configuration, the player's chances of recovery can be increased even when certain conditions are met.

(Means 106-1) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, the gaming machine comprising: a state control means that can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state; an update means that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display; and a start condition (e.g., a first start winning slot or The present invention relates to a variable display executing means for executing a variable display when a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering the second start winning hole) is satisfied and a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a variable state) is satisfied, a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) for storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a backup memory means (e.g., a RAM 102) for holding numerical information and reserved information when the power supply is stopped, and a predetermined condition (e.g., a clear when the power is turned on) for clearing a predetermined condition. and recovery means (e.g., a portion that executes step S6 in the game control microcomputer 100) that executes recovery control to restore the numerical information updated by the update means based on the memory contents of the backup memory means and the reserved information stored in the reserved memory means based on the memory contents of the backup memory means when power supply is started. The state control means may be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (e.g., the value of a rescue time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, and after the recovery control is executed, the state control means may be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored reserved information, and the update means may update the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). This configuration makes it possible to optimize control through initialization while minimizing disadvantages to players when a power outage occurs.

(Means 106-2) When the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, the rate at which the player is controlled to a special state with a special advantageous degree (for example, a time-saving state that continues until the next jackpot occurs) after being controlled to an advantageous state differs from when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the selection rate of the jackpot type differs when the first special pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes, and the implementation of the variable display for the special condition to be established differs between when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information). The number of rows may be common to the special number of times (for example, the number of times required to shorten the rescue time after a jackpot based on the variation of the first special symbol and after a jackpot based on the variation of the second special symbol is 800 times). With such a configuration, different gameplay characteristics are exhibited when the first identification information is variable displayed and when the second identification information is variable displayed, thereby increasing interest, while the special number of times is common to the first identification information and when the second identification information is variable displayed, preventing excessive gambling.

(Means 106-3) A setting means is provided that can set one of a plurality of setting values including an unfavorable setting value (e.g., setting value "1") with a first probability (e.g., about 1/319) of being controlled to an advantageous state, and an advantageous setting value (e.g., setting value "6") with a second probability (e.g., about 1/270) with a higher probability of being controlled to an advantageous state than the first probability, and when the setting is set to an unfavorable setting value, the special condition is more likely to be established than when the setting is set to an advantageous setting value, and the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, after a 10R jackpot A, the time-saving state is mainly controlled to 100 times, and the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving may be controlled to 800 times. With such a configuration, even when an unfavorable setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, so that the player can be rescued more effectively.

(Means 106-4) A setting means is provided that can set one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which one of the multiple types of special states is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is common regardless of which setting value is set, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which a special condition is established is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the length of the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving may be common regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling tendency due to the setting value being set, and to realize healthy gameplay.

(Means 106-5) When the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the second identification information, the proportion of the advantageous state among the multiple types is different, and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous degree of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is common (for example, when the time-shortened state is controlled through a rescue time-shortened state based on the variation of the first special symbol and when the time-shortened state is controlled through a rescue time-shortened state based on the variation of the second special symbol, both may be controlled to a time-shortened state of 800 times. With such a configuration, while different gameplay characteristics are exhibited in the case of performing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous degree of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is common regardless of the setting value, so that an appropriate degree of rescue can be achieved while suppressing an increase in gambling.

(Means 106-6) A variable display pattern determination means is provided for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (e.g., variation patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4) in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means may determine the shortened variable display pattern more frequently when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when a special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (e.g., in the case of a miss variation, the variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 10-1 (E) in the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving, and the variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table H shown in FIG. 10-2 (H) in the time-saving state via the jackpot). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest by transitioning to a special state with a high game speed (e.g., a time-saving state with a short variation time) based on having played for a long period of time.

(Means 106-7) A variable display pattern determination means is provided for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (e.g., variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to the execution of a reach performance, and the variable display pattern determination means may determine a specific variable display pattern at a lower rate in the special state controlled when a special condition is established, when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result, than in the special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, in the case of a miss variation, a variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 10-1 (E) in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, and a variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table H shown in FIG. 10-2 (H) in the time-saving state via a jackpot). With such a configuration, a decline in interest can be suppressed by transitioning to a special state with a high game speed (for example, a time-saving state in which the frequency of reach occurrence is suppressed) based on the fact that the game has been played for a long period of time.

(Means 106-8) The update means can update specific numerical information (e.g., a time-saving count counter) different from the numerical information based on the execution of variable display in the special state, the state control means can control to a special state by setting special information (e.g., a time-saving flag) and can end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and can end the special state based on the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value (e.g., the value of the time-saving count counter: 0) corresponding to a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) in the special state, and the special state is ended based on the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value (e.g., the value of the time-saving count counter: 0) corresponding to a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) in the special state, and the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the update means even when the power supply is stopped, and an initialization means can initialize the memory contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition (e.g., an output signal from a clear switch is on when the power is turned on) is met, and the initialization means may initialize the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information when the predetermined condition is met, and not initialize the numerical information (e.g., resetting whether the time-saving flag is set or not and the value of the time-saving count counter, while not resetting the value of the relief time-saving count counter). With this configuration, the player's chances of recovery can be increased even when certain conditions are met.

(Means 107-1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the execution of a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), the gaming machine comprising: a state control means that can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state; and an update means that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display; The state control means can control to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the numerical information when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). The display control unit 100 further includes a suggestion effect execution means for updating the data, and executing a suggestion effect (for example, a teasing effect, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a subtitle display effect) related to the establishment of a special condition, and the suggestion effect execution means may vary the proportion of a plurality of effect modes in which the suggestion effect is executed according to the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the selection proportion of the numerical value to be displayed varies in the countdown effect (a numerical value corresponding to the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is selected at a proportion of 100%, but the value to be displayed at a proportion corresponding to the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction may be determined by lottery), the range in which the effect is displayed varies in the effect effect (a range corresponding to the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is displayed at a proportion of 100%, but the range to be displayed at a proportion corresponding to the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction may be determined by lottery), and the color of the subtitle display area varies in the subtitle display effect (see Figures 10-6 (C) and (D))), and the performance mode of the suggestion effect may be a mode suggesting the period until the special condition is established (see Figures 10-11 and 10-12). Such a configuration can increase interest by drawing attention to the presentation style of the suggestive presentation, and can also promote operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-2) The presentation mode of the suggestive presentation (e.g., countdown presentation) may be such that the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met can be specified (see Figs. 10-11 and 10-12). With such a configuration, the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met can be clearly notified to the player.

(Means 107-3) The suggestive presentation is a presentation in which a specific image is displayed (for example, an effect presentation in which an effect image is displayed), and the specific image is displayed in a number of different ways, differing in at least one of color and size (including the size of a single image and the size of the display range of multiple images), and the period until the suggested special condition is met may differ depending on the way the specific image is displayed (see Figures 10-11 and 10-12). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the aspect of the specific image.

(Means 107-4) A variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole) and the establishment of a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a variable state), a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is established but the start condition is not established, and a predetermined image (e.g., a reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved memory means. and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a video (e.g., a demo movie), and the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a suggestive performance (e.g., a caption display performance) when the predetermined image is displayed (e.g., a caption display performance and a demo movie performance can be executed in overlapping order. Either the display of the predetermined image and the suggestive performance can be executed first, or they can be executed simultaneously). The rate at which the suggestive performance is executed when the predetermined image is displayed may vary depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is established (see Figs. 10-6 (A) and (B)). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is executed, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

(Means 107-5) A variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a game ball into the first start winning port or the second start winning port) and the establishment of a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a variable state), a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is established but the start condition is not established, and a predetermined image (e.g., a demo image) when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved memory means. The game machine includes a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a video (e.g., a subtitle display effect), and the suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (e.g., a subtitle display effect) when the predetermined image is displayed (e.g., a subtitle display effect and a demo movie effect can be executed in overlapping order. Either the display of the predetermined image and the suggestive effect can be executed first, or they can be executed simultaneously). Depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is established, the rate at which the suggestive effect is executed in a predetermined manner when the predetermined image is displayed may differ (see Figs. 10-6 (C) and (D)). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the presence or absence of a suggestive effect, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

(Means 107-6) The device includes a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering the first start winning port or the second start winning port) and a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a changing state), a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a predetermined image (e.g., a demo movie) when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved memory means, and the suggestive performance execution means may be capable of executing a suggestive performance (e.g., a dialogue performance by audio output) based on at least one of detecting that an operation means (e.g., a hitting ball operation handle 30) has been operated and that a game medium has passed through a predetermined area (e.g., the first start winning port or the second start winning port) when the predetermined image is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide suggestive effects to players who actually play the game, which can promote operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-7) A setting means is provided that can set one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive effect execution means may vary the rate at which a suggestive effect (e.g., a caption display effect) is executed depending on which setting value is set (see Figs. 10-6 (A) and (B)). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive effect is executed, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by suggesting the setting value.

(Means 107-8) A setting means is provided that can set one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive performance execution means may vary the rate at which a suggestive performance (e.g., a caption display performance) is executed in a specific manner (e.g., "red") depending on which setting value is set (see Figs. 10-6 (C) and (D)). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the manner of the suggestive performance, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by suggesting the setting value.

(Means 107-9) A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set setting value (for example, a part in the effect control CPU 120 of variant 1 that executes a setting suggestion effect as an effect during change), the setting suggestion effect execution means may have a different rate of executing a setting suggestion effect depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion effect execution means may have a common rate of executing a suggestion effect regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestion effect is executed, and the complexity of control can be suppressed.

(Means 107-10) A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set setting value (for example, a part in the effect control CPU 120 of variant 1 that executes a setting suggestion effect as an effect during change), the setting suggestion effect execution means may have a different rate of executing a setting suggestion effect by a special mode (for example, a second mode) depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion effect execution means may have a common rate of executing a suggestion effect by a specific mode (for example, "red") regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and the complexity of control can be suppressed.

(Means 107-11) The suggestive effect execution means may be configured to execute suggestive effects (for example, displaying an initial result according to the number of times until the rescue time reduction) at different rates during a specific period after the start of power supply, depending on whether an initialization process is executed when power supply is started or a recovery process is executed. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive effect is executed, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

(Means 107-12) A variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA3-1, PA3-2), and the variable display pattern determination means can determine a special variable display pattern when a special condition is met, and can further include a specific notification effect execution means that does not determine a special variable display pattern before the special condition is met (for example, variable patterns PA3-1, PA3-2 can be changed only when the value of the rescue time-saving counter becomes 0), and can execute a specific notification effect (for example, time-saving entry effect) that notifies the player that the special state will be controlled when the special condition is met. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special state will be controlled when the special condition is met, and to clearly notify the player of the change in the game state, thereby increasing the interest when the special condition is met.

(Means 107-13) A variable display pattern determination means is provided for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., variable patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4 not accompanied by a reach effect) and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3, PB2-1 to PB2-3 accompanied by a reach effect), and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the specific display result is not obtained (see Figures 10-1 and 10-2), and when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the probability of determining a specific variable display pattern rather than a predetermined variable display pattern is higher. In the case where the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less is high (see FIG. 10-1 (A)), the rate of determining a specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result is lower in a predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, a variable period in which the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in a period before the predetermined period (for example, a variable period in which the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 or more). (For example, when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 or more, a variable pattern is selected using the variable pattern table shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), and when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, a variable pattern is selected using a variable pattern table in which the selection rate of the variable patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3 in FIG. 10-2 (F) and (G) is changed to 0%). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(Means 107-14) A preview performance execution means is provided that is capable of executing a preview performance that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and where it is not the specific display result, and the preview performance may be executed more frequently when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result than when it is not the specific display result, and the preview performance may be executed less frequently in a specified period before the special condition is established than in a period prior to the specified period when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result. With such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 107-15) A preview performance execution means (e.g., a portion in the performance control CPU 120 that executes step 113IWS802A) is provided that is capable of executing a preview performance that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in a specific mode (e.g., "red") and a predetermined mode (e.g., "blue") in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result, the preview performance may be executed more frequently in the specific mode than in the predetermined mode when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, and the preview performance may be executed more frequently in the specific mode during a predetermined period before the special condition is established than during a period prior to the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result. With such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Explanation of Characteristic Part 116IW)
Next, the characteristic part 108IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characteristic part 108IW, the game state is controlled to one of low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, high probability/high base state, and high probability/low base state. In this example, in the high base state, the average special chart fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the average normal chart fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "normal chart hit" in the normal chart game is higher compared to the normal state. For example, while the normal chart hit probability is 10% in the normal state, the normal chart hit probability is increased to 90% in the time-saving state, making it easier for the game ball to win the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning port) described later. However, this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, in the high base state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab may be lengthened compared to the normal state, so that the game ball is more likely to win the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning hole). In addition, in a configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning hole) shown in FIG. 1 is provided, in the high base state, the game ball may be more likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning hole) compared to the normal state.

In addition, in this example, the probability of hitting a jackpot (jackpot probability) is increased in the high probability state compared to the low probability state. Hereinafter, in this example, the high base state is also referred to as the time-saving state, and the high probability state is also referred to as the probability change state.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result is a jackpot and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled after the jackpot game ends, there are also cases where the variable display result is a miss and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled based on the time-saving miss pattern being derived and displayed. Hereinafter, the time-saving state (high base state) controlled after the variable display result is a jackpot and the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed is also referred to as the time-saving state via a miss.

In addition, in this example, even if the next jackpot does not occur even after the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or after the occurrence of a jackpot, the time-saving state (high base state) may be controlled (hereinafter, the time-saving state (high base state) controlled in this manner is also referred to as the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state, or simply the rescue time-saving state. It is also referred to as "play time"). Note that in this example, even if the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) without the next jackpot occurring after the rescue time-saving state occurs, it is not controlled to the rescue time-saving state again. However, this is not limited to such a configuration, and if the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) without the next jackpot occurring after the rescue time-saving state occurs, it may be configured so that it may be controlled to the rescue time-saving state again. Also, for example, even if the next jackpot or the time-saving state does not occur even after the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) after the time-saving state is not lost, it may be configured so that it may be controlled to the time-saving state (rescue time-saving state).

In the high base state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, (3) control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning port) and the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port), and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be performed, but all of the controls (1) to (4) may be performed, or some of the controls (1) to (4) may not be performed. For example, the controls (1) to (4) performed may be different or the same for the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a missed time-saving state, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state.

Also, for example, in a low base state, the probability of a normal hit may be 1/1, or the probability of a miss may be so low that the probability of a normal hit is effectively 1/1. In other words, even if the control described above in (1) is not performed when the rescue time reduction is activated, a high base state may be achieved by performing some or all of the controls described above in (2) to (4).

In addition, it is preferable to define the number of fluctuations n until control is applied to the rescue time reduction and the number of time reductions N in the rescue time reduction as follows.
2.5P≦n≦3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of the jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time-saving times N is 120 to 1140. As described later, in this example, when the setting value "6" with the highest jackpot probability is set, the jackpot probability is about 1/270, so the number of fluctuations n is 675 to 810, and the number of time-saving times N is 108 to 1026. Also, when the setting value "1" with the lowest jackpot probability is set, the jackpot probability is about 1/319, so the number of fluctuations n is 797 to 957, and the number of time-saving times N is 127 to 1212. And, in this example, both the number of fluctuations n and the number of time-saving times N are set to "800", and the above-mentioned regulations are satisfied when they are set to any of the setting values. It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and may be configured to satisfy the above-mentioned regulations at least when the setting value "1" with the lowest jackpot probability is set.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 108IW, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

(First embodiment)
Next, a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW will be described.

(Type of time reduction)
11-1 is an explanatory diagram showing the types of time-saving in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In this example, the time-saving state (high base state) can be distinguished into a time-saving state A that is a time-saving state via a big win (low probability/high base state), a time-saving state B that is a time-saving state via a time-saving miss (low probability/high base state), and a time-saving state C that is a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving (low probability/high base state).

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-1, in this example, if a 6R jackpot A occurs during the normal state (low base state) and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to 100 times, and if a 6R jackpot A occurs during the time-saving state (high base state) and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to 200 times. That is, in this example, the advantage of the time-saving state controlled after the jackpot game is different depending on the game state when the jackpot occurs. With this configuration, the advantage can be made different depending on the game state, and interest can be improved. In this example, if any of the 6R jackpots B to D occurs, regardless of whether the occurrence state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled until the next jackpot occurs after the jackpot game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-1, in this example, if a time-saving miss occurs during the normal state and the state is controlled to the time-saving state (high base state), the state is controlled to a time-saving state (high base state) with 100 times of time-saving. On the other hand, if a time-saving miss occurs during the time-saving state (high base state), the number of times of time-saving is not updated. In other words, even if a time-saving miss occurs in the time-saving state (high base state) and the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) is 50 times, the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) remains at 50 times and is not updated. Therefore, in this example, a time-saving miss that occurs during the time-saving state (high base state) is essentially invalid. Also, in this example, as described later, there is no case in which a time-saving miss is determined during the probability state (high probability state).

The method of controlling the number of times of time-saving when the time-saving miss occurs is not limited to that shown in FIG. 11-1. For example, when the time-saving miss occurs during the time-saving state (high base state), the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) may be set again (for example, set to 100 times), or when the time-saving miss occurs only during the time-saving state (high base state) via the time-saving miss in the time-saving state (high base state), the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) may be set again. Also, for example, even when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time-saving may be controlled to 100 times during the normal state, and the number of times of time-saving may be controlled to 0 times during the time-saving state (i.e., the time-saving state falls to the normal state). Various modes of the method of controlling the number of times of time-saving when the time-saving miss occurs may be considered.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-1, in this example, when rescue time-saving occurs during normal and time-saving states, the time-saving state is controlled to a time-saving state with 800 times of time-saving. Thus, in this example, the time-saving state via rescue time-saving has a higher advantage than the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a missed time-saving state, because the number of times of time-saving is greater.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this example, if a rescue time-saving state occurs during a time-saving state via a jackpot or a time-saving miss (high base state), the number of time-saving times is updated, whereas if a time-saving miss occurs during a time-saving state that includes a rescue time-saving state (high base state), the number of time-saving times is not updated. With this configuration, in this example, the advantage of the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state can be secured, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased (for example, the amount of investment by the player can be reduced).

In this example, after the game is controlled to a time-saving state of 800 times due to the rescue time-saving function, even if the 800 fluctuation display times end without a jackpot occurring, the game will not be controlled to the rescue time-saving function again.

Here, the rescue time-saving achievement rate for each set value will be explained. The rescue time-saving achievement rate is the rate at which the game is controlled to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving. The time-saving state via rescue time-saving is controlled by making n (800) fluctuations without being controlled to a jackpot game state, so the rescue time-saving achievement rate K can be calculated as follows.
K = (1-ML)n = {(P-1)÷P}n
(K = rescue time reduction achievement rate, P = denominator of big hit probability ML, n = number of activations)

For example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 8.1%; if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/310, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 7.5%; if the setting value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 6.9%; if the setting value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 6.3%; if the setting value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 5.7%; if the setting value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the rescue time reduction achievement rate. This makes it possible to rescue the player even if the set value of the jackpot probability is low.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
11-2 to 11-4 are explanatory diagrams showing the variation patterns (variation times) of the special symbols and the decorative symbols in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. EXT shown in Fig. 11-2 to 11-4 is the second byte data of the performance control command (2 bytes) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in Figures 11-2 to 11-4, 14 types of first variation patterns #A to #N for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and 13 types of second variation patterns #A to #M for the second special symbol and decorative symbol are used.

When the first special symbol variable display is executed, if it is in a low probability/low base state (normal state), the variable pattern table A for the first special symbol in a low probability/low base state shown in FIG. 11-2 (A) is selected and the variable pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-2 (A), if it is in a low probability/low base state (normal state), when the first special symbol variable display is executed, one of the first variable patterns #A to #F is determined.

In addition, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, if the state is high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), the variation pattern is determined by selecting the variation pattern table B for the first special symbol in the high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 11-2 (B). As shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), if the state is high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), when the first special symbol variation display is executed, one of the first variation patterns #G to #I is determined.

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 11-2(B), the fluctuation time specified by each of the first fluctuation patterns #G to #I is extremely long at 10 minutes or 5 minutes, compared to the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG. 11-2(A). Therefore, in this example, when the first special symbol fluctuation display is executed in the high probability/low base state (first probability fluctuation state), a long fluctuation display with a fluctuation time of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is executed.

In addition, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, if it is in a high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), the variation pattern is determined by selecting the variation pattern table C for the first special symbol in a high probability/high base state shown in FIG. 11-2 (C). As shown in FIG. 11-2 (C), if it is in a high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), when the first special symbol variation display is executed, in addition to the first variation patterns #A to #F, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns #J and #K.

As shown in FIG. 11-2 (C), in the high probability/high base state (second probability state), if the display result of the first special symbol fluctuation display is a miss or a small win, if the first reserved memory count is 0, the first fluctuation pattern #J, #K with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is determined. On the other hand, if the first reserved memory count is 1 or more, the first fluctuation pattern #A, #D with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is determined.

In addition, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, if the probability is low/base state is high, the variation pattern table D for the first special symbol in the low probability/high base state shown in FIG. 11-3 (D) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (D), if the probability is low/base state is high, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, in addition to the first variation patterns #A to #F, one of the first variation patterns #J, #K, #L is determined.

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (D), in the low probability/high base state, if the display result of the first special symbol variation display is a miss or a small win, if the first reserved memory count is 0, the first variation pattern #J, #K with a variation time of 10 seconds is determined. On the other hand, if the first reserved memory count is 1 or more, the first variation pattern #A, #D with a variation time of 5 seconds is determined. Also, as described below, the low probability/high base state ends when a predetermined number of variation displays are executed, but when the variation display of the final variation of the low probability/high base state is executed, the first variation pattern #L (special variation pattern) with a variation time of 5 seconds is determined.

In addition, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, if the variable display results in a rescue time reduction (if the value of the rescue time reduction counter described below becomes 0), the variable pattern is determined by selecting the first special symbol variable pattern table E for when rescue time reduction is established, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (E). As shown in FIG. 11-3 (E), if the variable display results in a rescue time reduction, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, either the first variable pattern #M or #N is determined.

As shown in Figures 11-2 to 11-3, the first variation patterns #M and #N are variation patterns exclusively used when the rescue time reduction is established, and are not used for variation displays that do not result in rescue time reduction, but are used only for variation displays that result in rescue time reduction. In this example, when the first variation pattern #M (missing rescue time reduction entry) is determined, as described below, a time reduction entry presentation (see, for example, Figures 11-23 (B) and (C)) is executed to notify the player that the time reduction will be controlled (i.e., the rescue time reduction will be controlled to a low probability/high base state). With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time reduction has been established and that the time reduction will be controlled to a low probability/high base state, and it is possible to increase the interest when the rescue time reduction is established.

In addition, when the first variation pattern #N (a false jackpot with rescue time-saving entry) is determined, a presentation is executed that is the same as the time-saving entry presentation (see, for example, Figures 11-23 (B) and (C)) that notifies the player that the time-saving state will be controlled (i.e., that the rescue time-saving state will be controlled to a low probability/high base state), and then a presentation is executed that notifies the player that a jackpot will be reached. With this configuration, the player is informed that a jackpot will be reached after first recognizing that the rescue time-saving state has been entered, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases interest.

When the second special symbol variation display is executed, if it is in a high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), the variation pattern is determined by selecting the variation pattern table A for the second special symbol in a high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 11-4(A). As shown in FIG. 11-4(A), if it is in a high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), when the second special symbol variation display is executed, in addition to the second variation patterns #A to #F, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #J and #K.

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), in the high probability/low base state (first probability state), if the display result of the second special symbol fluctuation display is a miss or a small win, if the second reserved memory count is 0, the second fluctuation pattern #J, #K with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is determined. On the other hand, if the second reserved memory count is 1 or more, the second fluctuation pattern #A, #D with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is determined.

In addition, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, if the state is not high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), the variation pattern is determined by selecting the variation pattern table B for the second special symbol for states other than the high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 11-4(B). As shown in FIG. 11-4(B), if the second special symbol variation display is executed when the state is not high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), one of the second variation patterns #G to #I is determined.

In the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 11-4(B), the fluctuation time specified by each of the second fluctuation patterns #G to #I is extremely long at 10 minutes or 5 minutes, compared to the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG. 11-4(A). Therefore, in this example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in a state other than the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state) (low probability/low base state, high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), low probability/high base state), a fluctuation display of a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is executed.

In addition, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, if the variable display results in a rescue time reduction (if the value of the rescue time reduction counter described below becomes 0), the variable pattern is determined by selecting the variable pattern table E for the second special pattern when the rescue time reduction is established, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (C). As shown in FIG. 11-4 (C), if the variable display results in a rescue time reduction, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, either the second variable pattern #L or #M is determined.

As shown in FIG. 11-4, the second variation patterns #L and #M are variation patterns exclusively used when the rescue time reduction is established, and are not used for variation displays that do not result in rescue time reduction, but are used only for variation displays that result in rescue time reduction. In this example, when the second variation pattern #L (missing rescue time reduction entry) is determined, a time reduction entry presentation (see, for example, FIG. 11-23 (B) and (C)) is executed to notify the player that the time reduction will be controlled to a time reduction state (i.e., that the rescue time reduction will be controlled to a low probability/high base state), as described below. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time reduction has been established and that the time reduction will be controlled to a time reduction state (low probability/high base state), and it is possible to increase the interest when the rescue time reduction is established. Furthermore, if the second variation pattern #M (a false jackpot with rescue time-saving entry) is determined, a presentation is executed that is the same as the time-saving entry presentation (see, for example, FIG. 11-23 (B) and (C)) that notifies the player that the time-saving state will be controlled (i.e., that the rescue time-saving state will be controlled to a low probability/high base state), and then a presentation is executed that notifies the player that a jackpot will be hit. With this configuration, the player is notified that a jackpot will be hit after first recognizing that the rescue time-saving state has been entered, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases interest.

In this example, the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the miss time-saving state, and the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state are configured to use the same fluctuation pattern table (i.e., the average fluctuation time is the same) in all cases, but this is not limited to the above. For example, different fluctuation pattern tables may be used (i.e., the average fluctuation time is different) in the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the miss time-saving state, and the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state. For example, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state may be configured to have a higher rate of being determined as a fluctuation pattern with a shortened fluctuation time than the time-saving state via the jackpot or the miss time-saving state, and the average fluctuation time may be shorter. With this configuration, when the rescue time-saving state occurs (i.e., when a jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the period until the next jackpot is controlled is shortened, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Also, for example, in a time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving, unlike a time-saving state controlled via a time-saving miss or a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern that results in a reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) at the time of a miss is not determined (or the rate at which it is determined is low), and the average fluctuation time may be shortened. With this configuration, when the time-saving state is rescued (i.e. when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), a reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) does not result in a miss, so a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(First special symbol normal processing)
11-5 to 11-7 are flow charts showing the first special symbol normal processing (step S110A) in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. The first special symbol normal processing is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. Note that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A when the first special symbol display device 4A is not displaying the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120) (step 061IWS50A). Note that when the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120), that is, when the value of the reel control process flag is not a value indicating the gate passage waiting processing (step S121) to small win end processing (step S128), and when neither a big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor a small win game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened) is in progress.

If the value of the reel control process flag indicates normal reel control processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the first reserved memory number (step 061IWS51A). Specifically, it checks the count value of the first reserved memory number counter. If the first reserved memory number is 0, it sends a first customer waiting demo display designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS52A).

If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 and stores it in the first random number buffer area of RAM 102 (step 061IWS53A), decreases the value of the first reserved memory number by 1 (decreases the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1), and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 061IWS54A). That is, each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number are extracted always matches the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. That is, in this example, the configuration is such that the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is established, so that the order in which each random number value is extracted can be identified. In this example, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number was extracted is also stored so that it can be determined.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the transmission of a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the presentation control board 12 (step 061IWS55A). Note that in this example, the processing of step 061IWS55A is executed, so that a setting value command is sent each time the variable display starts, but a setting value command is also sent when the setting change processing (processing to change the setting value) is executed when the power is turned on.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to that shown in this example, and may be, for example, configured to send a setting value command each time the variable display ends, or configured to send a setting value command during the variable display.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56A). Specifically, if the probability change flag and high base flag are off, it determines that the state is a low probability/low base state and transmits a low probability/low base background designation command; if the probability change flag is off and the high base flag is on, it determines that the state is a low probability/high base state and transmits a low probability/high base background designation command; if the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is on, it determines that the state is a high probability/high base state and transmits a high probability/high base background designation command; and if the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is off, it determines that the state is a high probability/low base state and transmits a high probability/low base background designation command.

The processing of step 061IWS56A (and step 061IWS56B described later) in which a background designation command corresponding to the current game state is sent to the performance control CPU 120 may be executed after the update processing of the rescue time-saving count counter and the high base count counter and the control processing related to the high base flag are performed in the first special symbol normal processing (and the second special symbol normal processing described later). That is, when the fluctuation starts, if the rescue time-saving count counter is updated and the rescue time-saving state (low probability/high base state) is controlled due to the establishment of the rescue time-saving state, a low probability/high base background designation command may be immediately sent to change the background, or if the high base count counter is updated and the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) is ended and the state is controlled to the normal state, a low probability/low base background designation command may be immediately sent to change the background.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 061IWS5601A). If the high probability flag is set, i.e., if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the game proceeds to step 061IWS5617A.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 061IWS5601A (and step 061IWS5601B described later), if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the update processing of the rescue time reduction counter after step 061IWS5602A (and step 061IWS5602B described later) is not executed. Therefore, in this example, if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction does not decrease even if the change display is executed, and only if the game is not in a high probability state (low probability state), the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction decreases when the change display is executed. Note that this is not limited to the configuration of this example, and the game may be configured so that the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is uniformly decreased when the change display is executed even in a high probability state (high probability state).

When the probability flag is not set, that is, when the probability is low, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 061IWS5602A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 061IWS5603A). In this example, the process of step 061IWS5603A and the process of step 061IWS5603B described later are executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the first special pattern variable display is executed or the second special pattern variable display is executed. That is, in this example, the rescue time reduction counter is configured to be updated at the timing when the first special pattern variable display starts and the timing when the second special pattern variable display starts. This configuration allows for optimization of the update of the rescue time reduction counter in a configuration in which the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the second special symbol changes are executed in parallel.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 061IWS5604A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 061IWS5604A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and controls to send a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5605A). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to send command 9501 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 126, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to send command 957E (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

The game control microcomputer 100 then checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 061IWS5606A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the game proceeds to step 061IWS5617A. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of rescue time reduction (step 061IWS5607A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets "800" to the high base counter, which indicates the remaining total number of times that the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display that can be executed in the high base state (step 061IWS5608A).

In this example, when the value of the rescue time-saving counter subtracted at the start of the fluctuation becomes 0 by the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later) and a rescue time-saving occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 800 times (low probability/high base state). Also, if the state in which the rescue time-saving occurs is a time-saving state via a jackpot or a missed time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the time-saving state is controlled again to 800 times (low probability/high base state). Therefore, in this example, if the next jackpot does not occur even after the 800 fluctuation display is executed after the RAM clear processing or after the end of a jackpot game, a rescue time-saving occurs and the state is controlled to the time-saving state.

As described above, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-1, the time-saving state via rescue time-saving has a higher advantage than the time-saving state via a jackpot or a time-saving miss because the number of time-saving times is greater. In this example, steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later) are processed so that the number of time-saving times is updated if a rescue time-saving occurs during a time-saving state via a jackpot or a time-saving miss (high base state). For example, when a rescue time-saving occurs during a time-saving state via a jackpot or a time-saving miss (high base state) with 50 remaining times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state), the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) is updated to 800. On the other hand, in this example, the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A (and steps 061IWS061IWS2030B to S2031B) described later is configured so that if a time-saving deviation occurs during a time-saving state (high base state) including a rescue time-saving, the number of time-saving times is not updated. For example, in a time-saving state (high base state) via rescue time-saving, when the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) is 500, even if a time-saving deviation occurs, the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) remains at 500 and is not updated. With this configuration, in this example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern are executed in parallel, the advantage of the time-saving state via rescue time-saving can be secured, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased (for example, the amount of investment by the player can be reduced).

In this example, the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described below) and the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A (and steps 061IWS061IWS2030B to S2031B described below) are configured to control the state to a time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving effect, which is more advantageous than a time-saving effect that is not achieved, when a time-saving effect miss is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the rescue time-saving effect is achieved. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special pattern in which the rescue time-saving effect is achieved (time-saving effect miss) begins, control is performed to transition from the normal state (low probability/low base state) to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A). Then, the time-saving miss is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol where the time-saving rescue is established, but in this case the number of time-saving times is not updated due to the time-saving miss (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). With this configuration, even if the time-saving miss is derived and displayed in the variable display where the time-saving rescue is established, the advantage of the time-saving state due to the time-saving rescue can be secured, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased (for example, the amount of investment by the player can be reduced).

In addition, in this example, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter subtracted at the start of the fluctuation becomes 0 and a rescue time reduction occurs, the value of the high base counter is set to "800", but the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not set. If a rescue time reduction occurs, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800" when the RAM clear process is executed after the rescue time reduction occurs, or when a jackpot occurs. Therefore, in this example, even if the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) without a jackpot occurring after the rescue time reduction occurs, a rescue time reduction does not occur (i.e., the rescue time reduction is not controlled continuously to the 800th rescue time reduction).

Specifically, if the variable display is executed 800 times without a jackpot occurring during the rescue time reduction, the rescue time reduction ends and the game transitions to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (i.e., no new rescue time reduction occurs). Also, even if 800 variable displays are executed in the normal state to which the game transitions without a jackpot occurring, a rescue time reduction does not occur. After a rescue time reduction occurs, the rescue time reduction occurs again when, for example, a jackpot occurs after the rescue time reduction occurs and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800", and the next jackpot does not occur even if 800 variable displays are executed after the jackpot game ends, or when a RAM clear process is executed after the rescue time reduction occurs and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800", and the next jackpot does not occur even if 800 variable displays are executed after the RAM clear process.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to this example. For example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800" when the rescue time reduction occurs, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 each time a variable display is executed during the rescue time reduction. As soon as the rescue time reduction ends, a new rescue time reduction is established, and the rescue time reduction is continuously controlled until the next jackpot occurs.

In addition, for example, when the rescue time reduction is established, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800", and the process of updating the rescue time reduction counter is not executed during the rescue time reduction. This means that even if 800 variable display cycles are executed without a jackpot occurring during the rescue time reduction, the rescue time reduction will not control the player (i.e., the player will not be continuously controlled to the rescue time reduction of 800 cycles), but if 800 variable display cycles are executed without a jackpot occurring after the rescue time reduction ends, the rescue time reduction may occur.

In addition, for example, when the rescue time reduction is established, the rescue time reduction count counter is set to "800" and the high base count counter is set to "200". In this way, if the variable display is executed 200 times during the rescue time reduction without a jackpot occurring, the rescue time reduction ends and the normal state (low probability/low base state) is entered, and if the variable display is executed 600 times without a jackpot occurring in the normal state to which the rescue time reduction is entered, the rescue time reduction may be initiated.

In addition, in this example, the processing of step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later) is executed to set the number of time-saving times to 800, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until a rescue time-saving occurs, but this is not limited to the above. For example, in step 061IWS5608A (or step 061IWS5608B described later), the high base number counter may be set to a value greater than "800," or a value less than this.

In addition, in step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later), the high base count counter may be configured to be set to values corresponding to multiple types of time reductions. For example, the high base count counter may be configured to be set to "100" if a rescue time reduction occurs the first time, and to be set to "800" if a rescue time reduction occurs the second time.

Also, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later), a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times determined by the lottery process may be set in the high base number counter. In this case, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined to be 100 times with a 10% probability, and 800 times with a 90% probability. Also, when the number of time-saving times is determined by a lottery process, the number of time-saving times may be determined by using the type-determining random numbers used to determine the jackpot type and the time-saving type, or the number of time-saving times may be determined by using a dedicated random number.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a rescue fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation display is one in which rescue time reduction is established (step 061IWS5609A). By processing step 061IWS5609A, it becomes possible to identify that the fluctuation display is one in which rescue time reduction is established in the first fluctuation pattern setting process described below, and to determine the fluctuation pattern to be used exclusively when rescue time reduction is established.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the right-hit display 26 to start lighting up (step 061IWS5610A) and also controls the performance control CPU 120 to send a right-hit lighting start command (step 061IWS5611A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

In this example, the processing of steps 061IWS5610A to S5611A (and steps 061IWS5610B to S5611B described later) is executed, and in this example, when the rescue time reduction is established, the right-hit indicator 26 starts to light up. That is, in this example, in a low probability/high base state, the first special symbol variable display is executed in the normal variable time, whereas the second special symbol variable display is executed in the long variable. However, since it is in a high base state, the normal symbol hit probability is high at 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently in the open state. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the right side of the game area and perform the launch operation of the game ball (right hit) in order to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning port and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, and the right-hit indicator 26 is lit up. In addition, if the right-hit indicator 26 is already lit, such as when a rescue time-saving event occurs during time-saving mode, the processing of steps 061IWS5610A to S5611A (and steps 061IWS5610B to S5611B described below) may be omitted.

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 061IWS5604A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets 7F (H) uniformly as the EXT data and controls to send the command 957F (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5614A). Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 061IWS5615A). Whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the rescue time reduction counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and controls to send a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5616A). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to send command 9601 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 800, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to send command 9608 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, proceed to step 061IWS5617A.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 counts the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction and transmits a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction and execute a presentation suggesting that the rescue time reduction will be established or a presentation suggesting the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction (for example, a teasing presentation or a countdown presentation, as described below).

In addition, for example, unlike the configuration of this example, in a configuration in which rescue time reductions can occur consecutively, the configuration may be such that the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is sent only when a rescue time reduction occurs the first time, and the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is not sent when a rescue time reduction occurs the second time or later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the value of the high base count counter is "0" (step 061IWS5617A), and if it is "0", proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

In this example, the state is controlled to one of the low probability/low base state, low probability/high base state, high probability/high base state, and high probability/low base state, so that when in the high base state, the state is controlled to one of the low probability/high base state and the high probability/high base state. However, in the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state) is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2269, S2274 described below), so the number of times the variable display is executed in the high base state is not managed, and the value of the high base count counter is set to "0". Therefore, when the value of the high base count counter is not "0", the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state.

In the first embodiment, as described below, the high base flag is set and the number of times the variable display is executed in the high base state is managed when the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state at the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R jackpot A, when the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state via a time-saving miss, and when the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state via a rescue time-saving. In this example, when the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state, the low probability/high base state is ended and the state is transitioned to the normal state (low probability/low base state) based on the fact that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol have been executed a total of a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, or 800 times. See FIG. 11-1).

If the value of the high base count counter is not "0", i.e., in the low probability/high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base count counter (step 061IWS5618A) and determines whether it has become "0" (step 061IWS5619A). If the value of the high base count counter has not become "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A. In this example, the process of step 061IWS5618A and the process of step 061IWS5618B described later are executed, and the value of the high base count counter is updated regardless of whether the variable display of the first special pattern or the variable display of the second special pattern is executed.

When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that the game is in a high base state (step 061IWS5620A). In this example, if step 061IWS5619A (or step 061IWS5619B described later) judges that the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the second special symbol changes have been performed a total of a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100, 200, or 800 times; see FIG. 11-1), and the processing of step 061IWS5620A (or step 061IWS5620B described later) is executed, terminating the low probability/high base state and transitioning to the normal state (low probability/low base state).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-hit display 26 should be extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 061IWS5621A). The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is intended to continue the right-hit notification and continue the right-hit state until the fluctuation display ends.

The game control microcomputer 100 then determines whether or not the second special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot (step 061IWS57A). Specifically, if the second jackpot flag, which indicates that a jackpot will occur based on the display of the fluctuating second special symbol, is set, it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot. If it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot, it proceeds to step 061IWS71A without carrying out any processing beyond step 061IWS58A. As a result, if the first special symbol starts fluctuating during a jackpot fluctuating second special symbol, it is configured to forcibly determine a miss regardless of whether a jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly determining a miss is not limited to the above. For example, if the second special symbol is fluctuating between big wins, a process may be performed to set a miss random number (fixed value) as the random number for determining a win, and the process may proceed to step 061IWS59A, forcing a miss regardless of which random number for determining a win was obtained at the time of the initial winning.

In addition, for example, if the second special symbol is fluctuating as a big win in step 061IWS57A, the processing of steps 061IWS58A to S63A may not be performed, and a miss random number (fixed value) may be set as the random number for winning judgment to perform a small win judgment, forcing a miss regardless of which random number for winning judgment was obtained at the time of the initial winning.

If the second special symbol is not in the jackpot fluctuation state, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the random number for hit determination from the first random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 061IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot has occurred if the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In step 061IWS59A, the game state is taken into account and a determination is made as to whether or not a jackpot has occurred is made using either the non-variable jackpot determination table or the variable jackpot determination table.

As described above, in this example, the advantage of the time-saving state controlled after a jackpot game is different depending on the game state when the jackpot occurs. Specifically, when a 6R jackpot A occurs during a normal state (low base state) and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to have 100 times the number of time-saving times, and when a 6R jackpot A occurs during a time-saving state (high base state) and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to have 200 times the number of time-saving times. With this configuration, in this example, the execution of the jackpot determination module in step 061IWS59A (described later and step 061IWS59B) is configured to be executed after the update process of the rescue time-saving count counter and the setting process of the high base flag in steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A (described later and step 061IWS5602B to S5608B).

Therefore, in this example, if the display result of the variable display that establishes the rescue time reduction is a jackpot, it is assumed that a jackpot has occurred in the time-saving state due to the rescue time reduction, and the advantage of the time-saving state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot game is determined. Specifically, if the display result of the variable display that establishes the rescue time reduction is a 6R jackpot A, it is assumed that a 6R jackpot A has occurred in the time-saving state due to the rescue time reduction, and it is controlled to a time-saving state with 200 time reductions after the end of the jackpot game (the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2284, S2286 to S2287 described later). With this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of rescue for the player due to the rescue time reduction (for example, to reduce the amount of investment by the player).

When it is decided that a jackpot has been reached (step 061IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot has been reached based on the varying display of the first special symbol (step 061IWS61A). Then, based on the random number for determining the type of jackpot, it determines whether the jackpot type is 6R jackpot A, 6R jackpot B, 6R jackpot C, or 6R jackpot D (step 061IWS62A), stores the jackpot type (step 061IWS63A), and proceeds to step 061IWS71A.

In addition, if the big win is not determined in step 061IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small win determination module (step 061IWS64A). The small win determination module is a program that determines that a small win will occur if the random number for winning determination (which may be a random number for small win determination) matches a predetermined small win determination value. If it is determined that a small win will occur (step 061IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small win flag indicating that a small win will occur based on the variable display of the first special pattern (step 061IWS66A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small win type based on the winning type determination random number (step 061IWS67A) and stores the small win type (step 061IWS68A). Then, it proceeds to step 061IWS71A. In addition, there may be multiple types of small wins, each with a different opening pattern (i.e., ease of winning) for the variable winning ball device 061IW17 (special winning port), or there may be only one. If there is only one type of small win, the processing of steps 061IWS67A to S68A may be omitted.

Also, if a small win is not determined in step 061IWS65A, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high probability flag is set or not (step 061IWS69A). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., if the high probability state (high probability state) is reached), the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A. In this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS69A (and step 061IWS69B described later), if the high probability state (high probability state) is reached, it is determined that the win will be a miss without time reduction without performing the process of determining whether time reduction has been missed in step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later).

If the probability of winning is not set (i.e., if the probability is low), the game control microcomputer 100 uses a time-saving loss judgment table to determine whether or not the time-saving loss has occurred, and performs a lottery process based on the random number for time-saving loss judgment to determine whether or not the time-saving loss has occurred (step 061IWS70A). In this case, it is determined that the time-saving loss has occurred with a probability of approximately 1/400. Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A.

In this example, if a time-saving deviation occurs during the time-saving state (high base state), the deviation is effectively invalidated by a configuration in which the number of time-saving times is not updated (see steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A described later). However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when the time-saving state (high base state) is in the time-saving state (high base state), the process of determining whether or not the time-saving deviation has occurred in step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) is not executed, and it may be determined that the deviation has occurred without time-saving.

For example, among the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a time-saving miss, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, in the case of the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, the process of determining whether the time-saving miss is in step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) may not be executed, and in the case of the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a time-saving miss, the process of determining whether the time-saving miss is in step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later). In other words, in the case of the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, a time-saving miss may not occur, but in the case of the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a time-saving miss, a time-saving miss may occur.

When multiple types of time-saving misses are provided, each with a different degree of advantage (e.g., the number of times the time-saving is applied), the type of time-saving miss is determined to be the type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out the type-determining random number extracted in the first start winning determination process (step S101A) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of time-saving. In this case, the determination process can be configured to use a common type-determining random number not only for the big win type determination and the small win type determination, but also for the time-saving type determination.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the stopping pattern of the special pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time-saving type (step 061IWS71A). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot A, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "1", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot B, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "3", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot C, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "5", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot D, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "7", if it is determined to be a small jackpot, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "9", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "2", and if it is determined to be a miss (no time-saving), the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "-". In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined special symbol stop pattern in a stop pattern storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 061IWS72A).

Then, in step 061IWS89A, the value of the first special chart process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89A).

(First variation pattern setting process)
11-8 is a flow chart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first embodiment of the feature part 116IW. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the rescue variation flag is set (step 061IWS17091A).

When the rescue fluctuation flag is set, i.e., when the fluctuation display indicates that rescue time reduction is established, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the rescue fluctuation flag (step 061IWS17092A) and selects the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table E for when rescue time reduction is established, shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS17093A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS1717A.

If the rescue variation flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS1710A). If the probability variation flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711A). If the high base flag is not set (i.e., in a low probability/low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol variation pattern table A for low probability/low base state shown in FIG. 11-2 (A) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 061IWS1712A). If the high base flag is set (i.e., in a low probability/high base state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol variation pattern table D for low probability/high base state shown in FIG. 11-3 (D) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 061IWS1713A).

If the probability variable flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1714A). If the high base flag is not set (i.e., if the game is in a high probability/low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table B for the high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 11-2 (B) as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS1715A). If the high base flag is set (i.e., if the game is in a high probability/high base state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table C for the high probability/high base state shown in FIG. 11-2 (C) as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS1716A).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines which of the variation patterns shown in Figures 11-2 and 11-3 will be used based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS17093A, 061IWS1712A, S1713A, S1715A, and S1716A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special pattern determination buffer (step 061IWS1717A).

Once the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the transmission of a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1704A).

In addition, when the first special symbol fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is determined in step 061IWS1717A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and starts measuring the fluctuation time (step 061IWS1705A), and starts displaying the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 061IWS1706A).The game control microcomputer 100 then updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation process (step 061IWS1707A).

In this example, by executing the above process, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, if the game state is a high probability/low base state, the first special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and the long variation display is executed. On the other hand, if the game state is a state other than the high probability/low base state, the first special symbol variation pattern table A is selected and the normal variation time variation display is executed. Also, in the case of the first special symbol variation display that establishes the rescue time reduction, the first special symbol variation pattern table E is selected and the variation display dedicated to when the rescue time reduction is established is executed.

(First special symbol variation process)
FIG. 11-9 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating the reel control normal process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120A). Note that the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating the reel control normal process (step S120), that is, when the value of the reel control process flag is not a value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small win end process (step S128), and when the game is not a big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) or a small win game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened).

If the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120), the CPU 103 performs control to send one of the display result designation commands to the performance control CPU 120 based on the decision result of whether or not a jackpot has been determined and the decision result of the jackpot type, if they have not been sent yet (step 061IWS1121A).

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (step 061IWS1122A), and when the first variable time timer times out (step 061IWS1123A), it performs control to send a first symbol determination command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a jackpot pattern is being derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B (step 061IWS1125A). Whether or not a jackpot pattern is being derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the value of the second special pattern process flag is a value corresponding to the second special pattern stop processing and whether or not a second jackpot flag is set, which indicates that a jackpot will be obtained based on the variable display of the second special pattern.

If the second special pattern display device 4B is not deriving and displaying a big win pattern, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the second special pattern display device 4B is deriving and displaying a small win pattern (step 061IWS1126A). Whether or not the second special pattern display device 4B is deriving and displaying a small win pattern can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the second special pattern process flag is a value corresponding to the second special pattern stop processing and whether or not the second small win flag, which indicates that a small win will occur based on the variable display of the second special pattern, is set. If the second special pattern display device 4B is not deriving and displaying a small win pattern, the process ends.

When the second special pattern display device 4B derives and displays a big win pattern (Y in step 061IWS1125A) or a small win pattern (Y in step 061IWS1126A), the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first forced pattern determination command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big win flag or the first small win flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the first big win flag or the first small win flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the first special pattern stop process (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS1125A to S1126A and S1129A, in this characteristic section 116IW, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, so that a situation in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously produce a big hit or a small hit does not occur. In this case, if the variable display of the first special symbol is a forced miss, the performance control CPU 120 side controls to forcibly stop and display a miss symbol as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, based on the second forced symbol determination designation command sent in step 061IWS1129A.

In this example, when the second special pattern display device 4B derives and displays a stop pattern of the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, control is not performed to send the first forced pattern determination command. Also, when the first special pattern display device 4A derives and displays a stop pattern of the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, control is not performed to send the second forced pattern determination command (see steps 061IWS1125B to S1126B, S1129B described below). In other words, in this example, even if rescue time reduction is established by executing the variable display of the other special pattern while executing the variable display of one of the first and second special patterns, the variable display of the one special pattern is not forcibly stopped.

In this example, if the second special symbol becomes a small win while the first special symbol is being displayed, the first special symbol is forced to stop regardless of the display result, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, if the second special symbol becomes a small win while the first special symbol is being displayed, if the display result of the first special symbol is a big win, or if it is a big win and the big win type is high in favor (for example, 6R big win B), the first special symbol is not forced to stop, and the first special symbol change process may be terminated as it is. In this case, based on the fact that the second special symbol becomes a small win, the value of the role control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game moves to a small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, step 061IWS1120A is judged as N, the processing of steps 061IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 061IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a small win and the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a big win with a high advantage, is being executed, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted during the small win game, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small win game ends, the value of the role control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the role control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is resumed.

Also, in this example, if the second special pattern changes to a small win while the first special pattern is being changed, and the first special pattern is being changed to a miss or small win, the first special pattern change process ends (see N in step 061IWS1127A). Therefore, even if the second special pattern changes to a small win while the first special pattern is being changed to a miss or small win, the update of the first change time timer is interrupted during the small win game, and the first special pattern continues to be changed, and when the small win game ends, the update of the first change time timer resumes.

(First special symbol stop processing)
11-10 and 11-11 are flow charts showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first checks whether the lighting extension flag is set (step 061IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that was set (step 061IWS2011A). The CPU 103 also controls the right-hit display 26 to end its lighting (step 061IWS2012A) and transmits a right-hit lighting end command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013A).

In this example, the processing of steps 061IWS5617A to S5621A and S5617B to S5621B is executed to end the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) and transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state) when the variable display for the specified number of times (100th, 200th, or 800th time; see FIG. 11-1) begins, and the processing of steps 061IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B is executed to turn off the right-hit display 26 when the variable display for the specified number of times (100th, 200th, or 800th time; see FIG. 11-1) ends.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the first special pattern display device 4A to derive and display the stopping pattern of the first special pattern (step 061IWS2014A). In this case, if the first forced pattern determination command was sent in step 061IWS1129A of the first special pattern change process, the CPU 103 causes the missing pattern to be forcibly derived and displayed as the stopping pattern of the first special pattern, regardless of the result of the determination at the start of the change.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 061IWS2015A). If the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag indicating that a jackpot has started (step 061IWS2016A). The CPU 103 also clears the first jackpot flag (step 061IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-hit display 26 (step 061IWS2018A) and also performs control to send a right-hit lighting start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027A.

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, when a jackpot occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-hit indicator 26 starts to light up. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided to the right of the play area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right-hit operation during jackpot play, and the right-hit indicator 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game starts when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the right-hit display 26 may be configured to start lighting up when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41.

If the first big win flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small win flag is set (step 061IWS2020A). If the first small win flag is set, control is performed to send a small win start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2021A). The CPU 103 also clears the first small win flag (step 061IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role control process flag to a value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step 061IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027A.

In step 061IWS2027A, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the first special pattern normal processing (step 061IWS2027A).

If the first small win flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2020A), the CPU 103 checks whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be lost (step 061IWS2030A). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be lost can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 061IWS72A.

If it is decided that the time-saving feature should be disabled, the CPU 103 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS2031A). If the high base flag is set (i.e., the game is in a low probability/high base state), the CPU 103 proceeds to step 061IWS2036A.

When the high base flag is not set (in this example, the time-saving miss does not occur in the high probability state (high probability state), so the normal state (low probability/low base state) is in effect), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of a time-saving miss (step 061IWS2032A). The CPU 103 also sets the high base count counter to "100" (step 061IWS2033A).

In this example, by processing steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A (and steps 061IWS2030B to S2033B described below), if a time-saving error occurs in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the state is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 100 time-saving times, and if a time-saving error occurs in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) continues and the number of time-saving times (i.e. the value of the high base number counter) is not updated.

In this example, the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A (and steps 061IWS2030B to S2033B described below) is configured so that if a time-saving deviation occurs during a time-saving state including rescue time-saving (high base state), the number of time-saving times is not updated. With this configuration, in this example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern are executed in parallel, the advantage of the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving can be secured, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased (for example, the amount of investment by the player can be reduced).

In this example, when a time-saving miss occurs in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the number of time-saving times (i.e., the value of the high base number counter) is not updated. However, this is not the only possible configuration. For example, when a time-saving miss occurs in a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) via a jackpot or a time-saving miss (low probability/high base state) (or when the remaining number of times in the time-saving state is less than 100 times due to a time-saving miss), the number of time-saving times (i.e., the value of the high base number counter) may be updated and the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 100 time-saving times may be controlled again.

In addition, in step 061IWS2033A (and step 061IWS2033B described later), the high base count counter may be configured to be set to values corresponding to multiple types of time-saving counts. For example, if the time-saving count is not achieved the first time, the high base count counter may be set to "100," and if the time-saving count is not achieved the second time, the high base count counter may be set to "200."

Also, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 061IWS2033A (and step 061IWS2033B described below), a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times determined by the lottery process may be set in the high base number counter. In this case, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined to be 100 times with a 90% probability, and 200 times with a 10% probability. Also, when the number of time-saving times is determined by a lottery process, the number of time-saving times may be determined by using the type-determining random numbers used to determine the jackpot type and the time-saving type, or the number of time-saving times may be determined by using a dedicated random number.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the right-hit display 26 to start lighting (step 061IWS2034A) and transmits a right-hit lighting start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2035A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS36A.

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2034A to S2035A (and steps 061IWS2034B to S2035B described below), in this example, the right-hit indicator 26 starts to light up when the time-saving feature is missed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2036A).

In this example, when the time-saving feature does not work, the value of the rescue time-saving counter is not set to "800" (i.e., the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated is not reset), but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The value of the rescue time-saving counter may be set to "800" (i.e., the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated is reset) even when the time-saving feature does not work, such as when a jackpot occurs or when the rescue time-saving feature is activated.

As shown in Figures 11-10 to 11-11, in this example, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special pattern, and when a time-saving miss occurs, a right-hit notification is configured to be executable to prompt the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area. Also, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special pattern, a gate notification may be configured to be executable as the right-hit notification to prompt the player to aim at the passing gate 41 and launch the game ball.

Also, when the jackpot pattern is displayed in a stopped state with the second special pattern, the right hit notification or gate notification is not executed, and when the game ball enters the first start winning hole in that state, the right hit notification or gate notification is executed (in this case, since the game ball is waiting to pass through the gate, even if the game ball enters the first start winning hole, the display of the first special pattern does not start immediately, and the first reserved memory is entered).

Conversely, when the passing of a game ball through the passage gate 41 is detected in a normal state (low probability/low base state) (i.e., when a right-hit operation is likely to be performed), a left-hit notification may be configured to be issued in a manner with a low degree of recognition (e.g., low-volume sound output or small-screen display) to encourage the player to launch the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, when the winning of a game ball into the second start winning hole (or a special winning hole provided on the right side of the game area) is detected in a normal state (low probability/low base state) (i.e., when a right-hit operation is suspected to be performed intentionally), a left-hit notification may be configured to be issued in a manner with a high degree of recognition (e.g., high-volume sound output or large-screen display). With such a configuration, the launch notification can be issued accurately. In particular, with the above configuration, a mild left-hit notification may be given to a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area in a manner that reduces awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine, while a left-hit notification may be given to a player who intentionally performs a right-hit operation in a manner that increases awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine. With this configuration, a player who intentionally performs a right-hit operation can be prompted by a staff member at the gaming establishment to return to a left-hit operation.

In the above case, the system may be configured to issue a left-hit notification when the number of game balls detected on the right side of the game area, such as at the passing gate 41 or the second start winning port, reaches a certain number. The system may also be configured to issue a left-hit notification when the passing gate 41 detects game balls multiple times (e.g., five times) within a specified period (e.g., one minute), and to issue a left-hit notification when the second start winning port (or a special winning port provided on the right side of the game area) detects a specific number of game balls (e.g., one ball) or more that are less than the specified number.

In addition, this feature unit 116IW displays a demo when a specific condition is met, but if a game ball is detected entering the passing gate 41 or the second start winning hole (or a special winning hole provided to the right of the game area) while the demo display is being displayed in the normal state, the execution of the demo display that was being executed may be terminated and a left-hand hit notification may be issued.

(Second special symbol normal processing)
11-12 to 11-14 are flow charts showing the second special symbol normal processing in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. The second special symbol normal processing is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. Note that the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing when the second special symbol display device 4B is not displaying the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120) (step 061IWS50B). Note that when the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120), that is, when the value of the reel control process flag is not a value indicating the gate passage waiting processing (step S121) to small win end processing (step S128), and when neither a big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor a small win game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened) is in progress.

If the value of the reel control process flag indicates normal reel control processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the second reserved memory number (step 061IWS51B). Specifically, it checks the count value of the second reserved memory number counter. If the second reserved memory number is 0, it sends a second customer waiting demo display designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS52B).

If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 and stores it in the second random number buffer area of RAM 102 (step 061IWS53B), decreases the value of the second reserved memory number by 1 (decreases the count value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1), and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 061IWS54B). That is, each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved memory number are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. That is, in this example, the configuration is such that the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is established, so that the order in which each random number value is extracted can be identified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the transmission of a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the presentation control board 12 (step 061IWS55B). Note that in this example, the processing of step 061IWS55B is executed, so that a setting value command is sent each time the variable display starts, but a setting value command is also sent when the setting change process (processing to change the setting value) is executed when the power is turned on.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 sends a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the presentation control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56B). Note that the specific method of sending the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 061IWS56A of the first special pattern normal processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 061IWS5601B). If the high probability flag is set, i.e., if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the game proceeds to step 061IWS5617B.

If the probability of a special bonus is not set, i.e., if the probability is low, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 061IWS5602B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step 061IWS5617B. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 061IWS5603B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 061IWS5604B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 061IWS5604B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data, and performs control to send a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the presentation control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5605B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 061IWS5606B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the game proceeds to step 061IWS5617B. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of rescue time reduction (step 061IWS5607B). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets "800" to the high base counter, which indicates the remaining total number of times that the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display that can be executed in the high base state (step 061IWS5608B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a rescue fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation display indicates that rescue time reduction is established (step 061IWS5609B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the right-hit indicator 26 to start lighting up (step 061IWS5610B) and also controls the performance control CPU 120 to send a right-hit lighting start command (step 061IWS5611B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 061IWS5604B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets 7F (H) uniformly as the EXT data and controls to send command 957F (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5614B). Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 061IWS5615B). If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data, and performs control to send a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5616B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the value of the high base count counter is "0" (step 061IWS5617B), and if it is "0", proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

If the value of the high base count counter is not "0", i.e., if it is in a low probability/high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base count counter (step 061IWS5618B) and determines whether it has become "0" (step 061IWS5619B). If the value of the high base count counter has not become "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag, which indicates that a high base state is in progress (step 061IWS5620B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-hit display 26 should be extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 061IWS5621B).

The game control microcomputer 100 then determines whether or not the first special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot (step 061IWS57B). Specifically, if the first jackpot flag, which indicates that a jackpot will occur based on the display of the fluctuating first special symbol, is set, it is determined that the first special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot. If it is determined that the first special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot, it proceeds to step 061IWS71B without carrying out any processing beyond step 061IWS58B. As a result, if the second special symbol starts fluctuating during a jackpot fluctuating first special symbol, it is configured to forcibly determine a miss regardless of whether a jackpot determination value has been stored.

The method of forcibly determining a miss is not limited to the above. For example, if the first special symbol is fluctuating between jackpots, a process may be performed to set a miss random number (fixed value) as the random number for determining a win, and then the process may proceed to step 061IWS59B, forcing a miss regardless of which random number for determining a win was obtained at the time of the initial winning.

In addition, for example, if the first special symbol is fluctuating between big wins in step 061IWS57B, the processing of steps 061IWS58B to S63B may not be performed, and a miss random number value (fixed value) may be set as the random number for hit determination and a small win determination may be performed, forcing a miss regardless of which random number for hit determination was obtained at the time of the initial winning.

If the first special symbol is not in the jackpot fluctuation state, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the random number for hit determination from the second random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 061IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot has occurred if the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In step 061IWS59B, the game status is taken into account and a determination is made as to whether or not a jackpot has occurred is made using either the non-variable jackpot determination table or the variable jackpot determination table.

When it is decided that a jackpot has been reached (step 061IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot has been reached based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 061IWS61B). Then, based on the random number for determining the jackpot type, it determines whether the jackpot type is 6R jackpot A, 6R jackpot B, 6R jackpot C, or 6R jackpot D (step 061IWS62B), stores the jackpot type (step 061IWS63B), and proceeds to step 061IWS71B.

In addition, if the big win is not determined in step 061IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small win determination module (step 061IWS64B). The small win determination module is a program that determines that a small win will occur if the random number for winning determination (which may be a random number for small win determination) matches a predetermined small win determination value. If it is determined that a small win will occur (step 061IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small win flag indicating that a small win will occur based on the variable display of the second special pattern (step 061IWS66B). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small win type based on the winning type determination random number (step 061IWS67B) and stores the small win type (step 061IWS68B). Then, it proceeds to step 061IWS71B. In addition, there may be multiple types of small wins, each with a different opening pattern (i.e., ease of winning) for the variable winning ball device 061IW17 (special winning port), or there may be only one. If there is only one type of small win, the processing of steps 061IWS67B to S68B may be omitted.

Also, if a small win is not determined in step 061IWS65B, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high probability flag is set or not (step 061IWS69B). If the high probability flag is set, i.e., if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the game proceeds to step 061IWS71B. In this example, by executing the processing of step 061IWS69B, if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the game will be a miss without time reduction without performing the process of determining whether or not the game will be missed with time reduction in step 061IWS70B.

If the probability of winning is not set, i.e., if the probability is low, the game control microcomputer 100 uses a time-saving loss judgment table to determine whether or not the time-saving loss has occurred, and performs a lottery process based on the random number for time-saving loss judgment to determine whether or not the time-saving loss has occurred (step 061IWS70B). In this case, it is determined that the time-saving loss has occurred with a probability of approximately 1/400. Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the stopping pattern of the special pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time-saving type (step 061IWS71B). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot A, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "1", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot B, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "3", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot C, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "5", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot D, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "7", if it is determined to be a small jackpot, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "9", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "2", and if it is determined to be a miss (no time-saving), the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "-". In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined special symbol stop pattern in a stop pattern memory area provided in the RAM 102 (step 061IWS72B).

Then, in step 061IWS89B, the value of the second special chart process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89B).

(Second variation pattern setting process)
11-15 is a flowchart showing the second variation pattern setting process in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In the second variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the rescue variation flag is set (step 061IWS17091B).

If the rescue fluctuation flag is set, i.e., if the fluctuation display indicates that rescue time reduction is established, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the rescue fluctuation flag (step 061IWS17092B) and selects the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table C for when rescue time reduction is established, shown in FIG. 11-4 (C), as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS17093B). Then, it proceeds to step 061IWS1717B.

If the rescue variation flag is not set, it is checked whether the high probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS1710B). If the high probability variation flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711B). If the high base flag is not set (i.e., if the game is in a high probability/low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the variation pattern table A for the second special symbol in a high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 11-4 (A) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 061IWS1712B). If the high probability flag has not been set (N in step 061IWS1710B) or if the high base flag has been set (Y in step 061IWS1711B), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table B for times other than the high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 11-4 (B) as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS1713B).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines which of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 11-4 will be used based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS1712B and S1713B and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the second special pattern determination buffer (step 061IWS1717B).

Once the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to send a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1704B).

In addition, when the second special symbol fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is determined in step 061IWS1717B, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the second fluctuation time timer and starts measuring the fluctuation time (step 061IWS1705B), and starts displaying the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 061IWS1706B). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol fluctuation processing (step 061IWS1707B).

In this example, by executing the above process, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, if the game state is a high probability/low base state, the second special symbol variation pattern table A is selected and the normal variation time variation display is executed. On the other hand, if the game state is a state other than the high probability/low base state, the second special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and the long variation variation display is executed. Also, in the case of the second special symbol variation display that establishes the rescue time reduction, the second special symbol variation pattern table C is selected and the variation display dedicated to when the rescue time reduction is established is executed.

(Second special symbol variation processing)
11-16 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating the reel control normal process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120B). The case where the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating the reel control normal process (step S120) is when the value of the reel control process flag is not a value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small win end process (step S128), and when the game is not a big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) or a small win game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened).

If the value of the reel control process flag is set to a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120), the CPU 103 performs control to send one of the display result designation commands to the performance control CPU 120 based on the decision result of whether or not a jackpot has been determined and the decision result of the jackpot type, if they have not been sent yet (step 061IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 061IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 061IWS1123B), it performs control to send a second symbol determination command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 061IWS1130B).

If the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A is displaying a jackpot symbol (step 061IWS1125B). Whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A is displaying a jackpot symbol can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing and whether or not the first jackpot flag, which indicates that a jackpot will occur based on the variable display of the first special symbol, is set.

If the first special pattern display device 4A is not deriving and displaying a big win pattern, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first special pattern display device 4A is deriving and displaying a small win pattern (step 061IWS1126B). Whether or not the first special pattern display device 4A is deriving and displaying a small win pattern can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the first special pattern process flag is a value corresponding to the first special pattern stop processing and whether or not the first small win flag, which indicates that a small win will occur based on the variable display of the first special pattern, is set. If the first special pattern display device 4A is not deriving and displaying a small win pattern, the process ends.

When the first special pattern display device 4A derives and displays a big win pattern (Y in step 061IWS1125B), or when the first special pattern display device 4A derives and displays a small win pattern (Y in step 061IWS11256), the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second forced pattern determination command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big win flag or the second small win flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big win flag or the second small win flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the second special pattern stop processing (step 061IWS1130B).

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS1125B to S1126B and S1129B, in this characteristic section 116IW, if the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped, so that a situation in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously produce a big hit or a small hit does not occur. In this case, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a forced miss, the performance control CPU 120 side controls to forcibly stop the display of a miss symbol as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, based on the second forced symbol determination designation command sent in step 061IWS1129B.

In this example, if the first special symbol becomes a small win while the second special symbol is being displayed, the second special symbol is forced to stop regardless of the display result, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, if the first special symbol becomes a small win while the second special symbol is being displayed, and the display result of the second special symbol is a big win and the big win type has a high advantage (for example, 6R big win C), the second special symbol is not forced to stop, and the second special symbol change process may be terminated as it is. In this case, based on the fact that the first special symbol becomes a small win, the value of the role control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game moves to a small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, step 061IWS1120B is judged as N, the processing of steps 061IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second variable time timer of step 061IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, if the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol that will result in a sure-win is being executed, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted during the small hit game, and the variable display of the second special symbol continues to be executed. Then, when the small hit game ends, the value of the reel control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the reel control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is resumed.

Also, in this example, if the first special pattern changes to a small win while the second special pattern is being changed, and the second special pattern is being changed, which would result in a miss or small win, the second special pattern change process ends (see N in step 061IWS1127B). Therefore, even if the first special pattern changes to a small win while the second special pattern is being changed, which would result in a miss or small win, the update of the second change time timer is interrupted during the small win game, and the second special pattern change display continues to be executed, and when the small win game ends, the update of the second change time timer resumes.

In this example, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the player aims the game ball at the left side of the play area and shoots it (hits it from the left) in order to make the game ball enter the winning ball device 061IW6Aa, which serves as the first start winning hole, and cause the first special symbol to change and be displayed. In principle, the game ball will not enter the second start winning hole located on the right side of the play area and cause the second special symbol to change and be displayed. However, the player may mistakenly perform the shooting operation (or may intentionally aim for the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol, even if a long change is performed), and the second special symbol may change and be displayed. In other words, there is a risk that a jackpot symbol will be derived and displayed in a change and displayed that the player does not intend, or that the player may intentionally aim for the second start winning hole.

Therefore, in this example, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first and second special symbols, a losing symbol can be forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display of the other special symbol based on the derived and displayed small winning symbol in the variable display of the other special symbol. For example, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), even if the player wins in the second start winning hole unintentionally and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable display of the second special symbol will be forcibly stopped at the losing symbol if the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a small winning. Also, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), even if the player intentionally performs a firing operation (right hit) aiming for a win in the second start winning hole and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is a long fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation time of 10 minutes), so the fluctuation efficiency is extremely poor. Then, if the first special symbol is displayed and a small win symbol is derived during the second special symbol display, the second special symbol display is forcibly stopped at a losing symbol. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the big win symbol being derived from the unintended special symbol display, and to minimize the effect of the player's intentional strategy.

(Second special symbol stop processing)
11-17 and 11-18 are flow charts showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether the lighting extension flag is set or not (step 061IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that was set (step 061IWS2011B). In addition, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-hit display 26 (step 061IWS2012B) and also controls to send a right-hit lighting end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 causes the second special symbol display device 4B to derive and display the stopping symbol of the second special symbol (step 061IWS2014B). In this case, if the second forced symbol determination command was sent in step 061IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 causes the second special symbol to be forcibly derived and displayed as the stopping symbol of the second special symbol, regardless of the result of the determination at the start of the variation.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 061IWS2015B). If the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag (step 061IWS2016B). The CPU 103 also clears the second jackpot flag (step 061IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-hit display 26 (step 061IWS2018B) and also performs control to send a right-hit lighting start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, when a jackpot occurs in the variable display of the second special pattern, the right-hit indicator 26 starts to light up. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided to the right of the play area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right-hit operation during jackpot play, and the right-hit indicator 26 is turned on.

If the second big win flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether the second small win flag is set (step 061IWS2020B). If the second small win flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to send a small win start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2021B). The CPU 103 also clears the second small win flag (step 061IWS2022B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the reel control process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-processing for the small win (step 061IWS2026B).Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal processing for the second special symbol (step 061IWS2027B).

If the second small win flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2020B), the CPU 103 checks whether it has been decided that the time reduction has been missed (step 061IWS2030B).

If it is decided that the time-saving feature should be disabled, the CPU 103 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS2031B). If the high base flag is set (i.e., the game is in a low probability/high base state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS2036B.

If the high base flag is not set (i.e., in the normal state (low probability/low base state)), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of a time-saving miss (step 061IWS2032B). The CPU 103 also sets the high base count counter to "100" (step 061IWS2033B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls the right-hit display 26 to start lighting (step 061IWS2034B) and transmits a right-hit lighting start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2035B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS36B.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal processing of the second special pattern (step 061IWS2036B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal processing of the second special pattern (step 061IWS2037B).

(External output signal)
FIG. 11-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal output from the pachinko game machine 1. In this example, in step S23, a process is performed to output a signal as shown in FIG. 11-19 to an external device such as a hall management computer. As shown in FIG. 11-19, in this example, the external output signals are a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, a fluctuation stop signal, a security signal, a door open signal, a prize ball signal, and an out ball signal. Among these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal output during a jackpot game. The jackpot 2 signal is a signal output during a jackpot game and during a high base state. The jackpot 3 signal is a signal output during a pattern determination period when the time reduction is not performed. The jackpot 4 signal is a signal output at the start of a variable display that becomes a rescue time reduction. The fluctuation stop signal is a signal output at the start of a pattern determination period. The security signal is a signal output at the time of error detection. The door open signal is a signal outputted to the outside when the door is opened. The prize ball signal is a signal outputted to the outside when 10 prize balls are dispensed. The out ball signal is a signal outputted to the outside when 10 out balls are detected. In an external device such as a hall management computer, the number of jackpots can be measured by the jackpot 1 signal, the number of consecutive wins can be measured by the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal, the number of high base control via time reduction misses can be measured by the jackpot 3 signal, and the number of high base control via rescue time reduction can be measured by the jackpot 4 signal.

In this example, in addition to the case where the high base state is transitioned to when the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the high base state may also be transitioned to when the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, so when the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the external output of the jackpot 3 signal is started at the end of the pattern determination period. Also, since the high base state may also be transitioned to when the time-saving rescue is activated, when a variable display that results in a time-saving rescue is executed, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal is started at the start of the variable display. Note that, for example, when the high base state is transitioned to when the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, a signal may be output from a dedicated terminal different from the terminal that outputs the jackpot signal 2, so that it may be possible to externally identify that the transition to the time-saving state was triggered by the time-saving miss pattern being derived and displayed. Also, for example, the jackpot 2 signal may be output externally during jackpot play and during a high probability/high base state, and the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be output externally at the start of a low probability/high base state (or during a low probability/high base state), making it possible to distinguish between a high probability/high base state and a low probability/high base state externally.

In this example, when the rescue time is reduced, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal is started in response to the start of the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction, and the variable stop signal is output to the outside at the start of the pattern determination period in response to the end of the variable display. With this configuration, a signal that can be specified to be controlled to a high base state based on the rescue time reduction can be output to the outside at an appropriate timing. In addition, when the jackpot 4 signal and the variable stop signal are output, it is possible to avoid missing signals externally. In addition, the number of times that the rescue time is reduced by the output of the jackpot 4 signal can be specified externally. In this way, it is possible to specify the trigger, timing, and number of times that the high base state is controlled in an external device such as a hall management computer, so that it is possible to perform operational analysis of gaming machines in gaming establishments, such as the actual operational rescue time reduction achievement rate and the type of customer demographic when the number of rescue times is reached.

In this example, when the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving starts, the high base flag is set and the state transitions to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state). However, if the high base flag is set and the state transitions to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) when the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving stops being displayed or at the start or end of the pattern determination period, for example, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal may be started when the high base flag is set and the state transitions to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state).

The jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output even during jackpot play. In addition, while this example shows a case where separate external output signals (jackpot 3 signal and jackpot 4 signal) are output when the time-saving feature is missed and when the time-saving feature is rescued, a shared external output signal may be output.

The jackpot 3 signal and jackpot 4 signal may also be configured to be output at a timing after the fluctuation stop signal is output during the pattern determination period.

For example, the change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the losing pattern, and the jackpot 3 signal may be output during the pattern determination period after the change stop signal is output, or the change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, and the jackpot 4 signal may be output during the pattern determination period after the change stop signal is output. This configuration makes it possible to avoid signals being missed externally when the change stop signal and the jackpot 3 signal or jackpot 4 signal are output simultaneously.

The jackpot 3 signal may be configured to continue to be output even during a high base state via a time-saving miss. The jackpot 4 signal may be configured to continue to be output even during a high base state via a rescue time-saving. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the type of time-saving even during a high base state.

(Game state transition)
Next, the transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the feature part 116IW will be described. FIG. 11-20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the way of transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the feature part 116IW. In the first embodiment, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal variable time, whereas the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the long variable. Also, since it is in the low base state, the normal hit probability is low at 1/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is opened less frequently. Therefore, in order to make the game ball win the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first start winning port and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player performs the launch operation of the game ball (left shot) aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), the start winning occurs mainly in the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first start winning hole, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Also, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, mainly a 6R jackpot A or a 6R jackpot B occurs.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a low probability/low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition to a high probability/low base state (first probability change state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if a game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when a 6R jackpot A occurs in a low probability/low base state, the game will transition to a low probability/high base state after the jackpot game ends, and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the variable display ends a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) (see steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2288).

As shown in FIG. 11-20, even if a miss occurs in the low probability/low base state (normal state), if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (see steps 061IWS2032A, S2032B). Furthermore, even if a miss occurs, if a rescue time-saving occurs (after RAM clear processing or after a jackpot game, when the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot occurring), the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (see steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B).

When the game moves to the high probability/low base state (first probability change state), the second special symbol is displayed in the normal time, whereas the first special symbol is displayed in the long time. Also, because the game is in the low base state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is low at 1/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is opened less frequently. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second start winning hole and to display the second special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the game area and performs the firing operation (right shot). Therefore, in the high probability/low base state (first probability change state), the starting winning occurs mainly in the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second start winning hole, and the second special symbol is mainly displayed. In addition, because the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state, a 6R jackpot C or a 6R jackpot D will mainly occur.

As shown in Figure 11-20, when a 6R jackpot C occurs in a high probability/low base state, if the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition again to the high probability/low base state (first special probability state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2253 to S2260). However, if the game ball does not enter V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, if a 6R jackpot D occurs in a high probability/low base state, after the jackpot play ends, the game transitions to a high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), and the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state) is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2269, S2274).

When the game moves to the high probability/high base state (second probability state), the first special symbol is displayed in the normal display time, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in the long display time. However, since the game is in the high base state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high at 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently in the open state. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning hole and to cause the first special symbol to be displayed, the player aims at the right side of the game area and performs the firing operation (right shot). Therefore, in the high probability/high base state (second probability state), the start winning mainly occurs in the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning hole, and the first special symbol is mainly displayed. In addition, because the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state, a 6R jackpot A or a 6R jackpot B will mainly occur.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a high probability/high base state, if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition to a high probability/low base state (first probability change state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if a game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when a 6R jackpot A occurs in a high probability/high base state, the game will transition to a low probability/high base state after the jackpot game ends, and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the variable display ends a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example) (see steps 061IWS2284 to S2286, S2288).

When the game moves to the low probability/high base state, the first special symbol is displayed in the normal display time, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in the long display time. However, because the game is in the high base state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high at 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently in the open state. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning hole and to cause the first special symbol to be displayed, the player aims the game ball at the right side of the game area and performs the shooting operation (right shot). Therefore, in the low probability/high base state, the start winning mainly occurs in the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning hole, and the first special symbol is mainly displayed. In addition, because the first special symbol is primarily displayed in a variable manner, if a jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state, a 6R jackpot A or 6R jackpot B will typically occur.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a low probability/high base state, if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition to a high probability/low base state (first probability change state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if a game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when a 6R jackpot A occurs in a low probability/high base state, the game will transition to a low probability/high base state again after the jackpot game ends, and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the variable display ends a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example) (see steps 061IWS2284 to S2286, S2288).

Also, as shown in Figure 11-20, if the rescue time-saving mode is activated in the low probability/high base state (after the RAM clear process or after a jackpot game, when the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot occurring), the game will be controlled again to the low probability/high base state with the time-saving number of 800 (see steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A, S5607B to S5608B).

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-20, when the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern are executed a total of a predetermined number of times in the low probability/high base state, the low probability/high base state ends and transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state).

Specifically, when the low probability/high base state is controlled via a time-saving miss, if the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are executed a total of 100 times, the low probability/high base state ends and the state transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A, S5617A to S5620A, S2030B to S2033B, S5617B to S5620B).

In addition, when the low probability/high base state is controlled via a jackpot that occurred in a low base state, if the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are executed a total of 100 times, the low probability/high base state ends and the state transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2288, S5617A-S5620A, S5617B-S5620B). In addition, when the low probability/high base state is controlled via a jackpot that occurred in a high base state, if the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are executed a total of 200 times, the low probability/high base state ends and the state transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2287, S5617A-S5620A, S5617B-S5620B).

In addition, when the low probability/high base state is controlled via the rescue time reduction, if the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the second special symbol changes are executed a total of 800 times, the low probability/high base state ends and the state transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A, S5617A to S5620A, S5607B to S5608B, S5617B to S5620B).

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-20, in this example, in the high probability/low base state (first probability state), a 6R jackpot C is generated and the state is controlled again to the high probability/low base state (first probability state), or a 6R jackpot D is generated and the state is controlled to the high probability/high base state (second probability state), so even if a jackpot occurs, there is a 100% probability of the state returning to the probability state. Therefore, in the high probability/low base state (first probability state), it can be said that at least two more jackpots are guaranteed to occur during the probability state (two loops). On the other hand, in the high probability/high base state (second probability state), if a 6R jackpot B occurs, the state is controlled to the high probability/low base state and the probability state continues, but if a 6R jackpot A occurs, the state transitions to the low probability/high base state and the probability state ends. Therefore, in the high probability/high base state (second probability state), it can be said that only one more jackpot is guaranteed to occur during the probability state (one loop).

In this example, the jackpot types are all 6-round jackpots, 6R jackpots A to D, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, this example shows a case where the jackpot is controlled to a low probability/high base state when a 6R jackpot A occurs, but even when controlled to the same low probability/high base state, it may be configured to have a 4-round jackpot, 4R jackpot A, or a 10-round jackpot, 10R jackpot A, with different numbers of rounds. Similarly, even when controlled to the same high probability/high base state, it may be configured to have a 4-round jackpot, 4R jackpot D, or a 10-round jackpot D, with various possible embodiments.

As shown in Figures 11-2 to 11-4 and 11-19, in this example, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, and high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), the first special symbol's variable display is executed in a normal variable time, whereas the second special symbol's variable display is executed in a long variable time. In other words, the first special symbol's variable display is executed in a shorter variable time (or the probability of execution is high) than the second special symbol's variable display. Thus, in this example, the low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, and high probability/high base state (second probability variable state) are states in which the first special symbol's variable display is more likely to have a shorter variable time than the second special symbol's variable display (hereinafter, such a state is also referred to as the first shortened state). In this example, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, and high probability/high base state (second probability change state) that are the first shortened state, the percentage of the first special symbol variable display having a shorter variable time than the second special symbol variable display is 100%, but the configuration is not limited to such a percentage. For example, in the first shortened state, the percentage of the first special symbol variable display having a shorter variable time than the second special symbol variable display may be lower than 100%, but may be configured to be at least higher than the second shortened state described below.

In addition, in this example, in the high probability/low base state (first probability state), the first special symbol is displayed in a long fluctuation, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in a normal fluctuation time. In other words, the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol (or the rate at which it is displayed is high). Therefore, in this example, the high probability/low base state (first probability state) is a state in which the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol (hereinafter, such a state is also referred to as the second shortened state). In this example, in the high probability/low base state (first probability state) which is the second shortened state, the rate at which the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol is 100%, but the present invention is not limited to such a ratio configuration. For example, in the second shortened state, the percentage of times that the second special symbol's variable display has a shorter variable time than the first special symbol's variable display may be configured to be lower than 100%, but at least higher than in the first shortened state.

In this example, in the first shortened state, the image display device 5 mainly displays the decorative pattern in response to the display of the first special pattern, and in the second shortened state, the image display device 5 mainly displays the decorative pattern in response to the display of the second special pattern.

As described above, in this example, even if the display of one of the first and second special symbols is being changed and the other special symbol is changed, the display of the one special symbol is not forcibly stopped. In this configuration, for example, when the display of the second special symbol is being changed and a rescue time reduction is achieved by the display of the other special symbol, in the normal state, if the display of the second special symbol is being changed and a rescue time reduction is achieved by the display of the first special symbol, and the display is controlled to the rescue time reduction (high base state), the display of the second special symbol being changed continues without being forcibly stopped. Here, as the control of the rescue time reduction (high base state), in addition to the control related to the normal symbols, such as the control to increase the probability of winning the normal symbol, the control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the control related to the normal symbol, such as the control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning port), if the control related to the special symbols is performed, such as the control to shorten the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (i.e., control to a second shortened state in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is more likely to have a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol with the shortened fluctuation time (i.e., improved fluctuation efficiency) cannot be executed until the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed (for example, a fluctuation time of 10 minutes) ends, and the benefit of the rescue time reduction cannot be enjoyed. In such a state, even if the rescue time reduction is controlled, the progress of the game will be significantly delayed and interest will decrease.

In this example, when the rescue time reduction is established, the rescue time reduction (high base state) is controlled by shortening the change time of the first special symbol (i.e., the change display of the first special symbol is controlled to the first shortened state (in this example, low probability/high base state) in which the probability that the change display of the first special symbol will be a change display with a shorter change time than the change display of the second special symbol) in addition to the control of the normal symbols. With this configuration, when the rescue time reduction is established, it is controlled to the first shortened state (low probability/high base state), so even if the change display of the second special symbol (long change) that is being executed continues, it is possible to execute the change display of the first special symbol with a shortened change time (i.e., improved change efficiency), and the benefit of the rescue time reduction can be enjoyed. In addition, when the rescue time reduction is controlled, the game can be played smoothly, and interest can be increased.

The display of the second special symbol (long fluctuation) that is currently in progress continues even after the transition to the first shortened state's rescue time reduction (high base state), but if a jackpot occurs due to the display of the first special symbol with the shortened fluctuation time, it will be forcibly stopped at the losing symbol (e.g., this corresponds to the processing of steps 061IWS1125B, S1129B).

(Example of control of game state)
Next, an example of control of the game state will be described. Fig. 11-21 is a time chart for explaining an example of control of the game state in the first embodiment.

Of Figures 11-21, Figure 11-21(A) shows an example of control of the game state when, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the display of the second special symbol that results in a time-saving miss is started, and while the display of the second special symbol is being executed, the display of the first special symbol that results in a rescue time-saving miss (no time-saving) is started.

As shown in Figure 11-21 (A), when the display of the first special pattern that establishes the rescue time-saving function starts to change (T1 timing), control is performed to transition from the normal state (low probability/low base state) to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-21(A), the losing symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol when the rescue time reduction is established (T2 timing), but at this time the losing symbol is not forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-21(A), after the rescue time-saving effect is established and a transition is made to the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving effect (low probability/high base state), the time-saving effect is deduced and displayed in the display of the second special symbol that started before the display of the first special symbol that established the rescue time-saving effect (T3 timing), but at this time the number of times the time-saving effect has occurred is not updated due to the time-saving effect not occurring (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). In other words, the time-saving effect due to the rescue time-saving effect, which has a higher degree of advantage and has a greater number of times the time-saving effect has occurred than the time-saving effect not occurring, is maintained.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-21(A), the display result of the first special symbol change display in which the time-saving rescue is established is a miss (no time-saving), but even if the display result of the first special symbol change display in which the time-saving rescue is established is a time-saving miss, the control of the game state does not change. Specifically, when the display of the first special symbol change in which the time-saving rescue is established (time-saving miss) starts (T1 timing), control is performed to transition from the normal state (low probability/low base state) to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A). Then, the time-saving miss is derived and displayed in the display of the first special symbol in which the time-saving rescue is established (T1 timing), but at this time the number of time-saving times is not updated due to the time-saving miss (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). In other words, the time-saving state due to the time-saving rescue, which has a higher advantage and has a higher number of time-saving times than the time-saving miss, is maintained.

Of Figures 11-21, Figure 11-21(B) shows an example of control of the game state when the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving ends at the start of a variable display that results in a time-saving error.

As shown in Figure 11-21 (B), in the time-saving state due to rescue time-saving (low probability/high base state), when the variable display that is the time-saving deviation starts, the high base count counter is updated and the value becomes 0 (t1 timing), control is performed to end the rescue time-saving and transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5617A to S5620A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), when the display of the first special symbol indicates that the time-saving feature has failed (t2 timing), control is performed to transition from the normal state to a time-saving feature state (low probability/high base state) due to the time-saving feature having failed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A).

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 11-22 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 100IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 100IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo consecutive win is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines a chance pattern (for example, a combination of patterns that are not a reach but are one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445") as a provisional stop pattern during the pseudo consecutive win in step 100IWS802. The performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 100IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In step 100IWS802, for example, if the received display result designation command indicates a 6R jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are the same even numbers as the stopping symbols (normal jackpot pattern). Also, for example, if the received display result designation command indicates a 6R jackpot B to D, the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are the same odd numbers as the stopping symbols (variable jackpot pattern). Also, if the received display result designation command indicates a "small jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns of "135" as the stopping symbols (small jackpot pattern).

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols where the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the miss symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. If there are multiple types of time-saving misses, the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the miss symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond-shaped symbol) according to the type of time-saving miss.

However, in this example, even if a time-saving miss occurs in a high base state, it is effectively invalidated, so when in a high base state, even if the received display result designation command indicates a "time-saving miss," the combination of decorative patterns for a "miss" is displayed, rather than a combination of decorative patterns for a miss pattern including a special pattern (e.g., a star pattern). Note that in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, even if a time-saving miss occurs in a high base state, a special pattern corresponding to the time-saving miss is displayed.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for the decorative patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a jackpot (a combination of the same patterns on the left, center, and right) are called jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a chance jackpot (a combination of the same odd-numbered patterns on the left, center, and right) are called chance jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a normal jackpot (non-chances jackpot) (a combination of the same even-numbered patterns on the left, center, and right) are called non-chances jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a miss are called miss patterns.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the execution of a preview performance to be executed during the display of the fluctuation (step 108IWS802A). As a preview performance, for example, a timer performance can be executed in which a countdown is started after the fluctuation starts, and when the count reaches "0", a performance image suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the execution setting of the timer performance can be set.

In this example, the preview effect can be executed in both cases where the display result is a jackpot or a miss, and is configured so that the preview effect is executed more frequently in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of the preview effect suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

In this configuration, the rate at which the preview performance is executed is lower in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview performance is executed but does not result in a jackpot during the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) . In addition, the pre-reading preview performance may also be configured to be executed at a lower rate in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10).

In addition, if a display (e.g., a countdown display) that suggests the upcoming rescue time reduction can be executed during a specified period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when there are 10 or fewer plays remaining until the rescue time reduction), then by restricting the execution of a timer display as a preview display at this time, it is possible to avoid multiple numbers indicating the counter being displayed, preventing them from interfering with each other.

In addition, in this example, a preview effect can be executed in a red presentation mode (e.g., a red presentation image is displayed) and a blue presentation mode (e.g., a blue presentation image is displayed), and the system is configured so that the probability of executing a preview effect in the red presentation mode is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of a preview effect in the red presentation mode suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

In this configuration, the ratio of executing the preview performance in the red performance mode when the display result is a miss is lower in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the preview performance is executed in the red performance mode in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) but does not result in a jackpot. In addition, the pre-reading preview performance may also be configured to be executed in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10).

In addition, when multiple types of preview effects (and pre-reading preview effects) with different jackpot expectations are configured to be executable, only the preview effects (and pre-reading preview effects) with a high jackpot expectation may be restricted from being executed during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less). For example, when the jackpot expectation is classified into five stages, only the preview effects (and pre-reading preview effects) with a jackpot expectation of the fourth stage or higher may be restricted from being executed. In addition, for example, when a preview effect (and pre-reading preview effect) that suggests that the time reduction will be missed is configured to be executable, the execution of the preview effect (and pre-reading preview effect) that suggests that the time reduction will be missed may be restricted during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less).

In addition, for example, even if there are 10 or fewer plays remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated, if a variable display is executed that indicates a jackpot or a time-saving feature failure, the execution of the preview effect (and the look-ahead preview effect) may not be restricted.

In addition, in the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance or the preview performance may be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be reduced (or not executed). In this case, the execution rate of the preview performance in the case of a miss may be reduced (or not executed), or the execution rate of the preview performance of a type with a high expectation may be reduced (or not executed). In addition, when the number of reserved memories is a value greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving, that is, when the number of reserved memories is a value greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance that predicts the reserved memory that is stored before the rescue time-saving fluctuation is reached and corresponds to the fluctuation that occurs after the control is made to the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving may be restricted (prohibited). This makes it possible to restrict the execution of the look-ahead preview performance that spans before and after the control of the rescue time-saving, and to avoid the occurrence of performance malfunctions. Note that even if the number of reserved memories is a value greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving, when the time-saving state (for example, the time-saving state via a jackpot or the time-saving state via a miss) is in, it may be possible to execute the look-ahead preview performance that predicts the reserved memory that corresponds to the fluctuation that occurs after the control is made to the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 0 (step 108IWS805). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 0 can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is 0.

When the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 0, the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether the display result is a jackpot or not (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry presentation that notifies the player that the rescue time reduction will control the player to the time-saving state (step 100IWS806B). With this configuration, the time-saving entry presentation can notify the player that the rescue time reduction will control the player to the time-saving state at the appropriate time, thereby increasing the player's interest when the rescue time reduction is reached.

On the other hand, if the display result is a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry pseudo presentation that notifies the player that a jackpot has been reached after executing a presentation of a common type to the time-saving entry presentation (step 100IWS806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812. With this configuration, the player is notified of a jackpot after first recognizing that the number of remaining changes until the time-saving rescue period is reached is 0, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases their interest.

In this example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the time-saving feature has been changed is reached, a special change pattern (second change pattern #M) is used to execute a time-saving feature appearance effect, but this is not limited to this. For example, a full rotation effect (i.e., a jackpot is confirmed) in which the three decorative symbols change while remaining aligned, which is not executed except when the number of times the time-saving feature has been changed, may be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and specialness, and to increase interest.

In addition, for example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the rescue time-saving fluctuations is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for a jackpot as usual may be used, or a fluctuation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be used.

In addition, in this example, if the display result is a miss when the number of times the time-saving change is reached, a dedicated time-saving change pattern for a miss is used, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a normal miss pattern may be used, or a change pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short change time may be used. By configuring in this way, the change pattern can be made common before and after the number of times the time-saving change is reached, and data capacity can be reduced. In this case, when the next change display starts, the image display device 5 switches to a background image corresponding to the time-saving state (see steps 061IWS56A, S56B), and this change in background image can notify the user that the time-saving state has been controlled by the time-saving change.

If the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached is not 0, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance selects a process table corresponding to the change pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812. If the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance may select a process table including a promotional effect (for example, an effect that suggests the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached) corresponding to the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached. If the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance may select a process table including a countdown effect (for example, an effect that counts down the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached) or an effect effect (for example, an effect that changes depending on the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 12. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 108IWS813). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this characteristic section 108IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern command.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving state, will be described. Fig. 11-23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the time-saving state in the first embodiment is shifted to. In Fig. 11-23, the performance screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the example shown in FIG. 11-23, as shown in FIG. 11-23(A), when the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is stopped and then the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is started, as shown in FIG. 11-23(B), a time reduction entry effect (blackout effect) is started that makes it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5. Also at this time, right-hit instruction display 100IW108 that instructs right-hit is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 11-23(C), the blackout state is resolved, and an image is displayed (for example, a "Chance mode has been entered" display shown in FIG. 11-23(C)) to notify the player that control of the time-saving state (rescue time-saving) is about to begin, and a special sound effect is output.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 11-23, the time-saving entry effect is executed when the rescue time-saving feature is initiated, so that a notification that the time-saving feature will be activated can be issued at an appropriate time based on the rescue time-saving feature being established, thereby enhancing interest.

In addition, in the configuration shown in FIG. 11-23, when a change display is being executed based on a change pattern (for example, first change pattern #M) that is specifically designed for when rescue time-saving is established, the time-saving entry effect is executed, so that the player can be clearly notified by the time-saving entry effect that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state based on the establishment of rescue time-saving.

In addition, in the configuration shown in FIG. 11-23, when the time-saving entry effect is executed (i.e., when control of the time-saving state by the rescue time-saving is started), the right-hit instruction display 100IW108 is displayed, so that the right-hit notification can be executed appropriately.

When the time-saving state, including the rescue time-saving state, ends and transitions to the normal state, a left-hand hit instruction display instructing the player to hit left may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the time-saving entry performance, notifications that are generally made during the ending period of the first win, such as a warning to not forget to remove the prepaid card or a warning to prevent addiction, may be made, or the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer may be displayed. In this case, the notifications and logo display in the time-saving entry performance may be made in the same manner as the notifications and logo display in the ending period of the first win, or may be made in a simplified manner. In addition, these notifications and logo displays may not be made during the time-saving entry performance, but may be made during the ending period of the first big win after the time-saving state has been entered by the rescue time-saving.

When the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the time-saving time-saving time-saving time-saving time-saving effect is reached, as shown in FIG. 11-23(B), a blackout effect is started in the same manner as the time-saving time-saving effect, making it difficult to see the effect display (e.g., decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5, and a right-hit instruction display 100IW108 that instructs the player to hit right is displayed. Then, instead of the effect shown in FIG. 11-23(C), the blackout state is eliminated and an effect is executed in which a jackpot pattern (e.g., the combination of patterns "777") is stopped and displayed. Then, the game moves to a jackpot game. With this configuration, the player is notified of a jackpot after once recognizing that the time-saving time-saving time-saving time-saving effect has been achieved, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his interest.

In addition, when the configuration of this feature unit 116IW is applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be able to execute a special feature game in which control is made to a big win game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the special feature during a small win game, when the display result of the variable display that results in a rescue time-saving feature is a small win, a fake time-saving entry performance may be executed, and then a notification of a small win may be made.

(Modification 1-3)
Next, the configuration of modified example 1-3 will be described. In this example, in the variable display where the rescue time reduction is established, a time reduction entry presentation is configured to notify that control of the time reduction state (rescue time reduction) will start, but since it is also configured to start control of the time reduction state (rescue time reduction) at the start of the variable display where the rescue time reduction is established, it may be configured to execute the time reduction entry presentation in the variable display immediately before the variable display where the rescue time reduction is established.

In this case, for example, in the first special pattern normal processing and the second special pattern normal processing, when the value of the updated rescue time reduction counter is "1", a rescue immediately before rescue fluctuation flag is set, indicating that the fluctuation display is immediately before the fluctuation display in which rescue time reduction is established, and in the first fluctuation pattern setting processing and the second fluctuation pattern setting processing, if the rescue immediately before rescue fluctuation flag is set, a dedicated fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern #M or the first fluctuation pattern #N) is determined to be used only for the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in which rescue time reduction is established. Then, in the variable display start setting processing, if the remaining number of rescue time reductions is 1, a process table including a time reduction entry performance is selected. By such processing, a time reduction entry performance can be executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in which rescue time reduction is established.

Figure 11-24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to the time-saving state in variant 1-3 of the first embodiment. In Figure 11-24, the presentation screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the modified example 1-3 shown in FIG. 11-24, the time-saving entry effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the variable display that establishes the rescue time-saving effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-24(A), when the variable display two times before the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving effect is stopped and then the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving effect starts, as shown in FIG. 11-24(B), a time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) is started that makes it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5. However, since the time-saving state has not been entered at this point, right-hit instruction display 100IW108 instructing right-hit is not displayed.

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 11-24(C), the blackout state is cleared, and an image is displayed (for example, the "Entering Chance Mode" display shown in FIG. 11-24(C)) to notify the user that control of the time-saving state (rescue time-saving) has begun, and sound effects are output. At this point, the time-saving state has not yet been entered, so the right-hit instruction display 100IW108 instructing the player to hit to the right is not displayed.

After that, when the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving starts, control of the time-saving state begins, and the right-hit instruction display 100IW108 instructing a right hit is displayed, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (D).

In the configuration of variant 1-3 shown in FIG. 11-24, the time-saving entry effect is executed immediately before the rescue time-saving mode begins, so the player can prepare to hit the right in anticipation of the start of the rescue time-saving mode. In this respect, too, a notification that the time-saving mode will be entered can be issued at the appropriate time based on the establishment of the rescue time-saving mode, which can increase interest.

In addition, when a time-saving entry effect is executed in the change display immediately before the change display in which the rescue time-saving is established, the change display in which the rescue time-saving is established executes the change display using a change pattern that is also used in other change displays (i.e., a change pattern that is not exclusive to when the rescue time-saving is established). With this configuration, the change pattern can be made common when the rescue time-saving is established and before it is established, and data capacity can be reduced. Note that the change display that executes the time-saving entry effect (the change display immediately before the change display in which the rescue time-saving is established) may also be executed using a change pattern that is also used in other change displays (i.e., a change pattern that is not exclusive to when the rescue time-saving is established).

In addition, in the configuration of variant example 1-3 shown in Figure 11-24, the time-saving entry effect is executed immediately before the rescue time-saving feature starts, but the right-hit instruction display 100IW108 is displayed when the variable display indicating that the rescue time-saving feature is established starts (i.e., when control of the time-saving state by the rescue time-saving feature starts), so the right-hit notification can be executed appropriately.

In addition, when the display result of the variable display immediately before the variable display in which the rescue time-saving feature is established is a jackpot, it may be possible to execute a performance that gives the illusion of entering the time-saving feature. With this configuration, the player is informed of the jackpot after first recognizing that the rescue time-saving feature has been established, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases their interest.

In addition, the configuration that enables the execution of a time-saving entry effect and a time-saving entry appearance effect when a variable display that establishes a rescue time-saving effect is executed, or when a variable display immediately prior to a variable display that establishes a rescue time-saving effect is executed, is not limited to gaming machines with the configuration shown in the first embodiment of this characteristic section 116IW, but can also be applied to gaming machines with other configurations, such as a gaming machine with a high probability/low base state (small hit RUSH) in which small hits occur frequently, as shown in the second embodiment.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the characteristic part 116IW will be described. Note that in this embodiment, detailed descriptions of parts that perform the same configurations and processes as those in the first embodiment will be omitted, and the description will focus mainly on parts that are different from the first embodiment.

In the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, the game state includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT state: a first KT state and a second KT state. In the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, the game state includes a state controlled to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state), a state controlled to a low probability and a first KT state (low probability/first KT state), a state controlled to a high probability and a first KT state (high probability/first KT state), and a state controlled to a high probability and a second KT state (high probability/second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in an open state, but the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is extremely long, and even if a small hit occurs, there are very few cases in which the game ball wins in the downstream special variable winning ball device 17 (for example, about one ball per 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled to a state in which small hits are likely to occur and is controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is long. In addition, in the second KT state among the KT states, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is likely to win in the downstream special variable winning ball device 17. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled to a state in which small hits are likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is short.

In the second embodiment, the first special symbol is configured so that the display result is a small win (or the rate of small wins is higher than that of misses (no time reduction)) when the display result is other than a big win or a miss in the time reduction. In other words, the first special symbol is configured so that the display result is either a big win, a small win, or a miss in the time reduction, and the display result is not a miss (no time reduction) (or the rate of small wins is higher than that of misses (no time reduction)). However, in the non-KT state (normal state), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short when the display result of the first special symbol is a small win, making it extremely difficult (or practically impossible) to win a game ball in the special variable winning ball device 17.

(Transition of Game State in the Second Embodiment)
The transition of the game state in the second embodiment of the feature part 116IW will be described. FIG. 12-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the way of transition of the game state in the second embodiment of the feature part 116IW. First, in the feature part 116IW, in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal variable time, whereas the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the long variable, so that the player performs the launch operation (left hit) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the start entry into the first start entry hole mainly occurs, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Also, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, a 10R sure-change jackpot, a 6R sure-change jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 10R variable probability jackpot occurs in a low probability/low base state, if a game ball enters V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state transitions to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if a game ball does not enter V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when a 6R variable probability jackpot occurs in a low probability/low base state, if a game ball enters V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state transitions to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the jackpot game ends, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 variable display times are completed.

In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the time-saving state (in this example, low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state)) is controlled via a time-saving miss and a time-saving rescue, as in the first embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-1, even if a miss occurs in the low probability/low base state (normal state), if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2032A and S2032B in the first embodiment). Furthermore, even if a miss occurs, if a rescue time-saving state occurs (after the RAM clear processing or after a jackpot game, if the next jackpot does not occur and the number of fluctuations reaches 800), the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment).

In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, and the rescue time reduction counter can be updated at the timing when the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are started (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment).

After transitioning to the KT state (high probability/high base state, low probability/high base state, high probability/low base state), in the second embodiment of this feature unit 116IW, the first special symbol is displayed in a long variation, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in a normal variation time, so the player aims the ball to the right of the play area (hits to the right). Therefore, in the KT state, a start winning entry into the second start winning hole occurs primarily, and the second special symbol is displayed primarily. Also, since the second special symbol is displayed primarily, when a jackpot occurs in the KT state, a 10R special jackpot, a 6R special jackpot, or a 2R special jackpot occurs primarily.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 10R or 2R jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state transitions to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if a game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when a 6R jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state transitions to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during jackpot play, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, in the second embodiment of this feature part 116IW, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the probability of a 6R jackpot is 50% in total, so once the high probability/high base state is reached, the high probability/high base state will loop with a probability of 50%.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 10R or 2R jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state transitions to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if a game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state may not be controlled to a high probability state. Also, when a 6R jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state transitions to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during jackpot play, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. If a 6R normal jackpot occurs and the state is in a low probability/high base state, and 50 variable displays end without another jackpot occurring, the state will transition to a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) as shown in Figure 12-1.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the rescue time-saving is activated in the low probability/high base state (after the RAM clear process or after a jackpot game, when the number of changes reaches 800 without the next jackpot occurring), the game is again controlled to the low probability/high base state (first KT state) with the number of time-saving times of 800 (for example, this corresponds to the part that executes the processes of steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A and S5607B to S5608B in the first embodiment). Note that the number of time-saving times in the second embodiment corresponds to the remaining number of times that the first special symbol change display and the second special symbol change display can be executed in the low probability/high base state (first KT state).

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, when the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern are executed a total of a predetermined number of times in the low probability/high base state, the low probability/high base state ends and transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state).

For example, if the state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) via a time-saving miss, when the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the second special symbol changes are executed a total of 100 times, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) ends and the state transitions to a low probability/low base state (normal state) (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A, S5617A to S5620A, S2030B to S2033B, and S5617B to S5620B in the first embodiment).

In addition, when the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) is controlled via the rescue time reduction, when the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the second special symbol changes are executed a total of 800 times, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) ends and the state transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state) (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5607A-S5608A, S5617A-S5620A, S5607B-S5608B, S5617B-S5620B in the first embodiment).

In the example shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the state is controlled to a low probability/high base state with 50 time-saving times, but as in the first embodiment, the advantageous degree of the time-saving state controlled after the jackpot game may be different depending on the game state when the jackpot occurs. For example, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs during a normal state (low base state), the state may be controlled to a low probability/high base state with 100 time-saving times, and when a 6R normal jackpot occurs during a high base state, the state may be controlled to a low probability/high base state with 200 time-saving times. In this case, as in the first embodiment, if the variable display that establishes the rescue time reduction is a jackpot, it may be determined that the jackpot has occurred in a high base state, and the state may be controlled to a low probability/high base state of 200 time reductions after the jackpot game ends (for example, the execution of the jackpot determination module of steps 061IWS59A and S59B in the first embodiment corresponds to the part that is executed after the update process of the rescue time reduction counter and the setting process of the high base flag in steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A and S5602B to S5608B). This configuration can increase the degree of rescue for the player.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 10R or 2R jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state transitions to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if a game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, in the second embodiment of this feature part 116IW, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the probability of a 10R or 2R jackpot is 50%, so once the high probability/low base state is entered, the high probability/low base state will loop at a rate of 50%. Also, if a 6R jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state.

Note that in FIG. 12-1, a case where the first special symbol is displayed in a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is described, but there is also a possibility that the second special symbol is displayed in a low probability. In this case, if a 10R or 2R guaranteed jackpot occurs, and the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during jackpot play, the state will transition to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Also, if a 6R guaranteed jackpot occurs, and the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during jackpot play, the state will transition to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In addition, in FIG. 12-1, a case where the second special symbol is displayed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is described, but there is also a possibility that the first special symbol is displayed in a low rate. In this case, if a 10R special jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, if a 6R special jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the state will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 variable displays are completed.

In addition, in FIG. 12-1, a case where the second special symbol is displayed in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) is described, but there is also a possibility that the first special symbol is displayed in the low probability. In this case, if a 10R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, if a 6R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the state will transition to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 variable displays are completed.

In addition, in FIG. 12-1, a case where the second special symbol is displayed in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is described, but there is also a possibility that the first special symbol is displayed in a low rate. In this case, if a 10R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, if a 6R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the state will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 variable displays are completed.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), the first special symbol is displayed in a normal change time, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in a long change. In other words, the first special symbol is displayed in a shorter change time (or the rate at which it is displayed) than the second special symbol. Thus, in the second embodiment, the low probability/low base state (normal state) is a first shortened state in which the rate at which the first special symbol is displayed in a shorter change time than the second special symbol is high. Note that in the second embodiment, in the low probability/low base state (normal state) which is the first shortened state, the rate at which the first special symbol is displayed in a shorter change time than the second special symbol may be configured to be, for example, 100%, or may be configured to be lower than 100% but at least higher than the second shortened state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment of the feature part 116IW, in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/low base state (second KT state), the first special symbol is displayed in a long fluctuation, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in a normal fluctuation time. In other words, the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time (or the rate at which it is displayed is high) than the first special symbol. Thus, in the second embodiment, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/low base state (second KT state) are second shortened states in which the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol. In the second embodiment, in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and high probability/low base state (second KT state) which are the second shortened state, the percentage at which the second special pattern fluctuation display is a fluctuation display with a shorter fluctuation time than the first special pattern fluctuation display may be configured to be, for example, 100%, or may be configured to be lower than 100% but at least higher than the first shortened state.

In the second embodiment, when the rescue time reduction is established in the normal state, the rescue time reduction is controlled by increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol, shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port). In addition, in addition to the control related to the normal symbol, the rescue time reduction is controlled by shortening the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (i.e., controlling to a second shortened state in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is more likely to have a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol). In other words, a transition is made to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) (e.g., corresponding to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment).

However, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, even if the rescue time reduction is established by the execution of the rescue time reduction by executing ...

In the second embodiment, as described above, the first special symbol is configured so that the display result is a small win (or the rate of small wins is higher than that of misses (no time reduction)) when the display result is other than a big win or a miss in the time reduction. In other words, the first special symbol is configured so that the display result is either a big win, a small win, or a miss in the time reduction, and is not a miss (no time reduction) (or the rate of small wins is higher than that of misses (no time reduction)). Note that, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when a small win pattern is derived and displayed in the display of the other special symbol during the execution of the display of the change of one of the first and second special symbols, the display of the change of the one special symbol is configured to be forcibly derived and displayed (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, and S1129B in the first embodiment).

In the second embodiment, by combining these configurations, when the first special symbol is displayed during the second special symbol display (long change), a rescue time reduction is established by executing the first special symbol display. In addition to the control for the normal symbols, the rescue time reduction (high base state) is controlled by shortening the second special symbol's change time (i.e., the second special symbol is controlled to a second shortened state (in this example, a low probability/high base state (first KT state)) in which the probability that the second special symbol display will have a shorter change time than the first special symbol display is high). In this case, the display result of the first special symbol display in which the rescue time reduction is established is a small win unless it is a big win or a time reduction miss. Then, based on the fact that a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display (long change) being executed is forcibly stopped at a miss symbol. Therefore, without waiting for the long fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) to expire, it is possible to execute the fluctuation display of the second special symbol with a shortened fluctuation time (i.e., improved fluctuation efficiency), and it is possible to enjoy the benefits of the rescue time reduction. In addition, when controlled by the rescue time reduction, the game can be smoothly progressed, and interest can be increased.

(First special symbol normal processing in variant example 2)
12-2 to 12-5 are flowcharts showing the normal processing of the first special symbol in the second variant example.

In variant 2, the processes in steps 061IWS50A to S56A are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, in the second modification, the processing of step 061IWS5601A shown in the first embodiment is not executed, so the update processing of the rescue time reduction counter is executed even in the high probability state (high probability state). In other words, not only in the non-high probability state (low probability state), but also in the high probability state (high probability state), the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is executed is uniformly decreased when the fluctuation display is executed. Therefore, in the second modification, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction becomes "0", the high probability flag may be set.

When the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction becomes "0", if the special chance flag is set (Y in step 061IWS56061A), i.e., if rescue time reduction is established in the special chance state, the process moves to step 061IWS5701A.

In addition, in variant 2, the high base count counter is set to "100" after a special jackpot, and each time a change display is executed, the high base count counter is decremented by 1 by the processing of steps 061IWS5717A to S5719A. Here, if the special jackpot flag is set when the value of the high base count counter after the decrement becomes "0", that is, if the special jackpot state after a special jackpot play has reached 100 changes but has not fallen out of the special jackpot state, the process of resetting the high base flag (step 061IWS5620A) is not executed. In this case, the high probability state and high base state are maintained until the special jackpot state is reached.

On the other hand, if the high base count counter value after subtraction becomes "0", and the high probability flag is not set, that is, if the game falls into the high probability state after a jackpot game due to a high probability jackpot with less than 100 fluctuations and only the high probability flag is reset (when the processing of steps 061IWS5705A and S5711A described below is executed), or if the game was controlled to a low probability/high base state after a normal jackpot, the high base flag is reset (step 061IWS5620A). In the modified example 2, if the game falls into the high probability state after a jackpot game due to a high probability jackpot with less than 100 fluctuations, the high probability state (high probability state) ends immediately, but the time-saving state (high base state) continues until it reaches 100 fluctuations due to the processing of step 061IWS56191A.

In addition, in the second modification, the processes of steps 061IWS5607A to S5611A, S5614A to S5616A, S5617A to S5619A, and S5620A to S5621A are the same as those shown in the first embodiment. In the second modification, when step 061IWS5621A is completed, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5702A.

In step 061IWS5701A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a rescue time reduction flag indicating that rescue time reduction has been achieved in the special probability state (step 061IWS5701A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the probability of winning is set (step 061IWS5702A), and if it is not set, proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

If the probability of a bonus is set (Y in step 061IWS5702A), the game control microcomputer 100 reads out the random number for fall judgment stored in the random number buffer area (different from the random number for jackpot judgment or the random number for jackpot type judgment, and is a random number dedicated to fall judgment) and performs a fall lottery process based on the random number for fall judgment (061IWS5703A). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out the random number for fall judgment extracted in the start winning judgment process (step S101) and stored in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer in advance, and performs a probability of a bonus fall lottery judgment. When the value matches the fall judgment value, the game control microcomputer 100 decides to end the probability of a bonus. In the modified example 2, in the process of step 061IWS5703A, it is decided to end the probability of a bonus with a probability of 1/800, for example.

If the special probability state is not to be dropped (the special probability state is not to be ended) (N in 061IWS5704A), the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A. If it is decided to end the special probability state (Y in step 061IWS5704A), the game control microcomputer 100 judges whether there have been less than 100 fluctuations after a jackpot game (step 061IWS5705A). For example, by providing a counter that can count the number of fluctuations in the special probability state after a jackpot game, and checking the counter in step 061IWS5705A, it is possible to determine whether there have been less than 100 fluctuations after a jackpot game.

If the change after the big win is less than 100 (Y in step 061IWS5705A), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the probability change flag (step 061IWS5711A) and sets the provocation reach A flag indicating that provocation reach A will be executed (step 061IWS5713A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

In the second variant, when the probability of a jackpot being played in the probability of a jackpot state after a jackpot game is lost with less than 100 fluctuations, only the probability of a jackpot flag is reset by the processing of step 061IWS5711A. In addition, after the display result of the ongoing fluctuation display suggests whether a jackpot will be reached or the probability of a jackpot will be lost and the probability of a jackpot state will end, a provocative reach A is executed to notify the player that the probability of a jackpot state will be lost.

If the fluctuation is not less than 100 after the jackpot (N in step 061IWS5705A), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the rescue time-saving flag is set (step 061IWS5706A), and if it is not set, it resets the high probability flag and high base flag, and ends the high probability state and the time-saving state (step 061IWS5712A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the provocative reach A flag, which indicates that provocative reach A will be executed (061IWS5713A).

In this example, the same provocation reach A is executed in both cases where the player falls out of the special mode less than 100 times after a special mode jackpot play and where the player falls out of the special mode after 100 times. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, if the player falls out of the special mode less than 100 times after a special mode jackpot play, the player may be notified that the player will fall out of the special mode and then be notified that the time-saving state will continue. This can prevent the player from becoming too disappointed when the player falls out of the special mode in a short period of time.

If the rescue time-saving flag is set (Y in step 061IWS5706A), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the rescue time-saving flag (step 061IWS5707A) and sets the high base count counter to "800" (step 061IWS5708A). The game control microcomputer 100 also resets the probability change flag (061IWS5709A). After that, it sets the provocation reach B flag, which indicates that provocation reach B will be executed (061IWS5710A), and proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

If the rescue time reduction is established after the probability change, the state is controlled to the time reduction state (high base state) due to the rescue time reduction from the time when the rescue time reduction is established, and if the rescue time reduction is established before the probability change, the state is controlled to the normal state from the time of the probability change, the benefit received depending on the timing of the rescue time reduction will be significantly different, and there is a risk of insufficient rescue. Therefore, in the second modification, the processing of steps 061IWS5706A to S5708A is configured so that if the rescue time reduction is established in the probability change state, the state is controlled to the time reduction state due to the rescue time reduction when the probability change occurs. Therefore, the count of 800 times of the time reduction due to the rescue time reduction will not start when the rescue time reduction is established, but after the probability change occurs and the transition to the time reduction state occurs. With this configuration, rescue due to the rescue time reduction can be received appropriately.

In addition, by processing step 061IWS5707A, the rescue time-saving flag is reset when the game falls into the special probability state and is controlled to a time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving. This configuration allows the information that the rescue time-saving has been established in the special probability state to be properly managed.

Information indicating the state of the rescue time-saving flag is stored, for example, in RAM 102. When the RAM clear process is executed, the rescue time-saving flag and the special probability flag are reset. In other words, when the RAM clear process is executed during a special probability state in which the rescue time-saving flag has been established, the game state becomes a normal state (low probability/low base state) in which the rescue time-saving flag is not set. With this configuration, information indicating that the rescue time-saving flag has been established during a special probability state can be appropriately managed.

In the RAM clear process, the high probability flag is reset, but the rescue time reduction flag is maintained. Also, if the high probability flag is not set at the start of the fluctuation, but the rescue time reduction flag is set, control may be made to the rescue time reduction (low probability/high base state). In other words, if the RAM clear process is executed when the game is in a high probability state where rescue time reduction has been established, the game state will be the normal state (low probability/low base state), but when the fluctuation display starts, control may be made to the rescue time reduction.

In addition, in step 061, the IWS5710A process suggests whether the display result of the ongoing variable display will be a jackpot or a drop into the special probability state, which will end the special probability state, and then executes a provocative reach B that first notifies the player that the drop into the special probability state will occur, and then notifies the player that the time-saving rescue function will control the player to a time-saving state (high base state).

As shown in FIG. 12-5, in variant 2, when a jackpot is determined to have occurred by execution of the jackpot determination module, the rescue time reduction flag is reset if set (step 061IWS631A). By processing step 061IWS631A, it is possible to appropriately manage information that rescue time reduction has been established in a high probability state. It is also possible to prevent excessive rescue from being performed.

In addition, in variant 2, when a jackpot is determined to have occurred by execution of the jackpot determination module, if the sure win flag is set (Y in step 061IWS632A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the provocative reach C flag, which indicates that provocative reach C will be executed (061IWS633A).

Step 061: IWS632A to S633A processes the ongoing variable display to indicate whether it will result in a jackpot or a drop into the special probability state, ending the special probability state, and then a provocative reach C is executed to notify the player that a jackpot will occur.

In addition, in the second modification, the processes in steps 061IWS57A to S63A and S64A to S89A are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

In the first variation pattern setting process of the second variant, it is determined whether any of the provocation reaches A to C is set, and if set, the variation pattern for executing the corresponding provocation reach is determined. The other processes are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

In the second modification, the second special symbol normal processing and the second variation pattern setting processing execute the same processing as the first special symbol normal processing and the first variation pattern setting processing. Therefore, in the second modification, in both the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display, it is possible to execute a probability drop lottery or an instigation reach.

In the first and second variation pattern setting processes, when any of the provocation reaches A to C is set and the number of variations in the high probability state after a jackpot game exceeds 100 variations, a provocation reach may be executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12-6, a common presentation (for example, a common background image may be displayed) may be executed regardless of whether or not a high probability state has occurred until the number of variations in the high probability state after a jackpot game reaches 100 variations. In other words, the player may not be able to recognize whether or not a high probability state has occurred until the 100th variation. Also, as shown in FIG. 12-6, a high probability state fall judgment presentation may be executed to notify whether a high probability state has occurred or the high probability state is continuing at the 100th variation.

For example, if the probability of falling into the probability variation state has already been reached, a probability of falling into the probability variation state determination presentation of pattern A is executed to notify the player that the probability of falling into the probability variation state has already been reached. Also, if the probability of falling into the probability variation state has already been reached but the player is under control of the rescue time reduction, a probability of falling into the probability variation state determination presentation of pattern B is executed to notify the player that the rescue time reduction is under control after notifying the player that the probability of falling into the probability variation state has already been reached.
In addition, if a jackpot is hit at the 100th variation, a probability change fall judgment presentation in the form of pattern C that notifies the player of the jackpot is executed. In addition, if the probability change state continues, a probability change fall judgment presentation in the form of pattern D that notifies the player of the continuation of the probability change state is executed.

The configuration shown in Figure 12-6 can create tension for the player during the period from the 100th change onwards in the special probability state, increasing interest.

In addition, in the second variant, when the rescue time reduction is established in the high probability state, the player is notified that the game has fallen out of the high probability state and then informed that the rescue time reduction will occur. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, when the rescue time reduction is established in the high probability state, no announcement may be made even if the game falls out of the high probability state. In other words, even if the game falls out of the high probability state, no announcement may be made or the presentation may change, and the game may fall out of the high probability state without the player realizing it.

(Example of the second modification)
Next, a specific example of the presentation mode of the provocation reach in Modification 2 will be described. Fig. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode of the provocation reach in Modification 2. In Fig. 12-7, the presentation screen transitions in the order of (1) (2) (3-1) for provocation reach A, (1) (2) (3-2) (4) for provocation reach B, and (1) (2) (3-3) for provocation reach C.

In the probability bonus state, as shown in FIG. 12-7(1), when the left and right decorative patterns are aligned, a provocative reach begins in which the friendly character 014IW002 and the enemy character 014IW003a engage in a battle, as shown in FIG. 12-7(2).

In the case of provocation reach A, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (3-1), a probability drop image 014IW004a is displayed to inform the player that the ally character 014IW002 has lost the battle and will drop out of the probability drop state. After that, the game will transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state).

In the case of provocation reach B, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (3-2), a probability drop image 014IW004a is displayed to notify the player that the ally character 014IW002 has lost the battle and will fall into probability drop, but as shown in FIG. 12-7 (4), a text display of "Entering Chance Mode" and a rescue time-saving image 014IW004c are displayed to notify the player that the rescue time-saving control will be applied. Note that this is not limited to the form shown in FIG. 12-7 (4), and for example, the time-saving entry performance shown in FIG. 11-23 may be executed. After that, the game transitions to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state).

In the case of the provocation reach C, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (3-3), the ally character 014IW002 wins the battle, and a jackpot image 014IW004b is displayed to notify the player that a jackpot has been reached. After that, the game moves to the jackpot game state.

In the second modification, when a rescue time reduction is established in the high probability state, a rescue time reduction establishment notification is executed to notify the fact. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (1) and (2), when a rescue time reduction is established at the start of the fluctuation, a "Chi" icon 014IW003d is displayed on a part of the image display device 5, indicating that the game will be controlled to a chance mode (rescue time reduction). The rescue time reduction establishment notification as shown in FIG. 12-8 can be realized, for example, by transmitting a presentation control command indicating that a rescue time reduction has been established to the presentation control board 12 when the main board 11 determines that a rescue time reduction has been established, and by controlling the presentation control board 12 to display a "Chi" icon 014IW003d on a part of the image display device 5 when the presentation control command is received. This configuration allows the player to recognize that the game will be controlled to a time reduction state after the high probability state ends, giving the player a sense of security and increasing the interest.

Note that the notification of rescue time-saving activation as shown in FIG. 12-8 may be made (or drawn by lottery) not only in the special state, but also when rescue time-saving activation is activated in the normal state, or when the game is controlled to the time-saving state by rescue time-saving activation.

(Example of control of game state in Modification 2)
Next, a description will be given of an example of control of the gaming state in Modification 2. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 12-9 (A), if the rescue time reduction has not been established in the high probability state before the drop to high probability state occurs, the high probability flag and high base flag are reset when the drop to high probability state occurs (T1 timing), and the game state transitions from a high probability/high base state to a low probability/low base state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-9(B), if the rescue time reduction is established in the high probability state before the drop to high probability state, for example, if the rescue time reduction is established at timing t1 in FIG. 12-9(B), the rescue time reduction flag is set at timing t1. Then, when the drop to high probability state occurs (timing t2), the high probability flag and rescue time reduction flag are reset, and the high base flag is maintained. In other words, the game state transitions from a high probability/high base state to a low probability/high base state.

The configuration shown in variant example 2 can be applied to both the first and second embodiments described above. When applied to the configuration of the first embodiment, for example, a fall lottery may be executed when in a high probability/high base state (second special probability state), and if the lottery is won, a transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state) may occur. When applied to the configuration of the second embodiment, for example, a fall lottery may be executed when in a high probability/high base state (first KT state), and if the lottery is won, a transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state) may occur.

In the first and second embodiments described above, both are configured so that the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display can be executed in parallel, but the configuration is not limited to this configuration. The configuration shown in variant example 2 can also be applied to a configuration in which the special symbol variable display is executed in the order of the starting winnings, or a configuration in which either the first special symbol variable display or the second special symbol variable display is executed with priority.

In addition, the characteristic unit 116IW and each modified example shown above are applied to a gaming machine that controls to a big win game based on the variable display result, but this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the configuration of controlling to a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state shown in the characteristic unit 116IW and each modified example shown above may be applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be able to execute a role game that controls to a big win game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the role game during a small win game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples shown above, the number of times the time until the rescue time reduction occurs is fixed at 800, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900" depending on whether the RAM clear process is being executed or a jackpot has occurred, or the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched randomly to "800" or "900".

In addition, in the characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples described above, information that can identify the number of times the rescue time reduction has occurred may be retained. For example, the high base flag set for the second rescue time reduction after a transition may be different from the high base flag set for the first rescue time reduction.

In addition, in the characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples shown above, different effects may be executed in the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a missed time-saving state, and the time-saving state via a rescue (for example, a different background display may be displayed, or a different fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) may be determined).

In addition, in the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example shown above, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of a high probability state, a case has been shown where the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example are applied to a gaming machine in which high probability control is performed until the next high probability state occurs (or until the game falls into high probability state), but this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of a high probability state, a configuration for controlling to a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state shown in the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example shown above may be applied to a so-called ST machine in which an upper limit is set for the number of special symbol games (i.e., the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol) in which high probability control is performed.

Specifically, a case will be described in which the configuration of controlling to the time-saving state via rescue time-saving shown in the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example described above is applied to a gaming machine configured as a so-called ST machine, in which the probability of a jackpot is about 1/100, the probability of being controlled to a probability variable state at a rate of 100% after the end of the jackpot game state, and the upper limit number of times (e.g., 8 times) of the special game in which the probability variable control is performed is set. Note that in the ST gaming machine, multiple types of jackpots (e.g., 10R probability variable jackpot and 5R probability variable jackpot, etc.) are provided as the display results of the first special pattern change display and the second special pattern change display, and when a jackpot occurs, the jackpot with the highest degree of advantage (e.g., 10R probability variable jackpot) is set at a predetermined rate (e.g., 5%). In addition, when the jackpot with the highest degree of advantage is reached, the jackpot is controlled to a probability variable state (high probability/high base state) after the end of the jackpot game state, and the upper limit number of times of the special game in which the probability variable control is performed is set to 8 times. If no jackpot occurs in the 8 special game games where the probability control is performed, the game is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and the upper limit number of special game games where the high base control is performed is set to 249. In other words, after the jackpot game state ends, if the next jackpot does not occur, the game is controlled to a probability state (high probability/high base state) with 8 probability games, and then to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 249 time games.

The ST gaming machine described above can be configured so that if, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or after a jackpot occurs, the next jackpot does not occur even after a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 250 times) have ended in a non-probability state (low probability state), a rescue time-saving mode has been established, and the machine is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state).

When this configuration is applied, if a jackpot with the highest degree of advantage occurs, after the jackpot game state ends, the game will first be controlled to a high probability state (high probability/high base state) with 8 high probability wins. At this time, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is reset (for example, set to "250") due to the occurrence of a jackpot. And since it is a high probability state (high probability state), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not updated.

When the 8-time chance state (high probability/high base state) ends without a jackpot occurring, the game is controlled to a 249-time time-saving state (low probability/high base state). At this time, the game is in a non-chances-of-chance state (low probability state), so the value of the rescue time-saving count counter is updated (e.g., decremented by 1) each time a special game (i.e., the first special pattern change display and the second special pattern change display) is played.

When the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) of 249 times ends without a jackpot, the state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). However, at this time, the value of the rescue time-saving counter is "1". Therefore, when the next special game (display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern) is executed, rescue time-saving is established and the state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state). Here, if there is a reserved memory stored during the time-saving state of 249 times (low probability/high base state), rescue time-saving is established by executing the special game (display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern) based on the reserved memory, and the state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the state has been changed to the low base state (normal state), and it is possible to increase interest.

When the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) ends and the state is controlled to the low base state (normal state) before the rescue time-saving state occurs, the background image corresponding to the high base state may be continuously displayed. In this case, for example, it may be determined whether the number of reserved memories stored at the time when the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) ends is greater than the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving state is established, and if it is determined to be greater, the background image corresponding to the high base state may be continuously displayed. Hereinafter, the normal state controlled after the time-saving state ends with 249 times of time-saving and before the rescue time-saving state is established (i.e., the normal state controlled once after the time-saving state and in which the rescue time-saving state is established within a short period (for example, the period until the reserved memories stored in the time-saving state are consumed)) is also referred to as the special normal state to distinguish it from other normal states.

In addition, for example, when the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state) ends and the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) due to the rescue time-saving state is controlled, a mode transition effect may be executed to indicate that control of the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) due to the rescue time-saving state will begin. In this case, after the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) ends, the mode transition effect may be executed during the execution of a variable display in the low base state (normal state) before the rescue time-saving state occurs (for example, a variable display immediately after the end of the time-saving state or a variable display immediately before the rescue time-saving state is established), or the mode transition effect may be executed during the execution of a variable display that causes the rescue time-saving state to occur.

For example, in the ST gaming machine described above, if a jackpot with a low degree of advantage (e.g., a 5R special jackpot) occurs among multiple types of jackpots, the machine will be controlled to a special state with 8 special states (high probability/high base state) after the jackpot game state ends, and then controlled to a time-saving state with 32 time-saving states (low probability/high base state) if the next jackpot does not occur. In other words, if a jackpot with a low degree of advantage occurs, even if the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) after the special state (high probability/high base state) ends, rescue time-saving will not be established within a short period of time (e.g., the period until the reserved memory stored in the time-saving state is consumed).

In this case, if the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state) is 32 (i.e., if the rescue time-saving is not established within a short period of time), a left-hit notification (for example, display of a left-hit instruction display instructing a left-hit on the image display device 5) corresponding to the normal state (low probability/low base state) is executed after the final fluctuation in the time-saving state, while if the number of time-saving times is 249 (i.e., if the rescue time-saving is established within a short period of time), a similar left-hit notification may not be executed after the final fluctuation in the time-saving state. In other words, a left-hit notification (for example, display of a left-hit instruction display instructing a left-hit on the image display device 5) may not be executed when transitioning to the special normal state. With this configuration, if the rescue time-saving is established within a short period of time after the end of the time-saving state, the player is not made aware that he or she has once transitioned to the low-base state (normal state), which can improve interest.

In addition, for example, by differentiating the types of presentation control commands such as background designation commands, jackpot start designation commands, and jackpot end designation commands sent from the main board 11 side between the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state) where the number of time-saving times is 32 (i.e., when the rescue time-saving is not established within a short period of time) and the time-saving time is 249 (i.e., when the rescue time-saving is established within a short period of time), the presentation control board 12 side may distinguish between these time-saving states and perform presentation control that matches each time-saving state (for example, displaying the corresponding background image, character image, story image, etc., outputting BGM, etc.). The method of distinguishing between time-saving states on the presentation control board 12 side is not limited to this, and for example, the type of jackpot or the number of time-saving times after jackpot play may be specified by the received display result designation command.

In addition, when the number of time reductions is 249 (i.e., when the rescue time reduction is established within a short period of time), even if the configuration is such that the left-hit notification (for example, the display of the left-hit instruction display on the image display device 5 instructing left-hit) is not executed on the performance control board 12 side after the final fluctuation in the time reduction state is completed, the main board 11 side executes processing (for example, turning off the right-hit indicator 26, stopping the output of the right-hit test signal output as a test signal, changing the launch position designation signal, etc.) corresponding to the transition to the normal state (i.e., switching from the state of right-hit to the state of left-hit). During the transition to the normal state (i.e., the special normal state), the main board 11 side may temporarily stop the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal), or may continue the external output. In addition, while continuing the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal), the output of the launch position designation signal output as a test signal may be changed (or the output of the right-hit test signal may be stopped).

In addition, for example, the effects executed may be different between the time-saving state (or a time-saving state with 249 times the time-saving count) and the normal state (or a normal state other than the special normal state). For example, effects (such as a countdown effect) that indicate that a rescue time-saving count will be achieved or the number of times until it is achieved may be executed in the normal state (or a normal state other than the special normal state), but may not be executed in the time-saving state (or a time-saving state with 249 times the time-saving count) in which the number of remaining times of the time-saving count is indicated. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the effects from becoming complicated.

The configuration that can obtain the above-mentioned effect is not limited to the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state controlled after the probability-changing state used in the above explanation, or the number of changes (non-probability-changing state) at which the rescue time-saving is established. For example, the number of changes (non-probability-changing state) at which the rescue time-saving is established may be configured to be greater than the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state, and smaller (or equal) than the sum of the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state and the upper limit memory number (e.g., 4) of the special game based on the entry into the start winning hole (e.g., the second start winning hole) that is easy to enter in the time-saving state. With such a configuration, even if the game moves to the low base state (normal state) after the end of the jackpot game state through the probability-changing state (high probability/high base state) and the time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the rescue time-saving can be established without generating a new start winning in the low base state (normal state), so that the player is not aware that the game has moved to the low base state (normal state) before the rescue time-saving is established, and interest can be improved.

In addition, for example, if the number of fluctuations (non-probability bonus state) at which the rescue time-saving feature is established is smaller than (or the same as) the number of time-saving features in the time-saving feature state, the rescue time-saving feature can be established before the time-saving feature state (low probability/high base state) that is controlled after the probability bonus state (high probability/high base state) ends (i.e., the number of time-saving features can be updated by establishing the rescue time-saving feature).

In addition, in the above-mentioned ST gaming machine, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) that is controlled after passing through a special probability state (high probability/high base state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be different when a jackpot occurs due to the changing display of the first special pattern and when a jackpot occurs due to the changing display of the second special pattern (or the proportion of advantageous time-saving times among the multiple types of time-saving times may be different). In this case, for example, when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol, after the jackpot game state ends, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled through the high probability state (high probability/high base state) may be 32 (or the number of time-saving times is 32, with a high probability of 32 out of 249), and when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol, after the jackpot game state ends, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled through the high probability state (high probability/high base state) may be 249 (or the number of time-saving times is 32, with a high probability of 249 out of 249).

In addition, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may be different (or the ratio of advantageous rounds among multiple types of round numbers may be different) when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol. For example, when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may be 5 rounds (or the ratio of 5 rounds out of 5 rounds or 10 rounds is high), and when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may be 10 rounds (or the ratio of 5 rounds out of 5 rounds or 10 rounds is high). With this configuration, the advantageous degree can be made different between the game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed and the game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, thereby improving interest.

In addition, even in the above ST gaming machine, different variation pattern tables may be used for the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state) and the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving state (low probability/high base state). For example, in the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving state (low probability/high base state), a variation pattern table may be used in which the variation time is shortened at a higher rate (and, for example, the variation pattern in which a reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) is executed at the time of a miss is determined at a lower rate) than in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state). With this configuration, when the rescue time-saving state is reached (i.e., when a jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the period until the next jackpot is controlled is shortened, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Also, for example, when the rescue time-saving state is reached (i.e., when a jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the rate of misses in the reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) is low, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example shown above, for example, the types of jackpots may be a sure-variable jackpot in which the sure-variable state (high probability/high base state) continues after the jackpot game state ends until the next jackpot occurs, a non-sure-variable jackpot A which is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 100 time-saving cycles, and a non-sure-variable jackpot B which is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 249 time-saving cycles, and a rescue time-saving mode may be established if the next jackpot does not occur even after 250 variable display cycles have ended in the non-sure-variable state after the gaming machine is powered on or a jackpot occurs. That is, a jackpot type may be set in which the time-saving state is controlled until just before the rescue time-saving is established (specifically, the sum of the number of times the time-saving state is activated and the upper limit number of memories (e.g., 4) of the special game based on entering a start winning port (e.g., the second start winning port) that is easier to enter in the time-saving state is greater than (or the same as) the number of fluctuations (non-variable state) at which the rescue time-saving is established). With this configuration, a transition of the game state is made from the time-saving state after the jackpot game to the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving (actually, the game is controlled to the normal state (i.e., special normal state) once before the rescue time-saving is established), which can increase interest.

As explained above, this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 116-1-1) to (Means 116-6).

(Means 116-1-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol), and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol), and includes update means (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 061IWS56) that can update numerical information (e.g., rescue time reduction counter). and special state control means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, a high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, a low probability/low base state). The update means is The numerical information is updated when the variable display of the identification information starts (for example, the portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the rescue time-saving count counter being "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A and S5606B to S5607B), and further includes an announcement effect execution means (for example, the portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS806B) capable of executing an announcement effect (for example, the time-saving entry effect shown in FIG. 11-23) that notifies that the special state will be controlled based on the establishment of the special condition when a variable display in which a special condition is established is being executed. With this configuration, a notification that a special state will be entered based on the establishment of a special condition can be issued at an appropriate time, enhancing interest.

(Means 116-1-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol), and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol), and includes update means (e.g., a game control microcomputer 100 when step 0) that can update numerical information (e.g., rescue time reduction counter) and a special state control means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, a high base state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, a low probability/low base state). The numerical information is updated at the timing when the display is started and the variable display of the second identification information is started (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the special state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the rescue time-saving count counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and the means further includes an announcement effect execution means capable of executing an announcement effect (for example, the time-saving entry effect shown in Figure 11-24) that notifies that the special state will be controlled based on the establishment of a special condition when a variable display immediately before the variable display in which the special condition is established is being executed. With this configuration, a notification that a special state will be entered based on the establishment of a special condition can be issued at an appropriate time, enhancing interest.

(Means 116-2) Means 116-1-1 includes a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1717A and S1717B) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (for example, a first variable pattern #M (missing entry into rescue time reduction) and a second variable pattern #L (missing entry into rescue time reduction)), and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a special variable display pattern when a special condition is met (for example, , the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS17093A, S17093B), before the special condition is established, the special variable display pattern is not determined, and the notification effect execution means can execute the notification effect when variable display using the special variable display pattern is being executed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS17093A, S17093B, or the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS805, S806B). With such a configuration, the notification effect can clearly notify the player that the special state will be controlled based on the establishment of the special condition.

(Means 116-3) Means 116-1-2 includes a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1717A and S1717B) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns, and when a special condition is met, the variable display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is met (for example, the configuration of the modified example shown in FIG. 11-24). With such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be made common when and before the special condition is met, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 116-4) In any of means 116-1-1 to 116-3, the special state control means can control the special state to a different degree of advantage after the end of the advantageous state depending on whether the advantageous state was controlled to a special state or a non-special state (e.g., a low base state) in which the advantageous state was controlled (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the processing of steps 061IWS2284, S2286 to S2287. If a 6R jackpot A occurs during a normal state (low base state) and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to 100 times the time-saving count, and if a 6R jackpot A occurs during the time-saving state (high base state), When a special condition occurs and the time-saving state (high base state) is entered, the time-saving state is controlled to 200 times (see FIG. 11-1). When the variable display result of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is a specific display result, the special state is considered to have been controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state to be controlled after the advantageous state ends is determined (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the jackpot determination module of steps 061IWS59A and S59B after updating the rescue time-saving count counter and setting the high base flag in steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A and S5602B to S5608B). With such a configuration, the degree of rescue for the player can be increased.

(Means 116-5) In any of means 116-1-1 to 116-4, a game area in which the game medium can be shot into a first path (e.g., a path by hitting with the left) and a second path (e.g., a path by hitting with the right), and a launch promotion notification means capable of executing a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be shot toward either the first path or the second path (e.g., a portion in the image display device 5 that displays the right hit instruction display 100IW108 or the left hit instruction display), are provided, and the launch promotion notification means is capable of executing a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be shot toward the second path when a notification performance is executed (e.g., the right hit instruction display 100IW108 is displayed when a time-saving entry performance is executed. See Figs. 11-23 (B) and (C)). With such a configuration, the launch promotion notification can be executed appropriately.

(Means 116-6) Any of means 116-1-1 to 116-5 is provided with a signal output means (e.g., see FIG. 11-19) capable of outputting a signal (e.g., a jackpot 4 signal) capable of identifying that a special state will be controlled based on the establishment of a special condition in response to the start of a variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, and outputting a signal (e.g., a variable stop signal) capable of identifying that a variable display has been executed in response to the end of the variable display. With such a configuration, a signal capable of identifying that a special state will be controlled based on the establishment of a special condition can be output to the outside at an appropriate timing.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 117-1) to (Means 117-5).

(Means 117-1) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol), and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol), and includes update means (e.g., a game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 061IWS5603A, S5 603B) and a special state in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, a low probability/low base state) (for example, in a high base state, control is performed to increase the probability of winning a normal symbol, control to shorten the variation time of a normal symbol, and control to lengthen the opening time of a variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning port)). , S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284), a variable display execution means capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel (for example, a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S25A and S25B), and a first shortened state in which the variable display of the first identification information is variable displayed for a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the second identification information at a higher rate (for example, a part where the variable display of the first special symbol is variable displayed for a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the second special symbol). The low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, and high probability/high base state (second probability state) in the first embodiment are executed in a variable time. See Figs. 11-2 to 11-4 and 11-19. The second shortened state has a high probability of the variable display of the second identification information being a variable display with a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the first identification information. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a variable time shorter than the variable display of the first special symbol. The game control system includes a shortened state control means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284, S2514, and S2206) that can control the game state (first probability variable state; see Figs. 11-2 to 11-4 and 11-19) and an update means that updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, , the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), the special state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607). A portion where the variable display execution means executes steps S5606B to S5607B), the variable display execution means, during execution of the variable display of one of the first and second identification information, does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of the one of the first and second identification information based on the establishment of a special condition by the execution of the variable display of the other identification information (for example, see FIG. 11-21 (A)), and, during execution of the variable display of the second identification information, based on the deriving and displaying a specific display result in the variable display of the first identification information, is capable of deriving and displaying a predetermined display result (for example, a losing pattern) different from the specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1125B and S1129B), and the shortened state control means, when controlled to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition, is capable of control to the first shortened state (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B). When the rescue time reduction is established, the game transitions to a low probability/high base state in which the first special symbol changes over a shorter time than the second special symbol. See FIG. 11-20.) With this configuration, the game is controlled to the first shortened state after the special condition is established, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and increasing interest.

(Means 117-2) In means 117-1, the variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result (e.g., a pattern that does not match the time-saving pattern) that is different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed (e.g., the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS2032A and S2032B), and when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which a special condition is established, the special condition is established. The special state can be controlled based on the fact that the special condition has been established (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A to S2031A, and S2030B to S2031B. See FIG. 11-21 (A)), and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled based on the fact that the special display result has been derived and displayed is lower than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled based on the fact that the special condition has been established (for example, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving is 800 times, while the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state via time-saving loss is 100 times. See FIG. 11-1). With such a configuration, even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is established, the special state is controlled based on the fact that the special condition has been established, so that the degree of rescue for the player can be increased.

(Means 117-3) In means 117-1 or 117-2, the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition during the execution of a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which is a special display result, if a special condition is established by the execution of a variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B), and even if a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information, does not control to a special state with a degree of advantage based on the special display result being derived and displayed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A, S2030B to S2031B). With such a configuration, in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a special state based on the establishment of a special condition, thereby increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 117-4) In any of means 117-1 to 117-3, the variable display execution means can derive and display a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and can derive and display the predetermined display result in the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, and S1129B). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the specific display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the unintended identification information, and to minimize the effect of the player's intentional strategy.

(Means 117-5) In any of Means 117-1 to 117-4, the update means can update the numerical information at the timing when the variable display of the first identification information starts and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information starts (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B). With such a configuration, in a configuration where the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, it is possible to optimize the update of the numerical information.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 118-1) to (Means 118-5).

(Means 118-1) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol) and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol), and includes update means (e.g., a part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment) that can update numerical information (e.g., rescue time reduction counter), and special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment) that can be controlled to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a low probability/low base state) (e.g., a state in which control is performed to increase the probability of a normal hit in a high base state, control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and control to lengthen the opening time of a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port)). a first shortened state in which the variable display of the first identification information is likely to be a variable display with a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the second identification information (for example, a low probability/low base state (normal state) in the second embodiment in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a shorter variable time than the variable display of the second special symbol. See FIG. 12-1); and a second shortened state in which the variable display of the second identification information is likely to be a variable display with a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the first identification information (for example, a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and high probability/low base state (second KT state) in the second embodiment in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a shorter variable time than the variable display of the first special symbol. See FIG. 12-1). and a shortened state control means (e.g., corresponding to the part that executes steps S061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284, S2514, and S2206 in the first embodiment), in which the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (e.g., the part that executes steps S061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment), and the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (e.g., the value of the rescue time shortening counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed (e.g., steps S061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B in the first embodiment). the variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being executed, based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, a specific display result and a predetermined display result different from the special display result can be derived and displayed in the variable display of the one of the identification information (e.g., the part that executes steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, S1129B in the first embodiment), and the shortened state control means is capable of control to the second shortened state when controlled to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition (e.g., controlled to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) in the second embodiment). With this configuration, while the variable display of one identification information is being executed, a specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information based on the derived special display result, and the variable display of the one identification information is controlled to the second shortened state after the special condition is met, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and increasing interest.

(Means 118-2) In means 118-1, the variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result (e.g., a pattern that does not match the time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed (e.g., corresponding to the part that executes steps 061IWS2032A and S2032B in the first embodiment), and when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where a special condition is met, the special state control means A special state can be controlled based on the fulfillment of a condition (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A-S2031A, and S2030B-S2031B in the first embodiment), and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled based on the special display result being derived and displayed is lower than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled based on the fulfillment of a special condition (e.g., in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the number of time-saving times is 800, whereas in the time-saving state via time-saving loss, the number of time-saving times is 100. See FIG. 12-1). With such a configuration, even if a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is fulfilled, the special state is controlled based on the fulfillment of a special condition, so that the degree of salvation of the player can be increased.

(Means 118-3) In means 118-1 or 118-2, the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state based on the special condition being satisfied during the execution of a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which is a special display result, if a special condition is satisfied by the execution of a variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed (e.g., corresponding to the part that executes steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment), and even if a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information, does not control to a special state of advantage based on the special display result being derived and displayed (e.g., corresponding to the part that executes steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A, S2030B to S2031B in the first embodiment). With such a configuration, in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a special state based on the establishment of a special condition, thereby increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 118-4) In any of means 118-1 to 118-3, the variable display execution means can derive and display a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and can derive and display the predetermined display result in the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information (e.g., corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, and S1129B in the first embodiment). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the specific display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the unintended identification information, and to minimize the effect of the player's intentional strategy.

(Means 118-5) In any of Means 118-1 to 118-4, the update means can update the numerical information at the timing when the variable display of the first identification information starts and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information starts (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment). With such a configuration, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, it is possible to optimize the updating of the numerical information.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 119-1) to (Means 119-6).

(Means 119-1) A gaming machine that can execute a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes an update means (e.g., a part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment) that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time reduction counter), and a special state control means (e.g., a step in the first embodiment that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B) that can control to a special state (e.g., a high base state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a low probability/low base state). a specific state control means capable of controlling the specific state (for example, a high probability state) which is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the normal state (for example, a portion that executes step 061IWS2206 in the first embodiment); an end determination means for determining by lottery that the specific state is to be ended in the specific state (for example, a portion that executes step 061IWS5703A in the second modified example); and a normal state control means capable of controlling the specific state to the normal state based on the determination by the end determination means (for example, a portion that executes steps 061IWS5704A and S5712A in the second modified example). and notification performance execution means (for example, a portion that executes the processes of steps S061IWS5710A, S5713A, and S633A in the second modified example, and the process of determining a variation pattern depending on the state of the provocation reach flags A to C in the first embodiment) capable of executing notification performance capable of notifying whether a specific state will end or a specific display result will be derived and displayed in relation to the control of the specific state, the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a portion that executes steps S061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment), and the special state control means updates the numerical information updated by the update means. When a special condition is established by the numerical information becoming a specific value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, the special state can be controlled (e.g., the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and when a special condition is established in the special state, the special state can be controlled after the end determination means determines that the special state will end after the special condition is established (e.g., the part in which in variant example 2 executes steps 061IWS56061A, S5701A, S5704A, S5701A to S5709A. See Figure 12-9), and the notification effect execution means can notify, when a special condition is established in the specific state, by a notification effect (e.g., the provocative reach B shown in Figures 12-7 (3-2) and (4)). With this configuration, even if the specific state ends, the notification effect will notify the player that the special state will be entered based on the establishment of a special condition, which gives the player a sense of security and increases their interest.

(Means 119-2) Means 119-1 includes special information storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of storing special information (e.g., a rescue time-shortening flag) indicating the establishment of a special condition when the special condition is established in a specific state, and the special information is erased based on control being exercised to an advantageous state (e.g., the part that executes step 061IWS631A in variant 2). With such a configuration, information indicating that a special condition has been established in a specific state can be appropriately managed.

(Means 119-3) Means 119-1 or 119-2 includes special information storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of storing special information (e.g., a rescue time reduction flag) indicating the establishment of a special condition when the special condition is established in a specific state, and the special information is erased based on control being exercised in the special state after the specific state ends (e.g., the part that executes step 061IWS5707A in variant 2). With such a configuration, information indicating that a special condition has been established in a specific state can be appropriately managed.

(Means 119-4) Means 119-1 to 119-3 include special information storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of storing special information (e.g., a rescue time-shortening flag) indicating the establishment of a special condition in a specific state when the special condition is established in the specific state, and the specific state control means can end control of the specific state by executing an initialization process (e.g., the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8), and the special information is erased by executing the initialization process. With such a configuration, information indicating that a special condition has been established in a specific state can be appropriately managed.

(Means 119-5) Means 119-1 to 119-4 are provided with a special condition fulfillment notification effect execution means capable of executing a special condition fulfillment notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-8(2), a "Chi" icon 014IW003d is displayed on a part of the image display device 5, indicating that the game will be controlled to a chance mode (rescue time reduction)). With such a configuration, the player can recognize that the game will be controlled to a special state after the end of the specific state, which gives the player a sense of security and increases the game's interest.

(Means 119-6) In means 119-1 to 119-5, the special state control means can control the special state until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) when the specific state ends before the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times in the specific state (for example, the part that executes steps 061IWS5705A, S5711A, S5717A to S5720A in modified example 2), and the notification effect execution means can execute a notification effect that notifies the player that the specific state will end or that a specific display result will be displayed when the variable display is executed more than the predetermined number of times (for example, the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5710A, S5713A, S633A in modified example 2 and the processing that determines the variable pattern depending on the state of the provocative reach flags A to C after the 100th change after being controlled to the probability variable state. See FIG. 12-6). With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension and increase the interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1A) to (Means 8A) below may be applied.

(Means 1A) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display, and the state control means can control to the special state when a special condition is met by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means The stage further includes a predetermined suggestion effect execution means that updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and is capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (e.g., a notice effect) when the variable display is executed, and a special notification effect execution means that is capable of executing a special notification effect (e.g., a time-saving entry effect) that notifies the player that control of a special state will begin based on the establishment of a special condition, and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect during the period before the special condition is established (for example, the execution ratio of the notice effect does not change between a period when the number of times remaining until the time-saving rescue is 10 or less and a period when the number of times remaining is 11 or more). With such a configuration, the sudden execution of the special notification effect can provide a sense of surprise to the player, thereby increasing the interest.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display that meets a special condition is started, and the special notification effect is a form in which the effect display displayed on the display means before the special notification effect is started is made difficult to see (for example, blacked out when the variation starts). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest.

(Means 3A) Means 1A is provided with a variable display execution means for effect that can execute a variable display of the effect identification information (e.g., decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the special notification effect execution means can execute a special notification effect when the variable display that meets the special condition ends, and the special notification effect is in a form that makes the effect identification information difficult to see (e.g., blacking out when the variation ends). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 4A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is a form in which the background display in the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to a special state (for example, when the next variable display is executed, a background image corresponding to a time-saving state due to rescue time-saving is displayed). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest. It can also prevent the effects from becoming cumbersome.

(Means 5A) Any of means 1A to 4A is provided with an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing explanatory effects regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, displaying a caption including an explanation regarding the rescue time reduction (for example, an explanation of the rescue time reduction function and the effects during the rescue time reduction)). Such a configuration can enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) Any of means 1A to 5A includes a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns, and when a special condition is established, the variable display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is established, and the special notification effect execution means can execute a special notification effect after a non-specific display result (for example, a losing pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display where the special condition is established (for example, in the variable display where the rescue time reduction is established, a variable pattern dedicated to the rescue time reduction is not used. Then, after the losing pattern is derived and displayed, the establishment of the rescue time reduction is notified). With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special state is being controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the game state, thereby increasing the interest when the special condition is established.

(Means 7A) In any of means 1A to means 6A, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of a start condition and the satisfaction of a start condition, a hold memory means (e.g., a first hold memory number buffer and a second hold memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a backup memory means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of retaining the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold memory means even when the power supply is stopped, an initialization means (e.g., a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) capable of executing an initialization process to initialize the memory contents of the backup memory means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a recovery means (e.g., a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6) capable of executing a recovery process to restore the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold memory means based on the memory contents of the backup memory means when the power supply is started. With this configuration, control can be optimized through initialization processing, and disadvantages to players can be reduced when a power outage occurs in a situation where reserved memory corresponding to a special number of variable displays is stored before the power supply is stopped.

(Means 8A) Any of means 1A to 6A includes a state storage means capable of storing special state information (e.g., the state of the high base flag) that can identify that the device is being controlled to a special state, an execution count storage means capable of storing execution count information (e.g., the value of a time-saving count counter) that can identify the number of times a variable display has been executed in a special state, a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) that can retain the special state information, execution count information, and numerical information even when power supply is stopped, and an initialization means (e.g., a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) that can execute an initialization process to initialize the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, and when the special state information, execution count information, and numerical information are held by the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, the initialization means initializes the special state information and the execution count information in the initialization process but does not initialize the numerical information (e.g., initializes the state of the high base flag and the value of the time-saving count counter, but does not initialize the value of the rescue time-saving count counter (i.e., sets the value before power outage)). Such a configuration can prevent the numerical information from being intentionally initialized, increasing the degree of relief available to the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1B) to (Means 5B) below may be applied.

(Means 1B) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern, and the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means is configured to control the state to a special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed. The numerical information is updated in the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed and in the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where it is not a specific display result (for example, it is capable of determining a reach (or a reach with particularly high expectations) variation pattern in both cases of a jackpot and a miss), and when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the probability of determining a specific variable display pattern is higher than that of a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, the reach (or a reach with particularly high expectations) variation pattern is more likely to be determined in the case of a jackpot), and when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result, the probability of determining a specific variable display pattern is lower in a predetermined period before a special condition is established than in a period before the predetermined period (for example, immediately before the rescue time reduction occurs, the probability of determining a reach (or a reach with particularly high expectations) variation pattern in the event of a miss is lower). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a specific display result is not derived and displayed even though a variable display using a specific variable display pattern is executed during a predetermined period before the special condition is met.

(Means 2B) Means 1B is provided with a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing suggestive effects related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect or effect that suggests the establishment of a rescue time-saving function, or a caption display while waiting for customers), and the suggestive effect execution means is more likely to execute suggestive effects in a specified period before the special condition is established than in the period before the specified period. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player look forward to the establishment of a special condition, thereby increasing interest. It is also possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage caused by ending play just before the special condition is established.

(Means 3B) Means 1B or 2B includes an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing explanatory effects regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, displaying a caption including an explanation regarding the rescue time reduction (for example, an explanation of the rescue time reduction function and the effects during the rescue time reduction)). Such a configuration can enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) Any of means 1B to 3B includes a preview performance execution means capable of executing a preview performance (e.g., a timer performance) that notifies the player that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the specific display result is not the case, and the preview performance is executed more frequently when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result than when the specific display result is not the case, and the preview performance is executed less frequently in a specified period before the special condition is met (e.g., a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the specified period when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview performance is executed in a specified period before the special condition is met but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

(Means 5B) In any of means 1B to 4B, a notice performance execution means is provided that can execute a notice performance (e.g., a timer performance) that notifies the player that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the notice performance execution means can execute a notice performance in a specific mode (e.g., performance mode "red") and a predetermined mode (e.g., performance mode "blue") in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the notice performance is executed in a specific mode more frequently than in a predetermined mode when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, and the notice performance is executed in a specific mode less frequently in a predetermined period before the special condition is established (e.g., a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in a period before the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a notice performance is executed in a specific mode but a specific display result is not derived and displayed in a predetermined period before the special condition is established.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1C) to (Means 8C) below may be applied.

(Means 1C) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a state control means that can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (e.g., a first variable pattern #M (missing entry into rescue time-saving mode)). , and the state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the variable display pattern determination means can determine to a special variable display pattern when the special condition is established, and further includes a specific notification effect execution means that does not determine to a special variable display pattern before the special condition is established and can execute a specific notification effect (e.g., time-saving entry effect) that notifies the player that the special state will be controlled when the special condition is established and variable display by the special variable display pattern is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special state will be controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to increase the interest when the special condition is established.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the specific notification effect execution means is capable of executing a specific notification effect when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and is equipped with a special notification effect execution means capable of executing an effect in a common form with the specific notification effect and then executing a special notification effect (e.g., an effect that looks like a time-saving mode has started) that notifies the player that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. With such a configuration, the player is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state after once recognizing that a special condition has been met, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases interest.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, a predetermined notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a predetermined notification effect (e.g., a full rotation effect) that notifies the player that a specific display result is derived and displayed in a manner that is not executed before the special condition is met. Such a configuration can provide the player with a sense of surprise and specialness, and can increase interest.

(Means 4C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a notification effect to notify that the specific display result is derived and displayed in the same manner as before the special condition is satisfied (for example, even when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, this is realized by determining the jackpot variation pattern in the same manner as when the value is not 0). With such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be made common when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to 4C, the display period (e.g., 20 seconds) of the display result of the variable display when a special condition is met is longer than the display period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) of the display result of the variable display before the special condition is met, and a notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a notification effect (e.g., a mode transition effect that notifies that control of the time-saving state by rescue time-saving will begin) that notifies players that control of the time-saving state will begin during the display period of the display result of the variable display when a special condition is met. With such a configuration, a period for executing a notification effect in the normal state can be secured, the effect can be clarified when switching game states, and interest can be increased.

(Means 6C) Any of means 1C to 5C includes a signal output means for outputting a specific signal (e.g., a variable stop signal) corresponding to the start of a display period of the display result of the variable display when a special condition is met, at the start of the display period, and outputting a special signal (e.g., a jackpot 4 signal) corresponding to the control of a special state after outputting the specific signal. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid signals being missed externally when a specific signal and a special signal are output simultaneously.

(Means 7C) In means 6C, the signal output means outputs a special signal at the start of a special process (e.g., a next change postponement process for extending the period until the start of the next change) that is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied has elapsed. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of signal omissions externally when a specific signal and a special signal are output simultaneously.

(Means 8C) In any of means 1C to 6C, a first passing area (e.g., a first start winning port) provided at a position where a gaming medium passing through a specific path (e.g., a path by hitting from the left) can pass through, a second passing area (e.g., a second start winning port) provided at a position where a gaming medium passing through a special path (e.g., a path by hitting from the right) can pass through, and a variable display execution means capable of executing, as variable display of identification information, a variable display of a first identification information based on the first start condition being satisfied and a variable display of a second identification information based on the second start condition being satisfied, and a means capable of specifying that the gaming medium should be launched toward the special path. and a special output means capable of executing a special output (for example, outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that the game is in a gaming state in which the player is expected to perform a right hit, or an announcement that the game is in a state in which the player will perform a right hit), where the first start condition is established based on the game medium passing through the first passing area, the second start condition is established based on the game medium passing through the second passing area, and the special output means is capable of executing a special output at the start of a special process (for example, a next change postponement process for extending the period until the start of the next change) that is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is established has elapsed. With such a configuration, a special output that can specify that the game medium should be launched toward a special path at an appropriate timing can be executed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1D) to (Means 5D) below may be applied.

(Means 1D) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information and a variable display of a second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, and that is equipped with a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns, and the state control means determines whether the numerical information updated by the update means is in accordance with the number of times the variable display has been executed. The special state can be controlled when a special condition is established by the number of times being a specific value corresponding to the number of times of special play as the number of times of ...

(Means 2D) In means 1D, a variable display execution means (e.g., a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112A) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer and a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a pre-reading preview effect (e.g., an effect in which a special decorative pattern (chance eye) is displayed in a stopped state, or an effect in which the color or shape of the reserved display is changed) that predicts the variable display corresponding to the reserved information stored in the reserved memory means. and a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice performance that predicts a variable display when a special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is satisfied, a zone display that displays a special background, etc., and the look-ahead notice execution means is capable of executing a look-ahead notice performance that predicts a variable display when a special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is satisfied, while restricting the execution of the look-ahead notice performance that predicts a variable display after the variable display when the special condition is satisfied (for example, restricting (prohibiting) the execution of a look-ahead notice performance that predicts a reserved memory that is stored before the change in the rescue time-saving is reached and corresponds to a change that occurs after the time-saving state is controlled via the rescue time-saving). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the control process becoming complicated and to avoid the occurrence of inconsistencies in the performance content.

(Means 3D) In means 1D or 2D, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is a mode in which the background display in the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to a special state (for example, when the next variable display is executed, a background image corresponding to a time-saving state due to rescue time-saving is displayed). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest, and prevent the effects from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) Any of means 1D to 3D is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing suggestion effects related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect or effect that suggests that a rescue time-saving feature will be established, or a caption displayed while waiting for customers, etc.), and the suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect during a predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, a period when there are 10 or fewer plays remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is established). With such a configuration, the special notification effect is suddenly executed, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his interest.

(Means 5D) Any of means 1D to 4D includes an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing explanatory effects regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, displaying a caption including an explanation of the rescue time-saving function or the effects during rescue time-saving). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1E) to (Means 4E) below may be applied.

(Means 1E-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, and that is equipped with a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shortened compared to the predetermined variable display pattern, and the state control means determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shortened compared to the predetermined variable display pattern, The special state can be controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the derivation and display of the fixed display result, and the special state can be controlled when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determination means has a higher probability of determining the shortened variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display becomes a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving is more likely to be determined to be a variable pattern with a shortened variable time than the time-saving state via the jackpot). With such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the variable display is executed by the shortened variable display pattern at a higher rate, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled is shortened, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 1E-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, and that is equipped with a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (e.g., a first variable pattern #C) corresponding to the execution of a reach performance, and the state control means determines a variable display pattern even when a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. The special state can be controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display, and the special state can be controlled when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determination means has a lower rate of determining the specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display becomes a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving has a lower rate of determining the variable pattern that becomes a reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) when the display result is a miss than in the time-saving state via the jackpot). With such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the rate at which the display result of the variable display by the specific variable display pattern becomes a non-specific display result is lower, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) Means 1E is provided with background display means capable of displaying different background displays on the display means for the special state controlled after control to an advantageous state and the special state controlled when a special condition is met (for example, different background images for the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving). With such a configuration, the difference in game state can be clearly notified to the player, enhancing interest.

(Means 3E) In means 1E or means 2E, a variable display execution means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112A) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold memory number buffer or a second hold memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice performance (for example, a chance eye performance or a hold change performance) with the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means as the preview target, and the look-ahead notice execution means has a different ratio of executing the look-ahead notice performance and a different ratio of which of the multiple types of look-ahead notice performance is executed between a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied (for example, a different ratio of executing the look-ahead notice performance and a different ratio of which of the multiple types of look-ahead notice performance is executed between a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state and a time-saving state via a jackpot). With this configuration, the frequency and type of pre-reading preview effects can be made different between the special state that is controlled after control to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when a special condition is met, which can increase interest.

(Means 4E) In any of means 1E to 3E, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (e.g., a first hold storage number buffer and a second hold storage number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a pre-reading preview effect (e.g., a performance in which a special decorative pattern (chance eye) is displayed in a stopped state, a hold change effect in which the color or shape of the hold display is changed, a special background display, etc.) and a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice performance in which the variable display when the special condition is established is the subject of a notice among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is established, while restricting the execution of the look-ahead notice performance in which the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is established is the subject of a notice (for example, restricting (prohibiting) the execution of a look-ahead notice performance in which the reserved memory corresponding to a change that is stored before the change in the rescue time-saving is reached and that is performed after the time-saving state is controlled via the rescue time-saving is the subject of a notice). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process and to avoid the occurrence of inconsistencies in the performance content.

The configuration shown in the above characteristic part 120IW can be configured by appropriately combining the configurations shown in the above characteristic part 090IW, characteristic part 113IW, and characteristic part 116IW. For example, when applying the configuration shown in the above characteristic part 090IW to the configuration shown in the above characteristic part 120IW, the value of the small win counter can be decremented by 1 to end the time-saving state when a small win with a V win occurs during the time-saving state, while the value of the small win counter can be configured not to be decremented when a small win without a V win occurs during the time-saving state.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention may also be a gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of first identification information and a variable display of second identification information,
A state control means capable of controlling to a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state (e.g., a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-19),
An update means capable of updating the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100);
The state control means can control the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, thereby establishing a special condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 8-17, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173).
The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100);
The special condition is established based on a predetermined display result (e.g., a losing pattern) different from the specific display result being derived and displayed a special number of times in succession as the display result of the variable display (e.g., the part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; the part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100).
moreover,
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
An example of such a gaming machine is one in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a specified period than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the specified period.
According to such a configuration, the player can be rescued in an appropriate manner. Specifically, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, so the player can be rescued more easily and the player's motivation for playing can be increased. Furthermore, the player can be drawn to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are being executed.

In other words, because the numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, it is easier for the numerical information to reach the special number of times and for the player to be rescued than, for example, when the numerical information is updated only when either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and this increases the player's motivation to play. In addition, when the simulated movable body display presentation is executed, the player will pay attention to the presentation in the hope that the movable body presentation will be executed, which increases the player's interest in the presentation. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to reduce the player's interest in playing when installed in an amusement facility and can increase the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can enhance the interest, there is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
An example of such a gaming machine is one in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher when the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance in a predetermined period than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. An example of this gaming machine will be described below as another example.

(Other examples)

(Feature 241SG form)
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position on the image display device 5);
A movable body that can be moved from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can be moved from an origin position to a performance position);
Equipped with
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first display position to the second display position and the direction in which the movable body moves from the first position to the second position are a common direction (for example, the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position are a common downward direction).
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. See FIG. 23-37).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can produce an impressive effect that is faster than the movement of the movable body, giving the player a sense of surprise.

The gaming machine of form 2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A display means capable of displaying a pseudo-movable body display (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5) is provided,
The pseudo movable body display is a display simulating a movable body (e.g., a first non-mounted movable body M100) that undergoes a recoil action of a predetermined amount of movement when moved from a first position (e.g., a first origin position) to a second position (e.g., a first performance position) different from the first position,
The display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position corresponding to the first position to a second display position corresponding to the second position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 is capable of vertically moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5 between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position),
The pseudo-movable body display performs a recoil movement display of a specific amount of movement when it is moved from the first display position to the second display position (for example, a portion that performs a recoil movement display (bouncing display) of a specific amount of movement when the performance control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and stops and displays it at the first performance display position).
The specific movement amount is greater than the predetermined movement amount (for example, the movement amount L12 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. See Figure 23-38).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of a movable body without having to mount a movable body, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form 3 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position on the image display device 5);
A movable body that can be moved from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can be moved from an origin position to a performance position);
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A pseudo-movable body display performance in which the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position);
A movable body performance that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can move the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position);
It is possible to execute
When the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a predetermined period, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the predetermined period (for example, during a variable display period of a pattern based on a fluctuation pattern of a super reach β or a super reach γ, when a development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and a development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without executing the development performance A. See FIG. 23-11).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

The gaming machine of form 4 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 on the image display device 5 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position);
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A special suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect A that predicts the possibility (expectation) that the variable display result will be a jackpot) that suggests that the pseudo-movable body display will be controlled to the advantageous state by being displayed;
A notification effect that notifies the player of advantageous content (for example, a development effect B that notifies the player of the development of a strong super reach effect);
A predetermined presentation (for example, a development suggestion presentation suggesting the possibility that a development presentation B will be executed) that is executed before the notification presentation and suggests that the notification presentation will be executed by displaying a notification-related image (for example, a character image Z310) related to the notification presentation;
It is possible to execute
In the predetermined performance, the pseudo movable body display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (for example, patterns PS-1 to PS1-4) having different expectations for the execution of the notification performance,
The display means includes:
In the special suggestion performance, the pseudo-movable object display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, then moved from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden (see Figures 23-25 (C) to (F)),
In the predetermined performance, after the pseudo movable body display is displayed at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display is made non-displayed without being moved from the second display position to the first display position (see Figs. 23-26(A) to (J), Fig. 23-27(A)),
Before executing the notification performance, when the pseudo-movable body display displayed at the second display position is hidden, the notification-related image (for example, character image Z310) can be displayed in a display area including the second display position (see Figures 23-26 (F) to (J), Figure 23-27 (A)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the special suggestion performance, the pseudo-movable body display is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can focus on whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state without feeling any discomfort, whereas in the specified performance, the display of the notification-related image is prioritized over the pseudo-movable body display moving in the same way as a movable body, and the image is hidden without returning from the second display position to the first display position, so that the player can focus on the suggestion that the notification performance will be executed.

The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to the first performance display position, or a portion in which the image display device 5 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position);
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A special effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a deciding effect that notifies the player whether the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state);
A specific effect (for example, a development effect B that develops into a strong super reach effect and notifies the player that a deciding effect will be executed) that suggests that the special effect will be executed before the special effect is executed;
It is possible to execute
The display means includes:
The pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in the specific performance and the special performance,
When the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed in the specific performance, the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then is hidden without being moved and displayed from the second display position to the first display position, and a suggestive image suggesting the execution of the special performance (for example, the state at the start of the display of the reach title image Z51) can be displayed in a display area including the second display position (see Figures 23-27 (B) (D) to (F)),
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed in the special performance, the pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then moved and displayed from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden (see Figures 23-30 (A) to (F)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, before a special effect is executed, the pseudo-movable body display is hidden without returning from the second display position to the first display position, prioritizing the display of the suggestive image over moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can be drawn to the suggestion that a special effect will be executed, while during the special effect, the pseudo-movable body display is moved in the same way as a movable body, so that the player can be drawn to the notification of content that is advantageous to the player without feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form 6 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to the first performance display position),
The display means is
The pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to an intermediate display position (e.g., a first intermediate display position) and then to the second display position;
The pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (see FIGS. 23-40(A) to 23-40(C));
In a display area including the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position, a specific image that emphasizes the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display (for example, an effect image Z71 in which glass is cracked and an image Z71A showing a plurality of glass fragments is scattered) can be displayed (see FIG. 23-31 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable object display can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility, and the moving display can be emphasized with a specific image to make a good impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form 7 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
The display means is capable of displaying pseudo-movable body displays including a first pseudo-movable body display and a second pseudo-movable body display different from the first pseudo-movable body display (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position, and a portion in which the image display device 5 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position),
The first pseudo movable body display can be moved from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (see FIG. 23-16(B) );
The second pseudo movable body display can be moved from a first predetermined display position to a second predetermined display position different from the first predetermined display position (see FIG. 23-16(C) );
The display means is
The first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to an intermediate display position (e.g., a first intermediate display position) and then to the second display position (see FIGS. 23-40(A) to (C));
The first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (see FIGS. 23-40(A) to (C));
The movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position and the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position have different speeds (for example, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position. See Figure 23-40).
The proportion of the first pseudo movable body display being controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position and when the second pseudo movable body display is moved from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position (for example, in the preview performance B, when a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or a pattern PBY-4 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or a pattern PBY-2 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position is executed, the proportion of the second pseudo movable body display being controlled to the jackpot game state (the jackpot expectation degree) is different. See FIG. 23-10 and FIG. 23-20 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the first pseudo-movable body display or the second pseudo-movable body display is displayed moving, and it is also possible for the player to recognize that the first pseudo-movable body display and the second pseudo-movable body display have different rates of being controlled to an advantageous state by the difference in the speed of their moving display.

The gaming machine of aspect 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 7,
A movable body (e.g., a first non-mounted movable body M100) that can move from a first position (e.g., a first origin position) to a second position (e.g., a first performance position) different from the first position,
When the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, a certain amount of recoil motion is performed (see FIG. 23-36 ).
When the pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, a reaction movement display of a specific amount of movement is performed (see FIG. 23-36 ).
The specific movement amount is greater than the constant movement amount (for example, the movement amount L12 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. See Figure 23-38).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of a movable body without actually mounting a movable body, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave a lasting impression on the player.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects,
A movable body (e.g., a mounted movable body 32) that can move from a first position (e.g., an origin position) to a second position (e.g., a performance position) different from the first position,
A distance from the first display position to the second display position (e.g., a moving display distance L2) is longer than a distance from the first position to the second position (e.g., a moving distance L1) (see FIG. 23-16 );
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display moves faster and travels a longer distance than the movable body, providing a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth aspects,
The pseudo-movable body display includes a performance display unit (e.g., performance display unit Z100A, Z200A) and a mechanism display unit (e.g., mechanism display unit Z100B, Z200B),
In the movement display of the pseudo movable body display, the mechanism display unit reaches the second display position earlier than the performance display unit (see Figures 23-36 (B1) and (B2)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

A gaming machine according to an eleventh aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to tenth aspects,
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement display from the second display position to the first display position (for example, the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. See FIG. 23-37).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eleventh aspects,
A period during which the movable body moves between the first position and the second position includes a first period during which the speed increases and a second period during which the speed decreases (see FIG. 23-39(A) );
The movement display period of the pseudo movable object display does not include the first period and the second period (see FIG. 23-39(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the movement of the pseudo movable body display can be displayed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

A gaming machine according to a thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to twelfth aspects,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light-emitting display unit (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means is capable of illuminating the light-emitting display unit when the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed to the second display position (the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle after the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed to the first performance position. See FIG. 23-31 (D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pseudo movable object display that has been moved to the second display position.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to thirteenth aspects,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light-emitting display unit (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means does not cause the light-emitting display unit to emit light when the pseudo movable body display is being moved (see FIG. 23-31 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the (incomplete) pseudo movable object display during the movement display less noticeable, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the presentation effect.

A gaming machine according to a fifteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the thirteenth or fourteenth aspect,
The movable body includes a light-emitting unit capable of emitting light (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
When the display means moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display to the second display position, the display means performs the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit in a manner common to the illumination of the light-emitting unit (the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle after moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position. See FIG. 23-31 (D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

A gaming machine according to a sixteenth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventeenth aspects,
The display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first special display position to a second special display position different from the first special display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a second specific initial display position to a second intermediate performance display position or a second specific performance display position),
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first display position to the second display position is different from the direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first special display position to the second special display position (for example, the downward direction in which the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position in the preview performance A is different from the rightward direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position in the preview performance B. See Figure 23-33).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a single pseudo-movable object display can be displayed moving from a number of display positions, providing the player with a surprising effect that would be difficult to achieve with a movable object.

A gaming machine according to a seventeenth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixteenth aspects,
The display means is capable of, after moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display in a direction different from the direction in which the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position (see FIG. 23-43 );
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide the player with a surprising effect that would be difficult to achieve with a movable object.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
13 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls as gaming media are shot into this gaming area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 15). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 13, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 15), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 13). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 13), a mounted movable body 32 (described later) that operates according to the performance is provided. The mounted movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the above-mentioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 15).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 15).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 14 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (if a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss". Note that "misses" in this pachinko game machine 1 include "misses with time reduction" that are controlled to a high base state (time reduction state) from the next variable display without going through a jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the mounted movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 15. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the mounted movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the mounted movable body 32 to the mounted movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the mounted movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the mounted movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the mounted movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 16 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a specific image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a specific sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 17 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 17. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 16.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot", and if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so that any of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player can be set. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 19 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 19 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 19 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 19(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, among the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that, when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 19(A).

As shown in FIG. 19(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 19(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 20, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a special probability state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal or time-saving, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal or time-saving. In other words, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the rate at which the variable display result is a time-saving miss is the same for all setting values, so that it is possible to prevent the setting value from making the gambling nature excessively high. Furthermore, for the time-saving misses to which a common judgment value is assigned for each setting value, the range is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to the judgment of the variable display result being a time-saving miss.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 21 is started, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the mounted movable body 32, such as control to drive the mounted movable body 32 to return it to the origin position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the mounted movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 21 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 22, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the mounted movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit and scope of this invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing this invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing this invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 241SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 23-1 to 23-40. In the following, the components similar to those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description, or components having similar functions but different shapes or positions, etc., will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions will be omitted, and the differences from the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 23-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG has a mounted movable body 32 that is slightly larger than the mounted movable body 32 shown in FIG. 1.

As shown in FIG. 23-2, a vibration motor 61 built into the stick controller 31A is connected to the performance control board 12, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of vibrating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. In addition, a button LED 62 built into the push button 31B is connected to the lamp control board 14, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of turning the button LED 62 on and off.

Figure 23-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 23-3 (A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 23-3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "big win", or "small win", and the result of the determination of which of several types of big wins the big win type will be if the variable display result is a "big win", as shown in FIG. 23-3 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 23-3(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command 9000 (H) is a presentation control command (initialization command: power-on command) that is sent when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. Command 9200 (H) is a presentation control command (power outage recovery command) that is sent when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed after a temporary halt. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 sends a power outage recovery command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and sends an initialization command if not.

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening big win state and the high-speed opening big win state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Command D100 is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating the execution of a customer waiting demo performance, and as described below, is a command sent by the demo display setting that is executed when neither the first reserved memory nor the second reserved memory exists in the normal processing of special symbols, and the customer waiting demo performance is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the customer waiting demo designation command is sent.

The commands shown in FIG. 23-3(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 23-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 23-4, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section set in the RAM 102, as described below.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 23-5 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In this embodiment, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of a "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this embodiment). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Also, FIG. 23-5(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result judgment table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result judgment table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for special symbol display result judgment before the determined special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In the special symbol display result judgment table 2 in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a number (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for special symbol display result judgment is assigned to the special symbol display result of "small win".

In the special chart display result judgment table 2, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this embodiment, the number of judgment values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a judgment value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no judgment value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which the time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 23-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this embodiment is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 23-6 (B). In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, resulting in a transition to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, resulting in a transition to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, resulting in a transition to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "probable jackpot A" may be called a 10-round (10R) probable jackpot, and "probable jackpot B" may be called a 5-round (5R) probable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game with "Probable jackpot C", the round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds), and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than in other jackpot games, making it a high-speed opening jackpot. Note that, during jackpot games of any type, no probable jackpot control or time-saving control is executed.

Although not specifically shown, the small win game state in this embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is the same as the opening period of the special big win C (0.1 seconds in this embodiment). After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

In other words, in this embodiment, when it is decided to have a "high probability jackpot C" or a "small jackpot", the variable display is executed in the same variable pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 23-7), and the chance eye is displayed as a variable display result. Furthermore, since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, it is not possible to distinguish from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 whether it is a "high probability jackpot C" in which high probability control is executed, or a "small jackpot" in which the previous game state continues without high probability control. Therefore, after the end of the high probability jackpot C jackpot game or small jackpot game, it is possible to have the player continue playing while expecting that high probability control is being executed.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special game games (100 times in this embodiment) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special game games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 23-6(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" and controlled to a normal opening jackpot state or a high-speed opening jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 23-6(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 23-6 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the invention is not limited to this. Similar to the super reach fluctuation pattern, multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ..., and in this case, the jackpot expectation (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach fluctuation pattern of normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be different. In addition, although super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, the invention is not limited to this. The super reach fluctuation pattern may be only one type, like the normal reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, the variation pattern in this embodiment also includes a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small win" or the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C".

As shown in FIG. 23-7, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set to be shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. In addition, among the super reach variation patterns, the variable display period of the super reach β and super reach γ variation patterns is set to be longer (60 seconds) than the variable display period of the super reach α variation pattern (50 seconds).

In addition, in this embodiment, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but this invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 23-8 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the game state, the display result of the variable display being executed, and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23-8(A), when the variable display result is a non-probability jackpot in the normal game state (low base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, when the variable display result is a probability jackpot A or probability jackpot B in the normal game state (low base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B.

As shown in FIG. 23-8(A), the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 differs between jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 497 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 200 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a sure-win A or a sure-win B, the fluctuation pattern is more likely to be a Super Reach fluctuation pattern than when the variable display result is a non-sure-win, and Super Reach β is more likely to be determined than Super Reach α, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, a special jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special jackpot variation pattern) using the special jackpot variation pattern determination table. In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, making it difficult for the player to determine from the variation pattern whether the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 600 judgment values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 700 judgment values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table C, 800 judgment values are assigned to PA1-3, 100 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In this way, in this embodiment, if the variable display result is a "miss," based on the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart being 3 or 4, etc., the variable display is executed more frequently using a shortened variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1), making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in Figure 23-8 (B), when the variable display result in the high base state is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, in the low base state, if the variable display result is a sure-win jackpot A or sure-win jackpot B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach β jackpot), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach γ jackpot) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B.

As shown in FIG. 23-8(B), the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, and PB1-4 differs between jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 97 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 350 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3, and 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 50 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 200 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3, and 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a sure-win A or a sure-win B, the fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined as a Super Reach β or Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern than when the variable display result is a non-sure-win, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, a special jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special jackpot variation pattern) using the special jackpot variation pattern determination table. In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, making it difficult for the player to determine from the variation pattern whether the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table D, 800 judgment values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 80 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, 10 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-4.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the high base state (time-saving state), the variable display is executed more frequently using the shortening variable pattern (PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach miss variable pattern (PA1-1) due to the time-saving state, so it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot while preventing the game from becoming protracted. Note that the variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4 (Super Reach γ) are variable patterns that can only be executed in the high base state (time-saving state).

In this embodiment, the RAM 102 is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area includes, for example, a first special chart reserve memory section, a second special chart reserve memory section, a regular chart reserve memory section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, a game control counter setting section, and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit stores reserved information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit associates the game balls with reserved numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 23-2 has a performance control data holding area that holds various data used to control performance operations. This performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The performance control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to performance operation states, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting a start winning reception command buffer in which entries capable of storing data such as a start winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number notification command are set in association with buffer number 1-0 corresponding to the variable display during execution due to the reserved memory of the first special chart, buffer number 1-1 to buffer number 1-4 corresponding to the reserved memory 1 to 4 of the first special chart, buffer number 2-0 corresponding to the variable display during execution due to the reserved memory of the second special chart, and buffer number 2-1 to buffer number 2-4 corresponding to the reserved memory 1 to 4 of the second special chart are stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section. When a start winning occurs in the first start winning port or the second start winning port, four commands, namely, a start winning designation command (first start winning port designation command or second start winning port designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are transmitted as one set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The four commands that make up this set - the start port winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the pending memory count notification command - are stored in the entry for the buffer number that corresponds to the start port winning designation command and the pending memory count notification command.

The contents of the storage area (entry) corresponding to buffer numbers 1-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the first special chart are shifted up one by one as described below when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1") is started, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" that stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process executed when the variable display is ended. Similarly, the contents of the storage area (entry) corresponding to buffer numbers 2-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the second special chart are shifted up one by one as described below when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "2-1") is started, and the contents of buffer number "2-0" that stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process executed when the variable display is ended.

When a first start winning port is entered, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stores the commands in the start winning port reception command buffer, starting from the top of the free entries (the entry with the lowest buffer number) among buffer numbers 1-1 to 1-4, and when a second start winning port is entered, starting from the top of the free entries (the entry with the lowest buffer number) among buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4. When a start winning port is entered, the start winning port entry designation command through the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start winning port entry designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the end of the buffer numbers "1" to "4" corresponding to the first or second special pattern reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, the commands stored in the start winning reception command buffer are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents of the entries corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory ends, the commands stored in buffer number "1-0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1-1" are shifted to buffer number "1-0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "1-2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1-1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-3" and "1-4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-2" and "1-3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

(Super Reach performance)
Here, the effects during the super reach will be described with reference to Fig. 23-9. Fig. 23-9 is a diagram showing the execution periods of various effects during normal reaches and super reaches.

As shown in FIG. 23-9, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display, and then performs a normal reach performance as a variable display performance based on the variable display mode being the normal reach display mode. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, after executing a normal reach performance, it performs a super reach performance (weak super reach performance or strong super reach performance) as a variable display performance based on the variable display mode being the super reach display mode, and ends the variable display of decorative symbols after the super reach performance ends.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute preview presentation A or preview presentation B, which notifies the possibility (expectation level) that the variable display result will be a jackpot, as a presentation different from the variable display presentation in a normal reach presentation in a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach α, β, γ). The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute development presentation A, which notifies the player that a normal reach presentation in a super reach fluctuation pattern will develop into a weak super reach presentation (content advantageous to the player).

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a development suggestion presentation that suggests the possibility of executing a development presentation B that notifies the player that a weak super reach presentation in a super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ) will develop into a strong super reach presentation (content that is advantageous to the player), and can execute a development presentation B that notifies the player that a weak super reach presentation in a super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ) will develop into a strong super reach presentation (content that is advantageous to the player).

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a deciding presentation that notifies the player that the variable display result will be a jackpot or a miss in the strong super reach presentation in the super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ).

In this way, in a normal reach miss variation pattern, the normal reach performance will not develop into a weak super reach performance, resulting in a jackpot or miss, in a super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the normal reach performance will develop into a weak super reach performance, and in a super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ), the weak super reach performance will develop into a strong super reach performance.

In other words, Super Reach α is a weak Super Reach with a higher expectation than a normal reach, and Super Reach β and γ are strong Super Reach with a higher expectation than a weak Super Reach (jackpot expectation: normal reach < Super Reach α < Super Reach β < Super Reach γ).

In addition, normal reaches and super reaches α, β, and γ may each have a different type of normal reach effect or super reach effect, or they may have a common or at least partially similar type of super reach effect. Also, the types of super reaches are not limited to the above three types, and may be one or two types, or four or more types.

In the feature section 241SG, in the above-mentioned preview performance A and preview performance B, development performance A and B, development suggestion performance, and deciding performance, it is possible to move the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, and to move and display the first pseudo movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display described below. Therefore, before explaining the specific content of each performance, the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display, and the second pseudo movable body display will be explained.

(Pachinko machine development process)
First, in order to understand the circumstances under which the above-mentioned mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display, and the second pseudo movable body display were mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the outline of the development flow of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained with reference to Fig. 23-12. Fig. 23-12 is an explanatory diagram showing the outline of the development flow of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 23-12, when development of a given pachinko gaming machine (such as Pachinko gaming machine 1) begins, a proposal is first prepared that clearly defines what is to be communicated to gaming establishments and players, and what the player is expected to feel (step 241SGS001). Specifically, the game content, highlights, specs, game flow, presentation configuration such as reaches, board configuration, movable bodies (structures), etc. of the machine are considered.

Next, based on the proposal, a prototype (first prototype, design mockup) of the board (game board), images and materials that allow for an image of variable displays, a spec confirmation sheet, etc. are created (step 241SGS002). At the stage when this prototype is created, for example, although it was planned to include multiple movable bodies, problems may arise that make it impossible to include multiple movable bodies (for example, lack of space due to interference with other movable bodies, cost, durability, etc.).

Next, images such as variable display and effects are created (step 241SGS003). Here, for the effect images, a pseudo-movable body display image is created that imitates the non-mounted movable body, based on the design and movement of the movable body that could not be mounted due to the problem that arose in step 241SGS002. Note that since the movement display in the pseudo-movable body display has less impact than when the non-mounted movable body is moved, for example, the reaction display movement when the moving display is stopped and the speed of the moving display are often deformed (exaggerated or highlighted).

Then, a prototype (secondary prototype) of the game board (game board) including images of variable displays and effects is created, and the variable displays, core effects, and the operation of the movable bodies are checked (step 241SGS004). If there are no problems, a mold product of the game board (game board) is created (step 241SGS005).

In this way, by installing multiple movable bodies that can provide an impactful presentation to the player, the presentation effect can be further enhanced and the presentation can be diversified, but due to various problems such as those mentioned above, it is often difficult to actually install multiple bodies. Therefore, it is becoming common to use the movement display of a pseudo-movable body display that imitates the non-installed movable body, based on the design and movement of the movable body that could not be installed.

In the following, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG, multiple movable bodies were planned to be mounted during the development stage, but due to the occurrence of various problems as described above, it was decided to mount one movable body (e.g., mounted movable body 32), and the mounting of the other movable bodies (e.g., first non-mounted movable body M100, second non-mounted movable body M200) was not decided and they were left unmounted, so it will be described as follows: instead of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, a moving display of a first pseudo movable body display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 and a moving display of a second pseudo movable body display imitating the second non-mounted movable body M200 are adopted.

In the above, the pseudo-movable body display is exemplified as a form adopted as a substitute for the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 that were ultimately not mounted, but the invention is not limited to this, and there are also cases where a movable body could be mounted but a pseudo-movable body display is used deliberately to diversify the presentation. It is also possible to use a pseudo-movable body display that imitates a movable body that is not planned to be mounted at the development stage (for example, a virtual movable body or a movable body that is mounted or planned to be mounted on another model).

(Mounted movable body 32)
The mounted movable body 32 will be described below with reference to Fig. 23-13. Fig. 23-13 (A) is a diagram showing the movement mode of the mounted movable body, and (B) is a diagram explaining the situation in which the mounted movable body is lifted.

As shown in FIG. 23-13(A), the mounted movable body 32 is composed of a performance section 32A formed in a roughly trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front, and a mechanism section 32B. The left and right sides of the mechanism section 32B, which are extended from the performance section 32A to the left and right, respectively, are supported by drive mechanisms 201L, 201R arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, allowing it to move vertically between an upper origin position (the origin position shown by a solid line in FIG. 23-13(A)) and a performance position below the origin position (the position shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 23-13(A)). Note that the mechanism section 32B is a transmission member that transmits the power of the drive mechanisms 201L, 201R to the performance section 32A.

The driving mechanism 201L, 201R mainly includes a mounted movable body motor 202L, 202R, a driving gear 203L, 203R fixed to the driving shaft of the mounted movable body motor 202L, 202R, a driven gear 204L, 204R meshing with the driving gear 203L, 203R, a rotating shaft 205L, 205R facing in the vertical direction and having the driven gear 204L, 204R fixed to the lower end, a moving body 206L, 206R inserted into the rotating shaft 205L, 205R, a mounted movable body solenoid 207L, 207R capable of holding the mounted movable body 32 at the origin position, and a mounted movable body LED 208 (see Figure 23-2) built into the performance unit 32A and capable of illuminating a light-emitting unit 208A consisting of the letter "X" (see Figure 23-2).

The left and right ends (guided parts) of the mechanism 32B are inserted (guided) into the rotating shafts 205L and 205R so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and are retained in the origin position by being locked to the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R. When the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on while retained in the origin position and the locked state is released, the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position due to its own weight, and the left and right ends of the mechanism 32B come into contact with the moving bodies 206L and 206R, restricting downward movement, so that the mounted movable body 32 stops at the performance position.

While a spiral groove 205A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotating shafts 205L and 205R, the moving bodies 206L and 206R have an engagement portion (not shown) formed on the inner periphery that can be engaged with the groove 205A, and the rotation around the rotating shafts 205L and 205R is restricted, so that the rotating shafts 205L and 205R are rotated forward and backward by the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R to move in the vertical direction. Therefore, the mounted movable body 32 can fall from the origin position to the performance position by its own weight, and after falling, as shown in FIG. 23-13(B), the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R rotate the rotating shafts 205L and 205R to raise the moving bodies 206L and 206R, so that the moving bodies rise from the performance position to the origin position, and are held at the origin position by the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R.

(First pseudo movable display and first non-mounted movable body)
Next, the first pseudo movable display and the first non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to Fig. 23-14. Fig. 23-14 is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display (A), and a diagram showing the movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body (B).

The first pseudo movable body display Z100 shown in Figure 23-14 (A) is an image that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100 that was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but was not mounted due to various circumstances, as shown in Figure 23-14 (B).

The first non-mounted movable body M100, which is not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, is composed of a performance section M100A formed in a roughly rectangular shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front, and a mechanism section M100B. The left side of the mechanism section M100B, which extends leftward from the performance section M100A, is supported by a drive mechanism M101 located on the left side of the image display device 5, so that it can move vertically between a first origin position above (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 23-14 (B)) and a first performance position below the first origin position (the position shown by the solid line in Figure 23-14 (B)).

The drive mechanism M101 mainly comprises a movable body motor M102, a drive gear M103 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M102, a driven gear M104 meshing with the drive gear M103, a vertically oriented rotating shaft M105 with the driven gear M104 fixed to its lower end, a movable body solenoid M107 capable of holding the first non-mounted movable body M100 at the first origin position, a moving body M106 inserted into the rotating shaft M105, and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) built into the performance section M100A and capable of illuminating a circular light-emitting section M108A when viewed from the front.

The performance unit M100A has striped decorations on the front and four performance movable parts M110A-M110D arranged around the light-emitting unit M108A, and can be changed between a first performance state (indicated by the two-dot chain line in Figure 23-14 (B)) in which the performance movable parts M110A-M110D are close to each other, and a second performance state in which the performance movable parts M110A-M110D move radially away from the light-emitting unit M108A.

The first non-mounted movable body M100 is inserted (guided) in a vertically movable manner on the rotation axis M105 at the left end (guided part) of the mechanism M100B, and is held at the first origin position by being engaged with the movable body solenoid M107. When the movable body solenoid M107 is turned on while held at the first origin position and the engaged state is released, the first non-mounted movable body M100 falls from the first origin position under its own weight, and the left and right ends of the mechanism M100B come into contact with the moving body M106, restricting downward movement, so that the first non-mounted movable body M100 stops at the first performance position.

In addition, a spiral groove M105A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation axis M105, while a locking portion (not shown) that can be locked to the groove M105A is formed on the inner periphery of the moving body M106, and rotation around the rotation axis M105 is restricted, so that the moving body M106 can move up and down by rotating the rotation axis M105 forward and backward by the moving body motor M102. Therefore, the first non-mounted moving body M100 can fall from the first origin position to the first performance position by its own weight, and after falling, the moving body M106 rises from the first performance position to the first specific origin position by rotating the rotation axis M105 by the moving body motor M102 to raise the moving body M106, and is held at the first origin position by the moving body solenoid M107.

As shown in FIG. 23-14(A), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is an image that imitates the above-mentioned first non-mounted movable body M100, and has a performance display part Z100A corresponding to the performance part M100A, a mechanism display part Z100B corresponding to the mechanism part M100B, and a light-emitting display part Z108A corresponding to the light-emitting part M108A. It is capable of being moved and displayed in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position (see FIG. 23-16(B)), and is also capable of being moved and displayed in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to a position different from the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to a position different from the first performance position (see FIG. 23-17(A)). Additionally, the performance section M100A has performance movable display sections Z110A-Z110D that correspond to the performance movable sections M110A-M110D, and can be changed between a first performance display state that corresponds to the first performance state, and a second performance display state that corresponds to the second performance state.

(Second pseudo movable display and second non-mounted movable body)
Next, the second pseudo movable display and the second non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to Fig. 23-15. Fig. 23-15 is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the second pseudo movable body display (A), and a diagram showing the movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body (B).

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 shown in Figure 23-15 (A) is an image that imitates the second non-mounted movable body M200 that was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but was not mounted due to various circumstances, as shown in Figures 23-15 (B) and (C).

Note that, for the second non-mounted movable body M200, two mounting plans with different operating modes (for example, mounting plan 1 shown in FIG. 23-15(B) and mounting plan 2 shown in FIG. 23-15(C)) were devised at the beginning of development. However, due to development reasons, it became impossible to mount the second non-mounted movable body itself, so the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 was made executable with a movement display corresponding to mounting plan 1 and a movement display corresponding to mounting plan 2, which will be described below.

As shown in Figures 23-15 (B) and (C), the second non-mounted movable body M200 not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of a performance unit M200A formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front side, and a mechanical unit M200B, and is incorporated into a first performance device (mounting plan 1: see Figure 23-15 (B)) in which the lower end of the mechanical unit M100B is supported by a first drive mechanism M201A arranged below the image display device 5, and a second performance device (mounting plan 2: see Figure 23-15 (C)) in which the upper end of the mechanical unit M100B is supported by a second drive mechanism M201B arranged above the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 23-15(B), the first drive mechanism M201A has a movable body motor (not shown) provided on the back side of the base member M202, a rotating body M203 rotated by the movable body motor (not shown), and a guide rail M204 that guides the performance unit M200A so that it can move up and down. One end of the mechanism unit M200B is supported so as to be rotatable around a rotation axis facing in the front-to-rear direction relative to the base member M202, and a long hole M206 is formed into which a connecting shaft M205 protruding from the peripheral portion on the front side of the rotating body M203 is slidably inserted.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the first drive mechanism M201A can be moved vertically between a first specific origin position below (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 23-15 (B)) and a first specific performance position above the first specific origin position (the position shown by the solid line in Figure 23-15 (B)) by rotating the rotating body M203 by the movable body motor (not shown) and rotating the mechanism part M200B around the rotation axis.

The performance unit M200A also has a rotating unit M207 that is circular when viewed from the front, and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) that can illuminate multiple (e.g., five) light-emitting units M208A to M208E provided on the rotating unit M207. As the rotating unit M207 rotates, the non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) lights up, causing the light-emitting units M208A to M208E to emit light in multiple colors (e.g., seven colors).

As shown in FIG. 23-15(C), the second drive mechanism M201B mainly comprises a movable body motor M212, a drive gear M213 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M212, a driven gear M214 meshing with the drive gear M213, and a rotation shaft M215 facing left and right with the driven gear M214 fixed to its left end. A spiral groove M215A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M215, while a mechanism part M200B extending upward from the performance part M200A has a locking part (not shown) formed on its inner periphery that can be locked into the groove M215A, and rotation around the rotation shaft M215 is restricted.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the second drive mechanism M201B can be moved left and right between a second specific origin position on the left side (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 23-15(C)) and a second specific performance position on the right side (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 23-15(C)) by rotating the rotation shaft M215 forward and backward by the movable body motor M212, and can be stopped at a second intermediate performance position halfway between the second specific origin position and the second specific performance position.

As shown in FIG. 23-15(A), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is an image that imitates the second non-mounted movable body M200, and has a performance display section Z200A corresponding to the performance section M200A, a mechanism display section Z200B corresponding to the mechanism section M200B, a rotation display section Z207 corresponding to the rotation section M207, and light-emitting display sections Z208A-Z208E corresponding to the light-emitting sections M208A-M208E.

Incidentally, at the beginning of development, it was planned to install a full-color LED as the non-mounted movable body LED (not shown), but due to cost considerations, it may be necessary to install a single-color LED. However, by making it the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, it is possible to make the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E light up in multiple colors (e.g., seven colors) without considering the cost.

Then, it can be moved vertically between a first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and a first specific performance display position corresponding to the first specific performance position (see FIG. 23-16(C)), and can be moved horizontally between a second specific initial display position corresponding to the second specific origin position and a second specific performance display position corresponding to the second specific performance position (see FIG. 23-17(B)).

Next, the movement mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained based on Figures 23-16 and 23-17. Figure 23-16 is a diagram showing (A) the movable range of a non-mounted movable body, (B) the movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (C) the movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. Figure 23-17 is a diagram showing (A) a specific movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (B) a specific movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display.

As shown in FIG. 23-16(A), the mounted movable body 32 can be moved vertically between an origin position where the lower part of the performance unit 32A overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5, and a performance position where the performance unit 32A and the mechanism unit 32B overlap at approximately the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the movement distance from the origin position to the performance position is L1.

As shown in FIG. 23-16 (B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved up and down between a first initial display position where the lower part of the performance display unit Z100A is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first performance display position where the performance display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at approximately the lower center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is L2.

As shown in FIG. 23-17(A), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved vertically between a first specific initial display position where the upper part of the performance display unit Z100A is displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at approximately the upper center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the specific moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position is L2A.

In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100, like the first non-mounted movable body M100, can not only be displayed by moving vertically within a movable range between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position, but can also be displayed by moving vertically within a specific movable range between a second initial display position not corresponding to the first origin position and a second performance display position not corresponding to the first performance position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-16 (C), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved up and down between a first specific initial display position where the lower part of the performance display unit Z200A is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at approximately the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position is L3.

Also, as shown in FIG. 23-17(B), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved left and right between a second specific initial display position where the right part of the performance display unit Z200A is displayed at the left position of the display area of the image display device 5, and a second specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at approximately the center position of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position is L3A.

In this way, the second pseudo movable body display Z200, like the second non-mounted movable body M200, can not only be displayed by moving up and down within a movable range between a first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and a first specific performance display position corresponding to the first specific performance position, but can also be displayed by moving left and right within a specific movable range between a second specific initial display position not corresponding to the first specific origin position and a second specific performance display position not corresponding to the first specific performance position.

Furthermore, the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3 of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is shorter than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 (L2>L1>L3).Furthermore, the movement display distance L2A of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3A of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is longer than the movement distance L1 and the movement display distance L2A of the mounted movable body 32 (L3A>L2A>L1).

In this way, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be displayed moving over a longer distance (L2, L2A, L3A) than the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, making it possible to realize a more impactful presentation than the mounted movable body 32.

As shown in FIG. 23-16, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 are composed of performance display units Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B, and the mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B are extended to the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, so that it appears as if the performance display units Z100A, Z200A are supported by the drive mechanism M101, first drive mechanism M201A, and second drive mechanism M201B arranged on the side of the image display device 5, making it possible to express the movement display more realistically.

In other words, a pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) is a display that imitates a movable body as a structure that can be operated by a drive mechanism, such as a movable body mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a non-mounted movable body, or a virtual movable body, and is different from an image that does not have a mechanism display section, such as the development notification image Z300 (see Figure 23-25 (H)).

In addition, it is sufficient if it is possible to display something that is partially different from the model movable body, or to display something that cannot be achieved with the model movable body (for example, a deformed or transformed display), or to display movement (for example, a high-speed movement display).

The pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) may be an image or video created by a computer or the like, or may be an image or video captured of a movable body as an actual structure. Furthermore, when these pseudo-movable body displays are displayed moving, a pseudo-impact can be generated by outputting sound effects that are the same as or similar to the sound effects output when the movable body is moved or the impact sound generated when the movable body is stopped, vibrating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A with the vibration motor 61 when the pseudo-movable body display reaches the performance display position, or by outputting deep bass sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc., thereby providing the player with a more realistic performance.

Next, the details of the various effects using the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display Z100, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained using Figure 23-10. Figure 23-10 is a diagram for explaining the content and configuration of the various effects in the super reach.

(Preview performance A)
As shown in Figure 23-10, the preview performance A can be executed when the base state is low, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved to the first specific performance display position, and then the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E light up in a color corresponding to the determined performance pattern, thereby indicating the possibility (expectation) of a jackpot.

In addition, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which has been moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, is erased after being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see Figures 23-25 (C) to (F)).

In more detail, when pattern PYA-1 is determined in the preview performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278A described later, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white, when pattern PYA-2 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in blue, when pattern PYA-3 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green, and when pattern PYA-4 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in red. Therefore, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E with the highest expectation of a jackpot is red. The light-emitting color can be changed in various ways, and when a jackpot is confirmed, the light-emitting display units may be illuminated in gold or rainbow colors, etc.

(Preview Performance B)
The preview performance B is executable when the base state is high, and the possibility (expectation) that the variable display result will be a jackpot is indicated depending on whether the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or from the second initial display position to the second performance display position, or whether the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the second specific performance display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first performance display position to the first initial display position (see Figures 23-34 (A) to (C)). The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second performance display position to the second initial display position (see Figures 23-34 (D) to (F)).

The second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second intermediate performance display position to the second specific initial display position (see Figures 23-33 (A) to (C)). The second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second specific performance display position to the second specific initial display position (see Figures 23-33 (D) to (F)).

In detail, in the preview performance B type determination process of step 241SGS278A described below, if pattern PYB-1 is determined, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position, if pattern PYB-2 is determined, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position, if pattern PYB-3 is determined, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and if pattern PYB-4 is determined, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second performance display position. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot is higher when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner than when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed in a moving manner, and the moving display pattern with the highest probability of a jackpot is the pattern in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner from the second initial display position to the second performance display position.

Furthermore, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or from the second initial display position to the second performance display position faster than the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the second specific performance display position.

(Development A)
In the development performance A, the development to a weak super reach is announced by the mounted movable body 32 moving (falling) from the origin position to the performance position (see FIG. 23-25 (H)). The mounted movable body 32, which has been moved from the origin position to the performance position, rises from the performance position to the origin position and returns after a predetermined time has passed.

In more detail, if execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, the development to a weak super reach is announced by the mounted movable body 32 dropping from the origin position to the performance position at the performance start timing (see FIG. 23-25 (H)). On the other hand, if non-execution is determined, the mounted movable body 32 does not drop from the origin position at the performance start timing, and the development to a weak super reach is announced by the development announcement image Z300 being displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 23-25 (G)). In other words, non-execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process, which means that a performance pattern is decided in which the mounted movable body 32 is not dropped and the development announcement image Z300 is displayed to announce the development to a weak super reach.

The development notification image Z300 is an image (display) that imitates the mounted movable body 32, but unlike pseudo-movable body displays such as the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which are displayed and move in the same way as the movable body, it is an image (display) that imitates only the performance section 32A, and is displayed in a display mode that differs from the movement of the mounted movable body 32. For example, at the performance start timing, it is displayed from the beginning at a performance display position that corresponds to the performance position of the mounted movable body 32, without any movement display.

(Development suggestion)
The development suggestion effect can be executed before the development effect B is executed, and after the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved to the first specific effect display position, when a rapid-fire operation of the push button 31B by the player (an operation in which the detection signal of the push sensor 35B is detected multiple times within a specified period) is detected during an effective operation period in which the rapid-fire operation is effective, the light-emitting display sections Z208A-Z208E change to an illuminated display color corresponding to the determined effect pattern, thereby suggesting the display color of the character image Z310 described below, i.e., the possibility that the development effect B will be executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, during the effective operation period during which the repeated operation of the push button 31B is valid in the development suggestion performance, an operation promotion image (such as an image imitating the push button 31B) that promotes the repeated operation of the push button 31B is not displayed on the image display device 5, and instead, the button LED 62 (see FIG. 23-2) built into the push button 31B is turned on to promote the repeated operation of the push button 31B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an operation promotion display that promotes the repeated operation of the push button 31B during the effective operation period may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which has been moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, is displayed so that the character image Z310 related to the model overlaps (acts on) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position in the display area of the image display device 5, and then is erased without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see Figures 23-26 (A) to (J), Figure 23-27 (A)).

In more detail, in the development suggestion performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, if pattern PS-1 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will remain white even if the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed, if pattern PS-2 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, if pattern PS-3 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue to green in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, and if pattern PS-4 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue to green to red in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B. Therefore, the final light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E with the highest execution expectation of development performance B will be red.

The light color and the pattern of change in light color can also be changed in various ways. For example, the light color may change from white to red without changing to blue or green, or the light color may be other than white from the beginning. In addition, the number of lit light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E may be increased in response to repeated pressing of the push button 31B, so that a higher number of lit light-emitting parts increases the expectation of the development performance B being executed than a lower number of lit light-emitting parts. The expectation may also differ depending on the light color and the number of lights.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when the repeated operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period or when the amount of the repeated operation is small, even if one of the patterns PS-2 to 4 is determined, the illumination color does not change depending on the amount of the repeated operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the repeated operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period or when the amount of the repeated operation is small, the illumination color may change to the illumination color corresponding to the determined pattern PS-2 to 4 when the valid operation period ends.

In addition, the character image Z310 displayed after the valid operation period ends is displayed in a color that corresponds to the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the valid operation period ends.

In addition, different types of character images Z310 may be displayed depending on the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the effective operation period ends. Even if the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E does not change despite the fact that one of the patterns PS-2 to 4 has been determined as described above, a character image Z310 (a color different from the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E) in a color corresponding to the determined pattern PS-2 to 4 may be displayed. Furthermore, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E may be changed to the same color as the character image Z310 at the timing when the character image Z310 is displayed.

(Development B)
In the development performance B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, thereby announcing that the performance will develop into a strong super reach performance and a deciding performance will be executed (content advantageous to the player) (see FIG. 23-27(D)). Also, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that was moved and displayed at the first specific performance display position is erased without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see FIG. 23-27(D) to (F)).

In addition, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased without moving from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, a reach title image Z51 is displayed in the display area including the first specific performance display position so as to overlap the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in a manner indicating that the image is about to be displayed, thereby suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state).

In more detail, when execution is determined in the development performance B type determination process of step 241SGS280 described later, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position at the performance start timing, thereby notifying the development to a strong super reach (see FIG. 23-27 (D)). On the other hand, when non-execution is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position at the performance start timing, and the image display device 5 displays the reach title image Z51 in a ready state to notify the development to a strong super reach (see FIG. 23-27 (C)). In other words, when non-execution is determined in the development performance B type determination process, a performance pattern is determined in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved and the reach title image Z51 is displayed in a ready state to notify the development to a strong super reach.

(Decisive performance)
The deciding performance is a performance that concludes the battle between the ally character and the enemy character that was being executed in the super reach performance, and notifies the player of whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot. Specifically, for example, after a display is made in which the ally character delivers a final blow to the enemy character, a display is made to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, and at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is not detected and the operation effective period ends, either a jackpot confirmation notification is made in which the enemy character is defeated by moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, and the player wins the battle, or a loss confirmation notification is made in which the mounted movable body 32 is not moved from the origin position to the performance position, and is defeated by the enemy character, and the player loses the battle.

Patterns KB-1 and KV-1 are selected when the variable display result is a miss, and a confirmed miss notification is made in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and loses the battle, while patterns KB-2 and KV-2 are selected when the variable display result is a jackpot, and a confirmed jackpot notification is made in which the friendly character defeats the enemy character and wins the battle.

In addition, in patterns KB-2 and KV-2, when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or when the effective operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A being detected, the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (e.g., about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

In addition, if the execution of pattern KB-2 or KV-2 is determined in the determination effect type determination process of step 241SGS282 described later, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position at the timing when the mounted movable body 32 falls, and a jackpot confirmation notification is made, and after returning from the effect position to the origin position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed. Then, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped, and the variable display result is a jackpot (see Figures 23-29 (E) to (G), Figures 23-30 (A) to (F)).

On the other hand, if it is decided to execute pattern KB-1 or KV-1, the mounted movable body 32 will not move from the origin position at the timing when it falls, and an effect image Z57 of cracked glass will be displayed to notify the user of a confirmed miss, and the variable display result will be a miss (see Figures 23-29 (H) to (J)).

Next, the probability of winning depending on the execution status of development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 in super reach β and γ (strong super reach) and development performance B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained based on Figure 23-11. Figure 23-11 is a diagram showing the probability of winning depending on the execution status of development performance A and development performance B.

As shown in Figure 23-11, pattern A is a pattern in which both development effect A and development effect B are not executed during the variable display period of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of super reach β and γ (strong super reach), pattern B is a pattern in which development effect A is not executed and development effect B is executed, pattern C is a pattern in which development effect A is executed and development effect B is not executed, and pattern D is a pattern in which development effect A and development effect B are both executed.

In the above, the jackpot expectation is set in the order of pattern A < pattern B < pattern C < pattern D. In other words, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the variable pattern of the Super Reach β or Super Reach γ, when the development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without executing the development performance A. Also, when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance A is executed without executing the development performance B. Also, when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance A and the development performance B are not executed.

Figure 23-18 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 22. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number (step 241SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, in step 241SGS271, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 109SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 241SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 241SGS272 or step 241SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 241SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 241SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 241SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned to "7" as the stopping pattern. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot B, the stopping pattern is determined from among multiple combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative patterns such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot C, the stopping pattern is determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the small win. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned as even numbers as the stopping patterns. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small jackpot, the stopping patterns are determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the probability jackpot C. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss, the stopping patterns are determined to be decorative patterns in which three patterns are not aligned, and are combinations other than the above-mentioned chance numbers (miss patterns).

When determining these stopping patterns, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determine the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping pattern may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance checks whether the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277). If it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277; Y), it executes the preview performance type determination process shown in FIG. 23-19 to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the preview performance A or the preview performance B in the variable display (step 241SGS278A), and executes the development performance A type determination process shown in FIG. 23-21 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development performance A in the variable display (step 241SGS278B). If it is not a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277; N), it proceeds to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 23-19, in the preview performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS301). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C, non-variable probability jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects determines whether the game state is in a low base state (time-saving state) (step 241SGS302), and if it is in a low base state (step 241SGS302; Y), it extracts a random number for determining the advance notice effect, and determines the effect pattern of advance notice effect A using table A for determining the type of advance notice effect shown in FIG. 23-20 (A) (step 241SGS303). On the other hand, if it is not in a low base state, that is, if it is in a high base state (step 241SGS302; N), it extracts a random number for determining the advance notice effect, and determines the effect pattern of advance notice effect B using table B for determining the type of advance notice effect shown in FIG. 23-20 (B) (step 241SGS304).

As shown in Figure 23-20 (A), in the table for determining the type of preview performance A, for each of "Pattern PYA-1", "Pattern PYA-2", "Pattern PYA-3", and "Pattern PYA-4", different judgment values are assigned for the variable display result of a sure chance jackpot (sure chance jackpot A, sure chance jackpot B, or sure chance jackpot C), a non-sure chance jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 23-20 (A) are obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". Additionally, when the variable display result is a normal reach miss, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2," 8 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3," and 2 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4."

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYA-4" is determined with the highest probability, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYA-3" is determined with the highest probability, and if it results in a super reach miss or normal reach miss, "Pattern PYA-1" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, "Pattern PYA-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PYA-4" > "Pattern PYA-3" > "Pattern PYA-2" > "Pattern PYA-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

As shown in Figure 23-20 (B), in the table for determining the type of preview performance B, for each of "Pattern PYB-1", "Pattern PYB-2", "Pattern PYB-3", and "Pattern PYB-4", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 23-20 (B) are obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". Furthermore, when the variable display result is a normal reach miss, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2," 8 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3," and 2 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4."

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYB-4" is determined with the highest probability, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYB-3" is determined with the highest probability, and if it results in a super reach miss or normal reach miss, "Pattern PYB-1" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, "Pattern PYB-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-2" > "Pattern PYB-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given in which the determination ratio of each pattern is the same in the table for determining the preview performance type A for a low base state and the table for determining the preview performance type B for a high base state, but this invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of each pattern may be different in the table for determining the preview performance type A and the table for determining the preview performance type B.

Returning to FIG. 23-19, in step 241SGS305, the preview performance type determined in step 241SGS303 or step 241SGS304 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS305). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS306, where the preview performance start waiting timer is set to the period until the performance starts (step 241SGS306), and the process ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-21, in the development performance A type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS311). The variable display result can be identified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C, non-variable probability jackpot, small jackpot) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the development performance A is the normal reach and the super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of the probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the development performance A.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the type of advanced performance, and determines the performance pattern of advanced performance A using the table for determining the type of advanced performance A shown in FIG. 23-21 (B) (step 241SGS312).

As shown in Figure 23-21 (B), in the table for determining the type of development performance A, for each of the patterns of "non-execution" and "execution", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 23-21 (B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, a judgment value of 10 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 90 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, a judgment value of 20 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 80 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for a super reach, a judgment value of 80 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 20 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for a normal reach, a judgment value of 100 is assigned to "not execute". In other words, when a normal reach is a miss, it does not develop into a weak super reach performance, so development performance A is not executed.

By assigning the judgment values in this way, when the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot or non-guaranteed jackpot, "execute" is determined with the highest probability, and when the super reach or normal reach is missed, "non-execute" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, the probability of a jackpot is higher when development performance A is executed than when it is not executed. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 23-21(A), in step 241SGS313, the type of advanced performance A determined in step 241SGS312 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS314, where the advanced performance A start waiting timer is set to the period until the start of the performance (step 241SGS314), and the process ends.

Returning to Figure 23-18, after executing the processing of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279), and if it is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279; Y), it executes the development suggestion performance type determination processing shown in Figure 23-22 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development suggestion performance in the variable display (step 241SGS280), it executes the development performance B type determination processing shown in Figure 23-23 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development performance B in the variable display (step 241SGS281), and it executes the deciding performance B type determination processing shown in Figure 23-24 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the deciding performance in the variable display (step 241SGS282). If it is not a super reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279; N), proceed to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 23-22 (A), in the development suggestion performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS321). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, special chance jackpot A, special chance jackpot B, special chance jackpot C, non-special chance jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the development suggestion performance, and determines the performance pattern of the development suggestion performance using the development suggestion performance type determination table shown in Figure 23-22 (B) (step 241SGS322).

As shown in Figure 23-22 (B), in the table for determining the type of development suggestion performance, different judgment values are assigned to each of "Pattern PS-1", "Pattern PS-2", "Pattern PS-3", and "Pattern PS-4" when the variable display result is a sure chance jackpot (sure chance jackpot A, sure chance jackpot B, or sure chance jackpot C), when it is a non-sure chance jackpot, when it is a super reach miss, or when it is a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 23-20 (A) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4".

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PS-4" is determined most frequently, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PS-3" is determined most frequently, and if it results in a super reach miss, "Pattern PS-1" is determined most frequently. In other words, "Pattern PS-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PS-4" > "Pattern PS-3" > "Pattern PS-2" > "Pattern PS-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 23-22(A), in step 241SGS323, the type of development suggestion effect determined in step 241SGS322 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS323). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS324, where the development suggestion effect start waiting timer is set to the period until the effect starts (step 241SGS324), and the process ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-23(A), in the development performance B type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS331). The variable display result can be identified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C, non-variable probability jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the advanced performance and determines the performance pattern of advanced performance B using the advanced performance B type determination table shown in FIG. 23-23 (B) (step 241SGS332).

As shown in Figure 23-23(B), in the table for determining the type of development performance B, for each of the patterns of "non-execution" and "execution", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 23-23(B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 20 judgment values are assigned to "not execute" and 80 judgment values are assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "not execute" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for Super Reach β or γ, 30 judgment values are assigned to "not execute" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for Super Reach α, 100 judgment values are assigned to "not execute". In other words, when Super Reach α is a miss, it does not develop into a strong Super Reach performance, so development performance B is not executed.

By assigning the judgment values in this way, when the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot or non-guaranteed jackpot, "execute" is determined with the highest probability, and when the super reach misses or normal reach misses, "non-execute" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when development performance B is executed than when it is not executed. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 23-23(A), in step 241SGS333, the type of advanced performance B determined in step 241SGS332 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS333). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS334, where the advanced performance B start waiting timer is set to the period until the start of the performance (step 241SGS334), and the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 23-24(A), in the process of determining the type of final effect, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect determines the pattern of the final effect using the table for determining the type of final effect shown in FIG. 23-24(B) based on the variable display result identified in step 241SGS301 (step 241SGS341). Next, the determined type of final effect is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS342), the timer waiting for the start of the final effect is set to the period until the start of the effect (step 241SGS343), and the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 23-24(B), in the deciding effect type determination table, for "Pattern KB-1" and "Pattern KB-2" which display an operation prompt to encourage the player to press the push button 31B once by validating the operation of the push button 31B, and "Pattern KV-1" and "Pattern KV-2" which display an operation prompt to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A once by validating the operation of the stick controller 31A, different judgment values are assigned to the variable display results when the variable display results in a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), when the variable display results in a non-special jackpot, or when the super reach is missed, so that the judgment value numbers shown in FIG. 23-24(B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-2" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-2". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-2" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-2". When the variable display result is a miss for the Super Reach β/γ, 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-1".

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if a sure-win occurs in the variable display, "Pattern KV-1" in which the control object is the stick controller 31A is determined most frequently, if a sure-win occurs but a non-sure-win occurs, "Pattern KB-2" in which the control object is the push button 31B is determined most frequently, and if a super reach is missed, "Pattern KB-1" in which the control object is the push button 31B is determined most frequently. In other words, the probability of a sure-win is higher when the stick controller 31A is the control object than when the push button 31B is the control object. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the random numbers for determining the preview performance, the random numbers for determining the development performance A, the random numbers for determining the development hint performance, the random numbers for determining the development performance B, and the random numbers for determining the final performance are each random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and one of the values in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. In other words, the number of judgment values for these various performance determination random numbers is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but this invention is not limited to this, and the range of these various performance determination random numbers can be determined appropriately. Also, a performance determination random number counter for generating these various performance determination random numbers is set in RAM 122, and this performance determination random number counter is updated at each timer interruption in the random number update process. Also, a common random number may be used for these various performance determination random numbers.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, an example of determining the performance pattern of various performances in the various performance type determination process has been given, but this invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the above-mentioned performances, it is also possible to determine the execution of preview performances such as a character preview performance in which a character appears, a step-up preview in which the preview image changes in stages, and a group preview in which a group of specified characters crosses the display area.When determining these different types of preview performances, the timing to start the preview performance differs depending on the type of preview performance, so a different period depending on the type of preview performance can be set in the preview performance start waiting timer described below.

Returning to FIG. 23-18, in step 241SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variable pattern designation command. Then, it starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 241SGS284).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 241SGS285). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command (step 241SGS286). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 241SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data being variably displayed, including image data showing the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns, to the VRAM each time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, which then displays an image corresponding to the signal. This realizes the variable display of the decorative patterns and the display of videos of other performances.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting processing (step 241SGS288).

(Example of Super Reach β performance)
Next, a description will be given of an example of the performance of the Super Reach β based on Fig. 23-25 to Fig. 23-31. Fig. 23-25 (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the Super Reach β mainly in the normal reach. Fig. 23-26 (A) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the weak Super Reach. Fig. 23-27 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the weak Super Reach. Fig. 23-28 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the strong Super Reach. Fig. 23-29 (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the strong Super Reach performance. Fig. 23-30 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of the performance after the big win confirmation notification. Fig. 23-31 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing details of the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display. Fig. 23-32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light-emitting display unit and the mounted movable body LED.

Below, we will explain various examples of performance actions during the variable display period based on the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β.

As shown in FIG. 23-25(A), the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R based on the variable pattern of the Super Reach β, which is based on the occurrence of a start winning. In addition, the upper left corner of the display area of the image display device 5 is provided with a display area 5SL for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "2"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), and a small symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (e.g., an arrow "↓↓↓"), and the small symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The first and second reserved memory numbers, small symbols, and error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 are displayed in front of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 (higher layer), preventing the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small symbols, and error display. On the other hand, the decorative symbols are displayed behind the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 (lower layer), preventing the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

After the variable display starts, as shown in FIG. 23-25(B), if the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode, the normal reach presentation starts as a variable display presentation of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 23-25(C), at the start timing of the preview performance A when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays the second pseudo movable object display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, then moves it to the first specific performance display position (see FIG. 23-25(D)), and as shown in FIG. 23-25(E), executes the preview performance A suggesting that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state by lighting up the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E in a display color corresponding to the pattern (any of PYA-1 to 4) determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278A. Also, an effect image Z60 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable object display Z200 that has been moved to the first specific performance display position.

The effect image Z60 is displayed in a manner that corresponds to the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E. For example, when the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white based on pattern PYA-1, the effect image Z60 is white and has a small display size, and when the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in red based on pattern PYA-4, the effect image Z60 is red and preferably has a large display size according to the degree of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-25(F), the effect image Z60 is erased, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased, thereby ending the preview performance A. After that, the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size slightly larger than the small pattern in the display area 5SR provided in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5.

If it is decided not to execute development performance A in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B, as shown in FIG. 23-25(G), at the start timing of development performance A, the mounted movable body 32 is not dropped but is kept in the origin position, and a development notification image Z300 is displayed, and an effect image Z61A is displayed around it, to notify that it will develop into a weak super reach performance. If it is decided to execute development performance A, as shown in FIG. 23-25(H), at the start timing of development performance A, the mounted movable body solenoids 207L, 207R are turned on to drop the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect image Z61B different from the effect image Z61A for emphasizing the mounted movable body 32 is displayed around it, to notify that it will develop into a weak super reach performance.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when the drop of the mounted movable body 32 is executed as development performance A than when it is not executed, but even if it has been decided not to execute development performance A (drop of the mounted movable body 32), the development notification image Z300 can be displayed to notify the player that the performance will progress to a weak super reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 23-26(A), after the execution period of development performance A ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the weak super reach performance by displaying the character image Z310, and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and then moves and displays it at the first specific performance display position, starting the development suggestion performance (see FIG. 23-26(B)). At this time, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed so that a part of it overlaps with the front side of the character image Z310.

In addition, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved to the first specific display position as a development suggestion effect, the light-emitting display sections Z208A-Z208E are illuminated in white, and the button LED 62 of the push button 31B is lit up to encourage the operation of the push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-26(C), an effect image Z62 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable object display Z200. Then, if one of the patterns (PS-2 to 4) is determined in the development suggestion performance type determination process of step 241SGS280, as shown in FIG. 23-26(D), the effect image Z62 is enlarged according to the number of repeated taps of the push button 31B during the effective operation period (the number of operations detected), and the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E is changed every time a predetermined time has passed, thereby indicating that development performance B will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 23-26(E), even after the effective operation period has ended, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E is maintained, and the background image is darkened to display a blackout. After that, a small-sized character image Z310 is displayed in the upper position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in the same color as the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the effective operation period has ended, and an effect image Z63 for highlighting the character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 23-26(F)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 23-26(G)), a medium-sized character image Z310 is then displayed (see FIG. 23-26(H)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 23-26(I)), and then a large-sized character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 23-26(J)).

In addition, in Figures 23-26 (E) to (J), taking into consideration the appearance of the presentation, it is preferable to continue the illumination of the illumination display units Z208A to Z208E, but not to display the effect image Z62.

In this way, the character image Z310, which is the same color as the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E, is displayed in a manner that gradually increases in size from the back of the screen to the front, and when small, medium, and large sized character images Z310 are displayed, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 23-26 (J) in FIG. 23-27, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is overlapped with at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, so that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be seen through the overlapping area, thereby more suitably enhancing anticipation for the execution of the development performance B.

In addition, because the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed in front of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, the display of the character image Z310 can appropriately suggest that development performance B will be executed, while diverting the player's attention from the fact that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be erased without being moved to the first specific initial display position.

In addition, while the character image Z310 is displayed in a manner that gradually increases in size, it may also be displayed so as to overlap at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the start of display. In addition, the effect image Z63 may also be displayed as a suggestion image so as to overlap at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-27(A), while the large-sized character image Z310 is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position. Specifically, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is hidden by being gradually faded out as an erased display to emphasize that it has been erased. After that, the large-sized character image Z310 is erased by being gradually faded out.

In the characteristic section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which, as shown in FIG. 23-27(A), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while the large-sized character image Z310 is being displayed, but the invention is not limited to this, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 may be erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while the character image Z310 is being displayed when the display of the character image Z310 is started, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started, as shown in FIG. 23-26(F).

Furthermore, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is not limited to being erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, but may be erased (hidden) by moving the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while fading out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 23-27(B), at the start timing of the development performance B, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. Here, if it is determined in the development performance B type determination process of step 241SGS281 that development performance B will not be executed, as shown in FIG. 23-27(C), the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is erased without being moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, and the reach title image Z51 described later is displayed in a predetermined form (for example, a form at the start of display with high transparency and low visibility), thereby announcing that the development will progress to a strong super reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23-27(D), when it is decided to execute the development performance B, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position to notify that it will develop into a strong super reach. At this time, as shown in the enlarged view, the light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E are illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., white) when moving, and the rotating display part Z207 including the light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E is displayed in a manner that rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. In addition, an effect image Z65 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable object display Z200 that has been moved to the first specific performance display position.

The light-emitting display colors of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E in FIG. 23-27(D) are different from the development suggestion effects and do not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, but are light-emitting display colors that correspond to the colors of the effect images Z65, etc., displayed on the image display device 5 as images of the weak reach effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-27(E), the reach title image Z51 described later is displayed in a predetermined state (for example, a state at the start of display in which the transmittance is high and the visibility is low), and then, as shown in FIG. 23-27(F), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-28(A), when the variable display mode is set to the super reach display mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reach title indicating the type of super reach performance and a reach title image Z51 indicating the expected jackpot probability, and notifies the player that the performance has progressed to the super reach performance. Next, the super reach performance (for example, a performance displaying an image Z52 in which an ally character and an enemy character battle (confront)) is started (see FIG. 23-28(B)). Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the super reach display mode was set, if the patterns KB-1 and KB-2 have been determined in the performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the operation target is the push button 31B, an operation prompting image Z53 is displayed to prompt the player to press the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 23-28(C). On the other hand, if patterns KV-1 and KV-2 have been determined in the final performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the object of operation is the stick controller 31A, an operation prompting image Z54 is displayed to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 23-28(D).

When the operation prompt display is displayed during the operation effective period, at the timing when the push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected, or at the timing when the operation effective period ends without detecting the push operation of the push button 31B or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 23-29 (E), a movable body performance is executed in which the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position in front of the display area, and the effect image Z55 is displayed. In addition, in response to the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the mounted movable body LED 208 is illuminated in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color, etc.).

Effect image Z55 is an effect image including a plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a manner in which glass cracks and scatters, and is exemplified in a manner similar to effect image Z71 described below, but the invention is not limited to this, and an effect image in a manner different from effect image Z71 may be used. For example, by displaying only a portion of the glass cracking and scattering into fragments, while leaving the remaining portion intact, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to understand what has happened over some time, even in a situation in which the mounted movable body 32 overlaps with effect image Z55 displayed on the image display device 5 and the display is difficult to see.

Furthermore, in effect image Z55, similar to effect image Z71 described below, by reflecting a portion of the mounted movable body 32 arranged in front of the image display device 5 in at least one of the multiple glass fragment images displayed in a scattering manner, the positional relationship between the mounted movable body 32 and the glass fragment image becomes clearer, thereby realizing a more three-dimensional display.

After that, the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, and then, as shown in FIG. 23-29(F), an image Z56 is displayed indicating that the friendly character has won the battle against the enemy character, and then, as shown in FIG. 23-29(G), the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily displayed to notify the player of a confirmed jackpot. Note that even if the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily displayed, the small symbols remain variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-30(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 in which glass cracks and glass fragments scatter in the display area of the image display device 5, and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 23-30(B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and the performance movable display units Z110A-Z110D are changed from the first performance display state to the second performance display state. In addition, in response to the movement of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., rainbow color) in the same way as when the mounted movable body 32 is dropped in FIG. 23-29(E).

Here, the details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position described in Figures 23-30 (A) and (B) are described in Figure 23-31.

As shown in FIG. 23-31(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 including an image Z71A showing glass cracking and scattering into multiple pieces of glass in the display area of the image display device 5, and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position. The performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 so that a portion of it is visible below the mounted movable body 32 held in the origin position. Then, as shown in FIG. 23-31(B), when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in the first intermediate display position between the first initial display position and the first performance display position, the amount and movement display speed of the images Z71A showing the glass fragments are increased compared to the state shown in FIG. 23-31(A), and the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in front of these images Z71A.

Next, as shown in Figures 23-31 (C) and (D), when the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, the amount and movement display speed of images Z71A showing glass fragments are further increased than in the state shown in Figure 23-31 (B), and these images Z71A are displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100.

In this way, in response to the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, an effect image Z71 for emphasizing the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in a display area including the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, and only the image Z71A showing glass fragments in the effect image Z71 is displayed moving from the back side to the front side of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, thereby not only creating a three-dimensional effect with the image Z71A scattering around, but also making the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 look as if it were a real structure.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 23-31(C), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be displayed so as to be visible through one of the multiple images Z71A displayed in front of the first pseudo movable body display Z100, or as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 23-31(D), a portion of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be reflected and displayed in one of the multiple images Z71A displayed in front of the first pseudo movable body display Z100, thereby making the positional relationship between the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the image Z71A clearer, thereby realizing a display with a more three-dimensional feel.

Also, as shown in FIG. 23-31 (D), the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, then changes the performance movable display units Z110A-Z110D from the first performance display state to the second performance display state, and executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 23-32, after the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves to the first performance display position, the performance control CPU 120 repeats a blinking display pattern multiple times during the performance periods ta1 to ta4 during which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, in which the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated for a first period ta1 to ta2 (e.g., 33 ms) and then is not illuminated for a second period ta2 to ta3 (e.g., 33 ms), while repeating a blinking pattern multiple times during the performance periods ta1 to ta4 during which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, in which the mounted movable body LED 208 is illuminated for a first corresponding period (e.g., 30 ms) corresponding to the first period and then is not illuminated for a second corresponding period (e.g., 40 ms) corresponding to the second period.

In this way, by executing (synchronizing) the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, the performance can be more appropriately enhanced. Even if it is difficult to accurately match (synchronize) the time during which the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated (e.g., 33 ms) and the time during which the mounted movable body LED 208 is turned on (e.g., 30 ms) during the first period ta1-ta2, it is possible to prevent the deviation between the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A and the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 from becoming large over time, for example, by making the off period of the mounted movable body LED 208 longer than the on period.

In addition, during the performance periods ta1 to ta4, a vibration performance may be executed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven to vibrate the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A. In this way, the performance can be made more exciting. The driving of the vibration motor 61 may be synchronized with the light-emitting display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208.

Returning to FIG. 23-30(C), the performance control CPU 120 returns the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the second performance display state to the first performance display state, ends the reduced display of the decorative symbols, and temporarily stops and displays them in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, as shown in FIG. 23-30(D), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves upward, and as shown in FIG. 23-30(E), it moves and displays them to the first performance display position and then erases them. Then, the combination of confirmed decorative symbols is stopped and the small symbols are also stopped and displayed in the combination of jackpot symbols.

In this way, after executing the effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 to notify the player of a confirmed jackpot, the effect of moving the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is executed, allowing the player to more effectively experience the feeling that the game is being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

Returning to FIG. 23-29, if the variable display result is a miss at the timing when a single push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected during the operation effective period in which the operation prompt display is displayed, or at the timing when the operation effective period ends without detecting a single push operation of the push button 31B or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 23-29(H), the movable body performance of dropping the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 to the performance position in front of the display area is not executed, and an effect image Z57 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 23-29(I), an image Z58 indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 23-29(J), a miss pattern combination is displayed as a stop notification of a confirmed miss. Also, the small patterns are displayed as a miss pattern combination in synchronization with the stop display of the miss pattern combination.

For example, a difference in scale will occur between when push button 31B is operated at the start of the valid operation period and when push button 31B is not operated during the valid operation period. Therefore, the difference in scale that occurs at the timing of operating push button 31B may be absorbed by extending or shortening any of the following periods: 1. the period during which the decorative pattern shakes until the pattern is determined; 2. the display period of images Z55 to Z58; or 3. the performance period of the movable body performance.

(Example of Super Reach γ performance)
Next, an example of the performance of the Super Reach γ will be described with reference to Fig. 23-33 to Fig. 23-34. Fig. 23-33 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance of the advance notice performance B in the Super Reach γ. Fig. 23-34 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance of the advance notice performance B in the Super Reach γ.

Below, we will explain an example of the performance of preview performance B executed in the normal reach performance in the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern. The flow from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach performance is the same as that of Super Reach β, so we will not explain it here. Note that Super Reach γ is a fluctuation pattern that is selected only when the game state is in a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 23-33(A), when pattern PYB-1 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position at the start timing of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was selected, and then moving and displaying it at the second intermediate performance display position (see FIG. 23-33(B)). In addition, an effect image Z81 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate performance display position to highlight the second pseudo-movable object display Z200.

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L at the second intermediate performance display position, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L.

Then, as shown in FIG. 23-33(C), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the second intermediate performance display position to the second specific initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 23-33(D), when pattern PYB-2 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position at the start of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was selected, and then moving and displaying it at the second specific performance display position (see FIG. 23-33(E)). In addition, an effect image Z81 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific performance display position to highlight the second pseudo-movable object display Z200.

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C at the second specific performance display position, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C.

Then, as shown in FIG. 23-33 (F), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the second specific performance display position to the second specific initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 23-34(A), when pattern PYB-3 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position at the start of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was selected, and then moving and displaying it at the first performance display position (see FIG. 23-34(B)). In addition, an effect image Z82 is displayed around the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first performance display position to highlight the first pseudo-movable object display Z100.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the first performance display position, making it difficult to see some of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, as shown in FIG. 23-34(C), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the first performance display position to the first initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 23-34(D), when pattern PYB-4 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 at the second initial display position at the start timing of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was selected, and then moving and displaying it at the second performance display position (see FIG. 23-34(E)). In addition, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second performance display position.

The first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the second performance display position, making it difficult to see some of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, as shown in FIG. 23-34 (F), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the second performance display position to the second initial display position.

(Pseudo moving object display and moving object)
Next, the pseudo movable body display and the movable body will be described based on Fig. 23-35 to Fig. 23-40. Fig. 23-35 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 23-36 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 23-37 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 23-38 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 23-39 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 23-40 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo movable body display with the second pseudo movable body display.

As shown in FIG. 23-35, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a pseudo movable body display that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which differs from the mounted movable body 32 in shape, weight, drive mechanism, etc., as described in FIG. 23-14 (B), but the first initial display position and the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 are both approximately the same position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first performance display position and the performance position of the mounted movable body 32 are both positions lower than the first initial display position and the origin position, so the direction of movement from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and the direction of movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position are both downward. In other words, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the mounted movable body 32 are both movable downward from the first initial display position and the origin position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5.

As explained in FIG. 23-16, the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position is longer than the moving distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position (L2>L1).

As shown in Figures 23-35 (A') to (C'), the mounted movable body 32 takes approximately 300 ms to fall (move) under its own weight from the upper origin position through the intermediate position to the lower performance position, whereas the first pseudo movable body display Z100 takes approximately 100 ms to move from the first initial display position through the first intermediate display position to the first performance display position, as shown in Figures 23-35 (A) to (C). In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position has a longer movement display distance and is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position.

In this way, when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, which imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, can be displayed moving in the same direction from approximately the same position as the mounted movable body 32 as a structure that can move in the same direction as the first non-mounted movable body M100 (e.g., downward), the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position can be made faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from its origin position to its performance position, thereby making it possible to produce an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 that is actually mounted, thereby surprising the player.

Next, as shown in Figures 23-36 (A') (B'), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a display that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which, when moved from the first origin position to the first performance position that is lower than the first origin position, stops as the mechanical part M100B abuts against the upper part of the movable body M106 and restricts downward movement, and performs a recoil action (bounce) of a predetermined amount of movement due to the vibration that occurs when the movement is restricted.

Therefore, as shown in Figures 23-36 (A) and (B), when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and stops and displays it at the first performance display position, it performs a recoil action display (bounce display) of a specific amount of movement.

More specifically, the first non-mounted movable body M100 has a cantilever structure in which only the left side of the performance part M100A is supported by the drive mechanism M101, and when it moves to the first performance position, the mechanism part M100B abuts against the upper part of the moving body M106, restricting downward movement, so that a recoil action due to vibration occurs in the mechanism part M100B before the performance part M100A, and then the vibration is transmitted to the performance part M100A, causing a recoil action.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 23-36 (B1), when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, it displays the recoil action of the mechanism part M100B, and then displays the recoil action of the performance part M100A, as shown in FIG. 23-36 (B2). By doing this, it is possible to move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, which imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which is different from the mounted movable body 32, in a more realistic manner (for example, a manner different from the display imitating the mounted movable body 32).

Also, as shown in Figures 23-36 (C') and (D'), the mounted movable body 32 is structured so that the left and right sides of the performance part 32A are supported by the drive mechanisms 101L and 101R, and when it moves to the performance position, the mechanism part 32B comes into contact with the upper parts of the left and right moving bodies 206, restricting downward movement, and a recoil action of a predetermined amount of movement is performed due to the vibration that occurs when the movement is restricted.

Next, we will explain the operation of the mounted movable body 32 and the first pseudo movable body during the final performance.

As explained in Figures 23-28 to 23-30, the performance control CPU 120 executes a movable body performance in which the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the performance position during the execution period of the deciding performance (ta0 to ta10) to notify of a confirmed jackpot, and then executes a pseudo-movable body display in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 23-37(A), the presentation control CPU 120 starts the deciding presentation at timing ta0, and then drops the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the presentation position at timing ta1 when it detects the operation of the stick controller 31A or push button 31B by the player within the effective operation period. The mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the presentation position during the period TL1 (e.g., about 300 ms) from timing ta1 to ta2, and then performs a recoil action during the period ta2 to ta3 (e.g., about 700 ms).

Then, at timing ta4, the mounted movable body 32 is moved (raised) from the presentation position to the origin position, and a jackpot confirmation notification is issued. Here, the period TL3 (e.g., about 1000 ms) from timing ta4 to ta5 during which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the presentation position to the origin position is longer than the period TL1 (e.g., about 300 ms) from timing ta1 to ta2 during which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the presentation position. In other words, the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves (falls) from the origin position to the presentation position.

In this way, in a performance using the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position in response to detection of the player's operation, it is possible to give an impact to the player by having it fall quickly under its own weight, while when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, it is possible to prevent the mounted movable body 32 from being damaged by impact by moving it slowly.

Then, at timing ta6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the big win confirmation notification, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position, and during the period TL2 from timing ta6 to ta7 (e.g., about 100 ms), moves it from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, and then performs a recoil action display during the period ta7 to ta8 (e.g., about 900 ms).

After that, at timing ta9, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved (raised) from the first performance display position to the first initial display position, and then the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is erased. Here, the period TL4 (e.g., about 1000 ms) from timing ta9 to ta10 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first performance display position to the first initial display position is longer than the period TL2 (e.g., about 100 ms) from timing ta6 to ta7 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position. In other words, the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first performance display position to the first initial display position is slower than the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position.

In this way, by making the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position faster than the movement display from the first performance display position to the first initial display position, in the same way as the mounted movable body 32, it is possible to make the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 move in a more realistic manner.

Also, as shown in FIG. 23-37(B), when comparing the amount of movement L2 (movement display distance L2) per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and the amount of movement L1A per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position, the amount of movement L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the amount of movement L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position. In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful performance faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, which can give a surprise to the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 23-37(C), the movement amount L12 of the first recoil action display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L11 of the first recoil action display performed when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position. Also, the number of times the first pseudo movable body display Z100 displays the recoil action (e.g., six times) is greater than the number of times the mounted movable body 32 displays the recoil action (e.g., four times). In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate a performance similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, a performance that leaves an impression on the player can be provided.

Also, as shown in Figures 23-38 (A) and (B), the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is the same as the movement display distance L2 of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first performance position, and the period TL2 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is shorter than the period TL10 during which the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position (TL2 < TL10). Therefore, the movement amount L2 per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first performance position. By doing this, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can create an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, which can surprise the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 23-38(C), the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L11 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position, and the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. Also, the number of times the recoil action is displayed of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (e.g., six times) is greater than the number of times the recoil action is displayed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 (e.g., four times). In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate an effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 or the mounted movable body 32 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position or when the mounted movable body 32 moves to the performance position, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, the comparison between the predetermined movement amount in the recoil action of the mounted movable body 32 or the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the specific movement amount in the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a comparison between the first recoil action and the recoil action display, but it may be a comparison between any of the second or subsequent recoil actions and the recoil action display, or a comparison between the total or average movement amount of multiple recoil actions and the total or average movement amount of the recoil action display.

The recoil action has been exemplified as an action in which the movable body jumps upward due to the recoil when it stops at the second position, but it also includes deformation or vibration of a specific part of the movable body due to the recoil.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-39(A), when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, or when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first performance position to the first origin position, driving sources such as the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R and M101 are used, so the performance control CPU 120 increases the control speed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 during the first period from timing tb1 when the movement starts to timing tb2, keeps it constant during the period from timing tb2 to timing tb3, and decreases it during the second period from timing tb3 to timing tb4. In other words, the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 accelerate from the start of movement until the first period has elapsed, then move at a constant speed, and decelerate and stop during the second period just before the stop position.

In contrast, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are displayed is constant from the time tb1 when the movement starts to the time tb4 when the movement stops, as shown in Figure 23-39 (B), and a first period for accelerating the display of the movement and a second period for decelerating the display of the movement are not required, so the display of the movement of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the mounted movable body 32.

Next, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained using Figure 23-40.

As shown in Figures 23-40 (A) to (C), when creating a video in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, at least a first frame, which is an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, and a second frame, which is an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first performance display position, are required.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 23-40 (A') to (B'), when creating a video in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position, at least a first frame, which is an input image for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and a second frame, which is an input image for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific performance display position, are required.

As explained in FIG. 23-16, the moving display distance L2 is the moving display distance from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and the moving display distance L3 is the moving display distance L2 from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 to the first specific performance display position. The moving display distance L2 is longer than the moving display distance L3, but the time required to move the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is about 100 ms, while the time required to move the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first performance display position is about 800 ms, so the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the moving display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first performance display position.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, it is possible to display the first frame shown in FIG. 23-40(A) and then the second frame shown in FIG. 23-40(C) in that order, but this would result in a low frame rate and a jerky, unnatural movement.

Therefore, one interpolation frame shown in FIG. 23-40 (B) is inserted between the first and second frames as an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first intermediate display position, thereby increasing the number of frames in the video and raising the frame rate, and the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is performed in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position for each display frame, thereby enabling a natural and smooth movement display.

In this way, even when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed moving at high speed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, by inserting at least one interpolation frame between the first frame and the second frame to achieve a natural and smooth moving display, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility.

On the other hand, when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, it is also possible to display the first frame shown in FIG. 23-40 (A') and then the second frame shown in FIG. 23-40 (B'), but this would result in a lower frame rate and a jerky, unnatural movement.

Therefore, between the first and second frames, multiple interpolation frames (not shown) are inserted as input images for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at multiple first intermediate display positions between the first specific initial display position and the first specific performance display position, thereby increasing the number of frames of the video and increasing the frame rate to achieve a natural and smooth moving display, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed moving from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position in the order of the first specific initial display position, each of the first intermediate display positions, and the first specific performance display position for each display frame, thereby making it possible to display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moving at a slower speed than the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without reducing visibility.

In addition, for example, in the preview performance B, when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position is executed, and when pattern PBY-1 or PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position is executed, the rate at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are controlled to the jackpot game state at different rates can be recognized by the difference in the speed of the movement display.

In addition, when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position is executed, the rate at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is controlled to a jackpot state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position are executed, so that attention can be drawn to the moving display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement is performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the first performance display position, but the invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 23-34 (D) to (E), when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second initial display position to the second performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the second performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement may be performed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 23-33 (A) to (B), when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position and stopped at the second intermediate performance display position, or as shown in Figures 23-33 (D) to (E), when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position and stopped at the second specific performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement may be performed.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the recoil action display performed when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate display position or the second specific display position in the preview performance B has a larger amount of movement than the recoil action display performed when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific display position in the preview performance A. By doing this, the amount of movement in the preview performance B is larger than that of the preview performance A, so that the movement can be displayed in a more realistic manner.

In addition, it is preferable that the recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first display position in pattern PBY-3 of the preview performance B or after the jackpot announcement in the deciding performance is greater in amount of movement than the recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the second initial display position to the second display position in pattern PBY-4 of the preview performance B. By doing this, the recoil action display is larger when it moves downward than when it moves upward, so it is possible to display the movement in a more realistic manner.

(Action and Effects)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 241SG, the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position are both downward, and the movement amount L2 of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is greater than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2.
According to this feature, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can produce an impactful effect that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, thereby surprising the player.
In addition, it is possible to display movement at a speed that is difficult to achieve with the mounted movable body 32, or at a plurality of speeds, thereby enabling diversification of the presentation.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is compared with the speed of movement of the mounted movable body 32, but the invention is not limited to this, and a comparison may be made between the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the speed of movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, or a comparison may be made between the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the speed of movement of the second non-mounted movable body M200. In other words, as long as the comparison is made between the movement display of the pseudo movable body display and the speed of movement of the movable body, the type of pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be changed arbitrarily.

In addition, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is a display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 which performs a recoil action of a predetermined amount when moved from the first origin position to the first performance position, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position on the image display device 5, and when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the first performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement is performed, and the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved and displayed from the first origin position to the first performance position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first effect position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave a lasting impression on the player.

In the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is compared with the amount of movement of the recoil action of the first non-mounted movable body M100, but this invention is not limited to this, and a comparison may also be made between the recoil action display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the amount of movement of the recoil action of the second non-mounted movable body M200, or a comparison may be made between the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the recoil action of the mounted movable body 32. In other words, as long as the comparison is made between the amount of movement of the recoil action display of the pseudo movable body display and the recoil action of the movable body, the type of pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be changed arbitrarily.

In addition, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β or Super Reach γ, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher when development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed than when development performance B is executed without execution of development performance A.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of development performance A, which is a movable body performance, and development performance B, which is a pseudo-movable body display performance.
In addition, when development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when development performance A is not executed and development performance B is executed, this includes being controlled to a jackpot game state 100% of the time when development performance A and development performance B are executed.

In addition, it is possible to execute a preview performance A which predicts the possibility (expectation level) that the variable display result will be a jackpot, a development performance B which notifies that it will develop into a strong super reach performance, and a development suggestion performance which suggests the possibility that the development performance B will be executed. In the preview performance A, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific performance display position, and then moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then hidden. In the development performance B, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific performance display position, and then hidden without moving and displaying from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position. When the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific performance display position before executing the development performance B and displayed at the first specific initial display position is hidden, a character image Z310 can be displayed in the display area including the first specific performance display position.
According to this feature, in the preview performance A, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can focus on whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state without feeling any discomfort, while in the development suggestion performance, the display of the character image Z310 is prioritized over the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 being displayed moving in the same way as a movable body, and the character image Z310 is hidden without returning from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, so that the player can focus on the suggestion of the execution of the development performance B.

In addition, it is possible to execute a deciding effect which notifies the player whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, and a development effect B which notifies the player that the deciding effect will be executed by developing into a strong super reach effect. When the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in the development effect B, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and then is made invisible without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and the state at the start of the display of the reach title image Z51 which suggests the execution of the development effect B can be displayed in a display area including the first specific effect display position. When the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the deciding effect, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and then is made invisible.
According to this feature, before the deciding performance is executed, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 prioritizes displaying the suggestive image over displaying it in the same way as a movable body as a structure, and is hidden without returning it from the second display position to the first display position, so that the player can be drawn to the suggestion of the execution of the deciding performance.On the other hand, during the deciding performance, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body, so that the player can be drawn to the notification of content that is advantageous to the player without feeling uncomfortable.
In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in the development performance B (specific performance), and the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the deciding performance (special performance), but this invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to move a pseudo-movable body display that is common to the specific performance and the special performance.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position for each display frame in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position, and can display a specific image that emphasizes the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (for example, an effect image Z71 in which glass cracks and image Z71A showing multiple glass fragments scatters) in a display area including the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility, and the moving display can be emphasized with a specific image to make a good impression on the player.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position for each display frame, and the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, and the rate at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is controlled to the jackpot state (expected jackpot probability) differs between when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the second initial display position is moved from the second performance display position to the second performance display position is executed in the preview performance B and when patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position are executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed as moving, and it is also possible for the player to recognize that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which have different proportions of being controlled to a jackpot game state, are displayed at different speeds of movement.
In addition, the fact that the proportion of the pseudo-movable body display Z100 being controlled to the jackpot state (expected jackpot probability) differs when pattern PBY-3, in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, or pattern PBY-4, in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position, is executed, and when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is executed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position, includes cases where the proportion of the pseudo-movable body display Z200 being controlled to the jackpot state is 100% when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed in the preview performance B, and the proportion of the pseudo-movable body display Z200 being controlled to the jackpot game state is 0% when pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed, and cases where the proportion of the pseudo-movable body display Z200 being controlled to the jackpot game state is 100% when pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed in the preview performance B, and the proportion of the pseudo-movable body display Z200 being controlled to the jackpot game state is 0% when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed.

In addition, by making the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 display images having not only the performance display parts Z100A, Z200A but also the mechanism display parts Z100B, Z200B, etc., it is possible to more realistically represent the movable body operated by the drive mechanism and realize a movable body display performance similar to a movable body performance, while with regard to the movement display, it is possible not only to display the movement in a manner similar to the movement of the movable body, but also to display the movement in a manner that is difficult to realize with a movable body due to reasons such as the mechanism becoming complicated or the cost becoming high, thereby suitably improving the interest of the performance.

Furthermore, in characteristic section 241SG, examples of movement display in a manner that is difficult to achieve with a movable body include high-speed movement, deformed display, and erasing (not displaying) the display without returning from the performance display position to the initial display position. However, by realistically expressing the display manner of the pseudo-movable body display while displaying the movement display unrealistically, it is possible to provide a surprising performance.

In particular, the pseudo-movable body display that has been moved to the performance display position can be made invisible or visible at the desired timing, which has the effect of increasing the freedom of performance design, for example by avoiding a decrease in visibility due to other performance images being hidden when the movable body as a structure that has been moved to the performance position is returned to the origin position, making it possible to start the next performance immediately.

In addition, the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. This makes it possible to simulate a performance similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 by using the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves an impression on the player.

In addition, the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is longer than the moving distance L1 from the origin position to the performance position, so the first pseudo movable body display Z100 has a faster moving speed and a longer moving distance than the mounted movable body 32, and therefore can provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The pseudo-movable body display also includes performance display units Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B, and in the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display, the mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B reach the first performance display position before the performance display units Z100A, Z200A, allowing the pseudo-movable body display to be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the movement amount L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is greater than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2, so that the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the period of movement of the mounted movable body 32 between the origin position and the performance position includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases, and the period of movement display of the pseudo movable body display does not include the first period and the second period, so that the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

In addition, after the presentation control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first presentation position, it executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, thereby drawing the player's attention to the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed to the first presentation display position.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 does not illuminate the light-emitting display unit Z108A when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is being displayed moving, thereby making the incomplete first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that is being displayed moving less noticeable, thereby preventing a decrease in the performance effect.

In addition, after the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, it executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, thereby making it possible to move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate presentation display position or the second specific presentation display position, and the downward direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific presentation display position in the preview presentation A is different from the right direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific presentation display position in the preview presentation B. This makes it possible to move and display one pseudo-movable body display from multiple display positions, thereby providing the player with a surprising presentation that is difficult to achieve with a movable body.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can move the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, and then move it in a direction different from the direction in which it moves from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, thereby providing the player with a surprising presentation that would be difficult to achieve with a movable body.

(Variation 1)
Next, a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Fig. 23-41. Fig. 23-41 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

As explained in Figures 23-25, in the characteristic section 241SG, in the preview performance A, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, then moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then erased, and then, as the development performance A, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position.

Here, as shown in FIG. 23-41 (D), when the movable range of the mounted movable body 32 and the movable range of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 overlap in part, that is, when the mounted movable body 32 that has been moved to the performance position overlaps with the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific performance display position, if the performance control CPU 120 executes the movement of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position and the movement and display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 to the first specific performance display position during a common period, the mounted movable body 32 overlaps in front of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, making it difficult to see the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, making it easy to see that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is a display body and not a structure, reducing the interest of the performance.

In such a case, as shown in FIG. 23-41(A), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position, and then moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position (see FIG. 23-41(B)), and then erased without moving from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see FIG. 23-41(C)). This avoids the mounted movable body 32, which has moved from the origin position to the performance position as advanced performance A, from overlapping with the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, as shown in FIG. 23-41(D).

(Variation 2)
Next, a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Fig. 23-42. Fig. 23-42 (A) to (H) are diagrams showing a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic portion 241SG, a form has been exemplified in which the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position and the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first performance display position are the same direction (downward), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a case in which the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 as modified example 2 moves between the first position and a second position lower than the first position and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 as modified example 2 moves and displays between the first display position and the second display position higher than the first display position are the same direction (for example, up and down), it is sufficient that the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 401 from the first position to the second position.

In addition, the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 moves from the first position to the second position (downward) and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position (upward) may be different directions.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are not executed during a common period, but the invention is not limited to this, and as in this modified example 2, the movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 may be executed during a common period, making it possible to execute a performance using the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23-42, the mounted movable body 401 as modified example 2 is a structure on which the character "合" is displayed, and is movable between a first position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second position below the first position, the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R as modified example 2 are movable between a first predetermined position on the left or right side of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second predetermined position closer to the center than the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 as modified example 2 is capable of displaying the character "体" and is movable and displayed between a first display position at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second display position above the first display position. Note that detailed illustrations and descriptions of the drive mechanisms of the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are omitted.

For example, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance using the mounted movable bodies 401, 501L, 501R and the pseudo-movable body display Z402 in the above-mentioned preview performances A and B or development performances A and B, it first waits at the first position as shown in FIG. 23-42(A), displays the pseudo-movable body display Z402 at the first display position as shown in FIG. 23-42(B), and then moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display Z402 from the first display position to the second display position as shown in FIG. 23-42(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-42 (D), the mounted movable body 401 is moved from the first position toward the second position. Then, when the mounted movable body 401 moves to a position close to the pseudo movable body display Z402 displayed at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed toward the first display position. At this time, it is preferable to move and display the mounted movable body 401 so that it does not overlap with the pseudo movable body display Z402.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-42(E), when the mounted movable body 401 moves to the second position and the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves and displays to the first display position, the mounted movable body 401 is closest to the pseudo movable body display Z402, resulting in a pseudo-combined state in which the word "combined" can be recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 23-42(F), while maintaining the pseudo-combined state between the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402, the mounted movable body 401 is moved upward and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed upward, and further, the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are moved to the second predetermined position, thereby announcing that the pseudo-combination has been successful and the performance will develop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 23-42 (G), the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L, 501R are moved to a first position or a first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed in a manner in which the image is divided to a first specific display position (e.g., a position on the left or right side) different from the first display position, and then it is erased by framing out to the left or right of the screen or fading out.

On the other hand, if it has been decided to notify that the pseudo merging has not been successful and the performance will not progress, as shown in FIG. 23-42 (D), the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 is decelerated and stopped midway through the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the downward movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is displayed in a manner in which the upper part is destroyed, thereby notifying that the pseudo merging has not been successful and the performance will not progress. In this way, the pseudo movable body display Z402 can easily realize performances in a manner that is difficult to realize with a movable body as a structure.

(Variation 3)
Next, a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Fig. 23-43. Fig. 23-43 (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved between the first display position and the second display position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to a form in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved back and forth in one direction, such as up and down or left and right. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may move the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position as shown in Figures 23-43 (A) and (B), and then move it in a direction different from the direction in which it moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position as shown in Figure 23-43 (C).

As shown in FIG. 23-43(C), it is preferable to be able to execute various types of movement displays, such as displaying only the performance display unit Z200A in vertical rotation around a rotation axis facing left and right at the first performance display position, which is a rotational movement display different from a linear movement display facing one direction, or a movement display in a manner that moves in a direction different from the one direction (for example, the depth direction). In this way, it is possible to provide the player with unexpected effects that are difficult to achieve with a movable body.

The characteristic feature 241SG in the embodiment of this invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the invention.

(Explanation of Modifications and Applications)
In the characteristic portion 241SG, the mounted movable body 32 is applied as a movable body mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of movable bodies other than the mounted movable body 32 may be mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, the movable body is not limited to the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2, but may be a frame-side movable body provided on the game machine frame 3 or an opening/closing door that can open and close the game machine frame 3, and a pseudo-movable body display imitating the frame-side movable body may be movable and displayed. In addition, as the board-side movable body, a pseudo-movable body display imitating a variable winning device provided in relation to the game may be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 are applied as movable bodies that were planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but ended up not being mounted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and movable bodies other than the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 may be planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but ended up not being mounted.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased, an example is given of a form in which it is made invisible by gradually fading out, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect image emphasizing that it has been erased may be displayed, or it may be erased by a method other than these.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position is shorter than the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and a common effect image Z71 of glass cracking and glass fragments scattering is displayed and a common sound effect is output when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. However, this invention is not limited to this, and the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position may be longer than the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and different effect images may be displayed and different sound effects may be output when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. In this way, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be highlighted by utilizing the movement display of the pseudo movable body display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, during the variable display period of the super reach, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be executed a maximum of two times for the development performance A and the deciding performance, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be executed a maximum of two times for the preview performance B and the deciding performance, and the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be executed a maximum of four times for the preview performance A, the preview performance B, the development suggestion performance, and the development performance B, but the invention is not limited to this, and the number of times the movement of the movable body and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be executed may be executed a number of times other than the above.

Furthermore, if the movable body is allowed to move a first number of times in one variable display period, it is preferable to allow the pseudo movable body display to move a second number of times, which is greater than the first number, in one variable display period. By doing this, it is possible to avoid increasing the number of opportunities for the movable body performance to be performed too much, which would lower the expectation of a jackpot, and instead to prevent a decrease in interest due to fewer performances by increasing the number of opportunities for the pseudo movable body display to be performed.

In addition to the above multiple effects, for example, when the pattern is promoted in the re-draw after the jackpot confirmation notification or during the jackpot, the pseudo-movable body display may be moved, and the pseudo-movable body display that is moved at that time may be a pseudo-movable body display different from the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

In addition, an example has been given in which a preview effect A is applied as a special suggestion effect suggesting that control will be made into an advantageous state, a development effect B is applied as a notification effect notifying the player of content that is advantageous to the player, a development suggestion effect is applied as a predetermined effect suggesting that a notification effect will be executed, a decision effect is applied as a special effect notifying that control will be made into an advantageous state, and a preview effect B is applied as a specific effect suggesting that the special effect will be executed before the special effect is executed, but this invention is not limited to this, and various other effects besides those mentioned above can be applied. In addition, although these various effects could be executed during the variable display period of one Super Reach, they may also be effects that can be executed across multiple variable display periods.

In addition, in the case of the pachinko game machine 1, the contents that are advantageous to the player may include variable display results, controls, and effects such as pseudo consecutive wins, big wins, small wins, reach, reserved consecutive wins, chance-up effects, foresight notice effects, misses with time-saving, and ceiling time-saving control, which will be described later. In the case of the slot machine, the contents may include chance zone (CZ) wins, assist time (AT) wins, replay time (RT) wins, bonus wins, and the like.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, when the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is started, the brightness of the game effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 is lowered or turned off, thereby making the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 stand out, while when the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased, the brightness of the game effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 is increased or turned on, thereby diverting the player's attention from the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 241SG, it is preferable that while the player is able to adjust the light intensity of the game effect lamps 9 and the like provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3, the player is not able to adjust the light intensity of the light-emitting display portion Z108A of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pseudo-movable body display from being impaired or becoming less noticeable.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position is made invisible in the development suggestion performance, an example is given of a form in which the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed as the notification-related image in the display area including the first specific performance display position, but the invention is not limited to this, and the notification-related image may be an image other than a character image (for example, an image imitating smoke, fog, waves, etc.) as long as it is an image related to the notification performance (for example, development performance B).

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example was given of a form in which the reach title image Z51 is displayed in the state it is in when the display starts as a suggestive image that suggests the execution of a deciding performance in the development performance B, but this invention is not limited to this, and the suggestive image may be an image other than a reach title image (for example, a character image that appears in a strong super reach performance or a deciding performance) as long as it suggests the execution of a deciding performance.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, an example is given in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be displayed in separate periods, but this invention is not limited to this, and multiple pseudo movable body displays may be moved and displayed in a common period. In this case, for example, when the movable displayable range of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movable displayable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap, and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are displayed in the overlapping area, by displaying one of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 on a display layer closer to the viewer than the other, the viewer can be made aware of the relative positions of the two displays, thereby realizing a more realistic presentation.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, taking into consideration that the mechanism display portions Z100B, Z200B of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are displayed cut off at the edges of the display area of the image display device 5, the mounted movable body or a center decorative frame, etc. may be arranged so as to cover the portion in the display area of the image display device 5 where the display of the mechanism display portion of the pseudo-movable body display begins, or the mounted movable body may be moved to make it difficult to see the portion where the display of the mechanism display portion of the pseudo-movable body display begins.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example was given of a form in which the display result of the variable display includes "miss with time reduction", but the CPU 103 may be able to execute ceiling time reduction control, which controls the display to the time reduction state without going through the jackpot game state, based on the variable display having been performed a specified number of times (e.g., 900 times) since a specified condition (e.g., performing a clearing process to clear flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102 in the initialization process of step S6, controlling to the jackpot game state, or setting the display result to miss with time reduction) being met. The internal count of the specified number of times is reset when the specified condition is met, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state due to the ceiling time reduction control (e.g., 900 times) may be different from the number of time reductions in the normal time reduction state (e.g., 100 times).

When the above-mentioned ceiling time-saving control is executed and the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the above-mentioned specified number of times without the above-mentioned predetermined condition being met, the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute the moving display of the pseudo-movable body display such as the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. In this way, the moving display of the pseudo-movable body display may be executed in each notification such as a jackpot notification, a time-saving miss notification, and a ceiling time-saving control notification, and the type of pseudo-movable body display and the manner of the moving display may be different in each notification.

In addition, the characteristic portion 241SG has been exemplified as a form in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved to notify of a jackpot, but this invention is not limited to this. If the variable display result is a small jackpot or a miss with time reduction, or if the above-mentioned ceiling time reduction control is executed, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 may be moved to notify of a small jackpot or a miss with time reduction, or to notify that the conditions for executing the ceiling time reduction control have been met, while if the variable display result is a jackpot, the mounted movable body 32 may be moved to notify of a jackpot.

Also, when the display result of the variable display is a small win or a miss with time reduction, and when the display result of the variable display is a big win, a common type of pseudo-moving body display is used to notify, but the manner of the moving display may be different.Also, when the display result of the variable display is a small win or a miss with time reduction, and when the display result of the variable display is a big win, a pseudo-moving body display is used to notify, but the type of pseudo-moving body display may be different.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a certain probability variable state after a jackpot game ends is exemplified, but the invention is not limited to this, and it may be a so-called type 1/type 2 gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state by a V winning occurring as a result of a small jackpot in the time-saving state after a jackpot game ends, and the gameplay can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is given as an example of a game machine, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines in which a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed inside the game machine so that they can be circulated, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed game machines, scores or points are awarded to the player rather than game balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the game value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of this invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. In addition, a gaming machine that can be used for playing games is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but can also be a general gaming machine as long as it is capable of playing games.

LIST OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning port 11 ... Main board 12 ... Performance control board 13 ... Sound control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal pattern display device 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start port switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball hitting operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122...RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I/O
120 ... Performance control CPU
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state when a specific display result is derived and displayed by executing variable display of a plurality of types of performance identification information,
A movable body that can be moved;
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance ,
The performance execution means includes:
A special effect can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
A specific effect can be executed before the special effect is executed,
The display means is
The pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in the specific performance and the special performance,
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved in the specific performance, the pseudo-movable object display can be moved from the first display position to the second display position, and then hidden without being moved from the second display position to the first display position, and a suggestion image suggesting the execution of the special performance can be displayed in a display area including the second display position;
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved during the special performance, the pseudo-movable object display may be moved from the first display position to the second display position, and then moved from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden ;
The pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving at a speed faster than the moving speed of the movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images